Trailing-Edge
-
PDP-10 Archives
-
tops10v704_doca
-
10,7/docupd/cmnd.mem
There are 2 other files named cmnd.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.
TOPS-10
Operating System Commands Manual
| Electronically Distributed
|
|
|
| This manual contains descriptions of the TOPS-10
| monitor commands, their formats and their usage.
| This manual supercedes the TOPS-10 Operating
| System Commands Manual published in October, 1988.
| The order number for that manual, AA-0916F-TB, is
| obsolete.
Operating System: TOPS-10 Version 7.04
Software: GALAXY Version 5.1
digital equipment corporation maynard, massachusetts
| TOPS-10 Software Update Tape No. 02, June 1990
First Printing, July 1975
Revised, August 1977
Revised, March 1978
Revised, August 1980
Updated, July l982
Updated, February 1984
Revised, April 1986
Revised, October 1988
| Revised, June 1990
The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
affiliated companies.
| Copyright C 1975, 1984, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation.
All Rights Reserved.
CI DECtape LA50 SITGO-10
DDCMP DECUS LN01 TOPS-10
DEC DECwriter LN03 TOPS-20
DECmail DELNI MASSBUS TOPS-20AN
DECnet DELUA PDP UNIBUS
DECnet-VAX HSC PDP-11/24 UETP
DECserver HSC-50 PrintServer VAX
DECserver 100 KA10 PrintServer 40 VAX/VMS
DECserver 200 KI Q-bus VT50
DECsystem-10 KL10 ReGIS
DECSYSTEM-20 KS10 RSX d i g i t a l
CONTENTS
PREFACE
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 OPERATING SYSTEM MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.1 Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.2 Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 INTERACTIVE LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4.1 Monitor Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.2 User Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5 CONTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6 SPECIAL CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.1 CTRL/C - Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.2 DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.3 CTRL/W - Delete Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.4 CTRL/U - Delete Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.5 CTRL/R - Reprint Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.6.6 CTRL/O - Cancel Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.6.7 CTRL/S - Hold Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.6.8 CTRL/Q - Resume Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.6.9 CTRL/T - Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7 TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8 COMMAND FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8.1 Command Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8.2 Line Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8.3 Command Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8.3.1 Relative Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.8.3.2 Absolute Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.8.4 Command Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.4.1 Temporary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.4.2 Permanent Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.8.5 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.9 FILE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.9.1 Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.9.1.1 Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.9.1.2 Physical Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.9.1.3 File Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.9.1.4 Logical Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.9.1.5 Ersatz Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.9.2 File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.9.3 Directory Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.9.4 Protection Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.9.5 File Daemon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.10 SYSTEM DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.11 WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
iii
1.12 SEARCH LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.13 LIBRARIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.14 DIRECTORY PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.15 USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.16 PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER . . . . . . . 1-38
1.16.1 LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES . . . . . . 1-38
1.16.1.1 ESCape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.16.1.2 Control Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.16.2 Font Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.16.3 Loading Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM COMMANDS
2.1 FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM COMMANDS
2.0.1 Job-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.0.2 Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.0.3 Terminal-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.0.4 Terminal-Communication Commands . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.0.5 File-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.0.6 Device-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.0.7 Program-Preparation Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.0.8 Program-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.0.9 Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.0.10 MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ACCOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
ASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
ATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
BACKSPACE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
CANCEL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
CCONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
CLOSE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
COMPILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
CONTEXT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
CONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
COPY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
CORE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
CPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
CREF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
CSTART Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
DAYTIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
DDT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
DEALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
DEASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
DEBUG Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
DECLARE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
iv
DELETE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
DEPOSIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
DETACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
DIRECTORY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
DISMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
DSK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
ENABLE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
EOF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
EXAMINE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
EXECUTE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
FILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
FINISH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
FUDGE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
GET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
HALT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
HELP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
INITIA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
JCONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
KJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
LABEL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
LIST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
LOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
LOGIN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
MAIL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
MAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
MERGE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
MOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200
NETWORK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
NODE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217
PASSWORD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220
PJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-221
PLOT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-225
POP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235
PRESERVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237
PRINT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239
PROTECT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251
PUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
PUSH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-254
R Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282
REASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284
REATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-286
REENTER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
RENAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-290
RESOURCES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
REWIND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293
RUN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-294
SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-297
SCHED Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-299
SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-301
SESSION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304
v
SET BLOCKSIZE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306
SET BREAK Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307
SET CDR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311
SET CPU Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-314
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-316
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command . . . . . . . . . 2-317
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command . . . . . . . . 2-318
SET DEFER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-321
SET DENSITY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-324
SET DSKFUL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-325
SET DSKPRI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-326
SET FORMAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328
SET HOST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
SET HPQ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332
SET PHYSICAL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-334
SET RETRY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336
SET SPOOL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-337
SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command . . . . . . . 2-339
SET TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-340
SET TTY or TTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-352
SET WATCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-354
SHOW ALLOCATION Command . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358
SHOW QUEUES Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-362
SKIP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364
START Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-365
SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367
SYSTAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-380
TECO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-384
TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-385
TPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-387
TRANSLATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-399
TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-400
UNLOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402
USESTAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-403
VERSION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-405
WHERE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-409
ZERO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-411
APPENDIX A FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
APPENDIX B SWITCH.INI FILES
APPENDIX C COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
C.1 INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION) . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 THE + CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.3 THE = CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
vi
C.4 THE < > CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C.5 DEFAULT COMPILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.6 COMPILER SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.7 LINK SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
APPENDIX D STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
D.1 FILE NAME EXTENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.2 RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS . . . . . . . D-7
D.3 ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
APPENDIX E CARD CODES
APPENDIX F TEMPORARY FILES
APPENDIX G SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES
INDEX
TABLES
1-1 Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-2 Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-3 Protection Codes for Field 1 . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-4 Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3 . . . . . . 1-30
2-1 Terminal Hardware Characteristics . . . . . . . 2-342
2-2 Fill Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-346
A-1 Functional Groups of Commands . . . . . . . . . . A-1
C-1 Processor Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
D-1 File Name Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D-2 Project-Programmer Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D-3 Ersatz Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
E-1 ASCII Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E-2 DEC-026 Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
F-1 Temporary Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
PREFACE
The TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual describes the commands
available to the users of the TOPS-10 Operating System. See the
TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for a description of all operator-privileged
commands.
Commands to TOPS-10 are presented in alphabetical order in Chapter 2
for easy reference.
Reference material for assembly language programming can be found in
the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual Volumes 1 and 2, the DECsystem-10
MACRO Assembler Reference Manual, and the DEC10/20 Processor Reference
Manual.
Getting Started with DECsystem-10 introduces first-time users to the
TOPS-10 operating system command language. You should read this
manual at least once before reading the TOPS-10 Operating System
Commands Manual. You should also be familiar with Introduction to
DECsystem-10.
SYNOPSIS OF TOPS-10 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS MANUAL
Chapter 1 describes the components of the TOPS-10 operating system and
how to use them.
Chapter 2 lists the functional categories of commands, lists all the
commands alphabetically, and describes each command in detail.
Examples accompany the command descriptions.
The appendixes contain additional reference material.
viii
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
The following conventions are used in this manual:
Convention Meaning
addr Program or location address
arg An argument to a command
c(addr) The contents of an octal address
core Refers to main (processor) memory
CTRL/x A control character. Control characters are explained
in Section 1.6.
date A date in the form of dd-mm-yy. For example, 22-11-93
represents November 22, 1993.
date-time The date and time in the standard format. (Refer to
Section 1.8.3.)
density The density of a magnetic tape
dev: Any logical or physical device name. A colon (:)
device-name must be included when a device name is part of a
file specification. Refer to Section 1.9.1.
[directory] A directory name. This can be either a UFD or an
[dir] SFD.
expression A numeric expression
file.ext A file name and a file extension, separated by a period
file name A name of a file
file-spec A file specification written in the format:
dev:file.ext[directory]. Refer to Section 1.9.
fs File structure
h High, referring to a job's high segment
hh:mm:ss The time of day using a 24-hour clock (0 through 23),
where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds
id An identifier
job A job number
ix
jobname The name of the job.
key A keyword to a command argument.
l Low, referring to a job's low segment
letter An alphabetic character
lh The left half of an octal word
line-number Refers to the number of the line
list A list of arguments
logical-name A logical device name, chosen by the user
log-name
log
memory The decimal number of memory words measured in K or P.
1K is equal to 1024 words; 1P (page) is equal to 512
words.
MFD A master file directory
<nnn> A protection code
nnnn A tape density
n A decimal number, such as a unit number
^name^ A DECtape identifier
nodelist A list of all the systems in a network environment
PPN A project-programmer number
program A program name
proj,prog A project-programmer number
[proj,prog] The name of a user-file directory
[ppn]
oo An octal number
rh The right half of an octal word
SFD A sub-file directory
spec A specification of a file
str A file structure name
x
/switch A command line modifier
time Refers to a time of day
UFD A user-file directory
v Version number
x A numeric or text variable
xx A node number in a device name
$ The symbol printed on your terminal when you press the
ESCape (ALTmode) key
^x A character that is printed when you press the CONTROL
key while you type a character key. For example,
typing a CTRL/C prints ^C at your terminal.
<DEL> Indicates when you should press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key
<RET> Indicates when you should press the RETURN key
<ESC> Indicates when you should press the ESCape (ALTmode)
key
| Vertical bars (|) in the left margin denote changes or
additions to the TOPS-10 Operating System since the
last printing of this manual
All examples, commands, switches, values, and arguments are shown in
uppercase. This is for the sake of distinction. Examples are shown
as they would appear on a terminal that does not have lowercase
ability.
MANUALS REFERENCED
The following manuals are referred to in the text of this manual:
Introduction to DECsystem-10
Getting Started with DECsystem-10
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual
TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual, Vols. 1 and 2
DECsystem-10 MACRO Assembler Reference Manual
xi
DEC10/20 Processor Reference Manual
TOPS-10 Operator's Guide
TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide
TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference Manual
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual
TOPS-10 DDT Manual
TOPS-10 MAKLIB User's Guide
VT52 Owner's Manual
LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual
xii
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
TOPS-10 is the name of the Timesharing Operating System for use on
DIGITAL's KL10 and KS10 systems. You communicate with the TOPS-10
operating system using the TOPS-10 command language. The TOPS-10
operating system is also called the monitor.
1.1 JOBS
TOPS-10 is a timesharing system; that is, the system transfers control
rapidly among a number of jobs, so that all jobs appear to be running
simultaneously. The term job refers to the entire sequence of steps
that you start from your terminal or card deck. You start a job from
your terminal by using the LOGIN command, and you use the KJOB command
to end your job.
You can initiate a job at a central computer site or from a remote
location.
After you initiate a job, you can initiate a second job without
terminating the first. For example, you can initiate a timesharing
job and, using the SUBMIT command, submit a second job for batch
processing. (The SUBMIT command is discussed in Chapter 2.)
When configuring and loading TOPS-10, the system administrator sets
the maximum number of jobs the system can process.
1.2 CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM
Only authorized users have access to TOPS-10. Your system
administrator provides each authorized user with a user name, a
project programmer number (PPN), and a password. These identify all
users and their corresponding areas on file structures. When you
specify a directory area, your project-programmer number identifies
you. A comma separates the project and programmer numbers, and the
1-1
INTRODUCTION
entire PPN is enclosed in square brackets. For example, [27,4072].
1-2
INTRODUCTION
The project numbers range from 1 to 377777 (octal). The programmer
numbers range from 1 to 777777 (octal). Numbers 1 through 7 are
reserved for DIGITAL, and numbers 400000 through 777777 are reserved
for special purposes.
Your password is one to thirty-nine characters long and is used when
you log in to the system and when you attach to another job. (Refer
to the LOGIN and ATTACH commands, Chapter 2.) To maintain password
secrecy, the monitor does not echo your password on the terminal.
When you are using a terminal with local copy, a mask is printed when
you type your password, making the password unreadable.
1.3 OPERATING SYSTEM MODES
You can run jobs on the TOPS-10 operating system in two modes:
interactive mode and batch mode.
1.3.1 Interactive Mode
Jobs that run in interactive mode use a terminal to access the system.
The language you use to run a job is the command language. The
commands you type on the terminal are received and processed by the
command language interpreter of the TOPS-10 monitor. When your job is
in interactive mode, you complete your work at two levels: monitor
and user level. Section 1.4. discusses interactive levels.
1.3.2 Batch Mode
Batch jobs communicate with the system in batch mode. They are input
to the system from punched cards or from the terminal. Batch jobs are
handled by the batch command interpreter. For information about
TOPS-10 batch, refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual.
1.4 INTERACTIVE LEVELS
When your terminal is in interactive mode, your job is at one of two
levels, monitor level or user level.
1-3
INTRODUCTION
1.4.1 Monitor Level
When your job is at monitor level, you are communicating with the
monitor. The command language interpreter processes each command you
type. The monitor prompts you with a period (.). Every monitor
command should follow this prompt. You end a monitor command by
pressing the RETURN key (<RET>).
The format of each command is variable because many commands are
followed by optional switches, arguments, or values. (See Section
1.8.)
Section 1.6 contains descriptions of the control characters and
special keys you use when typing commands.
1.4.2 User Level
When you type the operating system command RUN, followed by a program
name, your job moves from monitor level to user level. To move back
to monitor level, type CTRL/C. If the program is not waiting for
terminal input, it may be necessary to type CTRL/C twice. (Refer to
Section 1.6.1.)
Other commands also bring your job to user level. When your job is at
user level, you are working with a program other than the operating
system itself. Each program has its own set of commands and its own
command interpreter. This manual describes some system programs.
System programs usually prompt with an asterisk (*).
At user level, control characters and special keys can have a
different effect than they have at monitor level. Read the
description of each program to determine the effects of the control
characters and special keys.
The following example shows a dialogue with the system in an
interactive job:
Example
Monitor level:
.R SETSRC<RET>
User level and program response:
*T<RET>
DSKC:,DSKB:,FENCE
1-4
INTRODUCTION
User level:
*A DSKN:<RET>
User level and program response:
*T<RET>
DSKC:,DSKB:,DSKN:,FENCE
CTRL/C to return to monitor level:
*^C
Monitor prompt at monitor level:
.
1.5 CONTEXTS
A core image is what a job's portion of memory contains at any given
time. The core image, as well as information about the monitor's
state with respect to your job, constitute a context. When you
initialize a program, your context usually changes. For instance,
running the DIRECT program creates a core image with the DIRECT
program in it. Exiting DIRECT and then running SYSTAT, for example,
destroys what you had in memory (the DIRECT program) and loads data
pertinent to SYSTAT.
Three commands allow you to display information about contexts, and
manipulate them in various ways. These commands are CONTEXT, PUSH,
and POP. CONTEXT and PUSH create additional contexts. POP returns
you to a superior context. When you work with multiple contexts, at
least one context is preserved while you work with the current
context.
You can work with multiple contexts by creating parallel contexts, or
creating inferior contexts. The default maximum number of contexts,
including current, parallel, and inferior, is four. The number of
contexts in use at any moment is shown by the CONTEXT command. You
can also use the CONTEXT command to create parallel contexts. You
might create a parallel context, run a frequently accessed program in
it, and then exit, returning to your previous context. Both contexts
now exist simultaneously. When you need to use the program in the
created context, simply switch to that context. You will not have to
wait for it to reinitialize. The full description of the CONTEXT
command in Chapter 2 gives an example of this procedure, including how
to create and access a parallel context.
1-5
INTRODUCTION
The PUSH command allows you to create an inferior context. When you
return to your previous task in a superior context, the inferior
context is deleted. You return to the superior context using the POP
command. An inferior context could be used in the following
situation: If you were in the process of completing a task, and
needed to see some HELP text, you could create an inferior context,
read the HELP text you needed, destroy the inferior context and return
to the unchanged superior context. The system automatically creates a
new context for certain commands. The system manager can set the
system to create a new context when any monitor command is issued.
1.6 SPECIAL CHARACTERS
The command language interpreter recognizes several special characters
that cause specific functions to be performed.
These special characters are described in the following sections.
1.6.1 CTRL/C - Interrupt
When you type a CTRL/C (control-C), the monitor interrupts your
current running program and returns your terminal to monitor mode.
You must type two CTRL/Cs if your program is not requesting input from
your terminal (that is, if your program is executing). If you issue a
CTRL/C while typing a command in monitor mode, this character causes
the input line to be deleted. If you issue two CTRL/Cs while output
is being printed on your terminal, the output is ended.
Example
This example shows a program prompt. CTRL/C brings your job to
monitor level.
*^C
.
1.6.2 DELETE Key
When you press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key, the monitor deletes the last
character you typed. This function permits you to correct typing
errors. When you press the DELETE key n times, the monitor deletes
the last n characters that you typed. On hard-copy terminals the
monitor echoes all deleted characters on your terminal and encloses
the deleted characters in backslashes (\).
1-6
INTRODUCTION
On video terminals the deleted characters that you typed are removed
from the screen. However, you must inform the monitor of the kind of
terminal you are using. (Refer to the SET TTY command in Chapter 2.)
After you press RETURN or ESCape, you cannot use the DELETE function
on that line.
Example
Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, press the DELETE key 3
times, then type the correct characters.
.SET TTY TYPE L036\630\A36<RET>
.
1.6.3 CTRL/W - Delete Word
When you type CTRL/W (control-W), the monitor deletes the last word
you typed.
A word is defined as all spaces, tabs, and alphanumeric characters
until a nonalphanumeric character is encountered.
On video terminals, the deleted word is erased from the screen.
On hard-copy terminals, the deleted word is printed backwards between
backslashes.
Example
Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, type CTRL/W, and type the
correct characters.
.SET TTY TYPE L036\630L\LA36<RET>
.
1.6.4 CTRL/U - Delete Line
When you type CTRL/U (control-U), the monitor deletes your current
input line, back to the last time you pressed RETURN. On hard-copy
terminals, the monitor responds with a carriage-return/line-feed,
after which you can retype the line. On video terminals, the entire
line that you typed is removed from the screen. After you have
pressed RETURN, you can no longer use the line-editing features (for
example, CTRL/U and DELETE) on that line.
1-7
INTRODUCTION
Example
Type CTRL/U.
.SETTTY ^U
Type the correct characters.
SET TTY LA36<RET>
.
1.6.5 CTRL/R - Reprint Line
When you type CTRL/R (control-R), the monitor reprints the current
input line. If you type a line incorrectly, then make corrections
using the DELETE key, the monitor will print the corrected line when
you type CTRL/R. The following is an example of this operation using
a hard-copy terminal:
Example
If you type:
SET TTQ<DEL>Y N0<DEL>O FILE<DEL>L
The line appears as:
.SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L
If you then press CTRL/R:
.SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L ^R
The monitor prints:
SET TTY NO FILL
When you type CTRL/R, the monitor issues a carriage-return/line-feed
before printing the corrected input line. The cursor or printing head
of your terminal is left at its previous location.
If a program such as your text editor uses CTRL/R for another purpose,
you can disable the CTRL/R function using the SET TTY RTCOMP command.
(See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)
1-8
INTRODUCTION
1.6.6 CTRL/O - Cancel Output
When you type CTRL/O (control-O), the monitor cancels output to your
terminal. This function is useful when a program begins to print a
long message that you are not interested in reading. If you do not
want to wait for the monitor to finish printing the message, you can
stop the monitor from printing the message one of two ways. First,
you can type two CTRL/Cs, but this action also stops the execution of
the program. Second, you can type a single CTRL/O.
When you type CTRL/O, the monitor continues executing your program,
but does not print any output on your terminal. The monitor begins
printing to your terminal when one of the following conditions occurs:
o The executing program requests input from your terminal.
o The program ends and returns control to the monitor.
o You type CTRL/C twice, which returns control to the monitor.
To start the output to your terminal again, type another CTRL/O.
1.6.7 CTRL/S - Hold Output
When you type CTRL/S (control-S), the monitor holds output to your
terminal. This control character works only after you have typed the
SET TTY PAGE command. (See Chapter 2.) This control character is
useful if you have a display terminal, and you have to stop the output
to read it. To read the rest of the output, type CTRL/Q.
1.6.8 CTRL/Q - Resume Output
When you type CTRL/Q (control-Q), the monitor resumes output to your
terminal. CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are useful when you are using a display
terminal. Used in conjunction with CTRL/S, you can stop and continue
output to your terminal, thus reading a file before it scrolls off
your display screen.
1-9
INTRODUCTION
1.6.9 CTRL/T - Job Status
When you type CTRL/T (control-T), the monitor prints status
information pertaining to your job on your terminal. CTRL/T does not
echo on your terminal. There are 11 items of information output to
your terminal. These items are:
1. The incremental daytime (which is the time since you last
issued a CTRL/T or a USESTAT command) or the time since you
logged in if you have not issued a CTRL/T or a USESTAT
command. (For example, Day: :05:43.)
2. The incremental runtime, which is the CPU time used since you
issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN command, or TIME
command. (For example, Run:0.48.)
3. The incremental disk reads, which is the number of disk
blocks read since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN
command, or DSK command. (For example, Rd:75.)
4. Incremental disk writes, which is the number of disk blocks
written since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT, LOGIN, or DSK
command. (For example, Wr:8.)
5. The program name. (For example, SOS.)
6. The memory size. (For example, 12+19P.)
7. The current context number (for example, Ctx:1.)
8. The job state. The job state codes are described in the
SYSTAT command description in Chapter 2. (For example, ^C.)
An ampersand after the job state code indicates the job is
locked in core. An asterisk indicates the job is being run
or swapped.
9. The program counter, which is the address of the current
instruction. (For example, PC:400275.)
|
| 10. The CPU that the job last ran on. (For example, CPU0.)
11. The job state, which can be INPUT WAIT or OUTPUT WAIT. This
item is printed only when you type CTRL/T from user level.
(For example, OUTPUT WAIT FOR TTY21.)
This information can be obtained with the USESTAT command at monitor
level. However, by typing CTRL/T, you can determine your job's
progress without interrupting its execution. When you type CTRL/T,
the character is not passed to your job as an input character.
However, some programs activate a special interrupt feature when you
type CTRL/T. (See the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.)
1-10
INTRODUCTION
If a system program, such as your text editor uses CTRL/T for another
purpose, you can disable the CTRL/T function using the SET TTY RTCOMP
command. (See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)
Example
|
| Day: :05:43 Run:8.51 Rd:48 Wr:37 DIRECT
| 15+33P Ctx:1 ^C PC:400275 CPU0
1.7 TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY
Type-ahead allows you to type another command without waiting for the
monitor to respond to your first command. If you want two operations
performed, you can begin typing the request for the second operation
before you receive the prompt that the monitor prints after completing
the first operation. If an error occurs during the first operation,
the characters you typed ahead are ignored.
1.8 COMMAND FORMATS
The general format of each command is a line of ASCII uppercase or
lowercase characters or a mixture of uppercase and lowercase
characters. You type the commands after the monitor prints the
TOPS-10 prompt (.). The following are examples of valid TOPS-10
commands:
.DIRECT
.direct
.dirECT
If you type spaces or tabs before a command name, the system ignores
them. For example, the following commands produce the same result:
.DIRECT
. DIRECT
The commands you type to the command language interpreter are one to
six characters long. If you type any character past the sixth
character, the monitor ignores it. You need only type enough
characters to uniquely identify the command.
It is sometimes possible to abbreviate a command by typing characters
fewer than would make the command unique. This is not encouraged,
however, because uniqueness of a command may vary from monitor release
to monitor release. For this reason, you should use the whole command
in a batch control file.
1-11
INTRODUCTION
1.8.1 Command Termination
You terminate every command to the command language interpreter by
pressing the RETURN key. For example:
.DIRECT<RET>
1.8.2 Line Continuation
You can continue a command line to some system programs, such as
DIRECT and QUEUE, by placing a hyphen (-) as the last nonblank,
noncomment character before you press the RETURN key. These programs
treat continuation lines as part of the current command line. This
feature allows you to type indefinitely long command lines. A line is
terminated by a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen.
1.8.3 Command Arguments
You specify arguments to a command after the command name and separate
them from the command name by a space. If the command language
interpreter recognizes a command name, but cannot find a necessary
argument, the monitor responds with the error message:
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
Example
The ASSIGN command requires arguments.
.ASSIGN<RET>
System error message:
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
TOPS-10 prompt:
.
After the monitor prints the error message, your terminal is left in
monitor mode, as indicated by the monitor prompt. You can then retype
the command.
1-12
INTRODUCTION
1.8.3.1 Relative Date-Time Arguments - Certain commands require
arguments that specify a date or time. Date and time arguments can be
either relative or absolute. A relative argument specifies a certain
length of time from the current date or time. The format of a
relative argument is:
+number-of-daysD:hours:minutes:seconds
Where:
number-of-days is optional.
D is required if you specify number of days.
hours is optional if you specify number of days with
the letter D. Otherwise, hours is required.
minutes is optional.
seconds is optional. However, if you specify seconds,
minutes must also be given or seconds will be
interpreted as minutes.
You must type a colon to separate one field from the other. You can
precede a relative argument with an optional plus (+) or minus (-)
sign. The sign implies either past (-) or future (+). When you do
not specify number of days, you must precede the time with a plus sign
or a minus sign. For example:
-3D:4:27:21
means 3 days, 4 hours, 27 minutes, and 21 seconds ago. Similarly:
+4
means 4 hours from now.
1.8.3.2 Absolute Date-Time Arguments - An absolute argument specifies
a particular date or time. The format of an absolute argument is one
of the following:
o weekday:hours:minutes:seconds
o date:hours:minutes:seconds
o keyword:hours:minutes:seconds
1-13
INTRODUCTION
Where: weekday is the day of the week or one of the following:
YESTERDAY, TODAY, TOMORROW.
This part of the argument is optional. The weekdays are
abbreviated as follows:
SUNDAY = SUN
MONDAY = MON
TUESDAY = TUES
WEDNESDAY = WED
THURSDAY = THUR
FRIDAY = FRI
SATURDAY = SAT
date is optional and has one of the following formats:
day-month-year (21-OCT-79)
month-day-year (OCT-21-79)
numeric month-day-year (10-21-79)
The month can be abbreviated. The abbreviations for
the months are JA, F, MAR, AP, MAY, JUN, JUL, AU, S, O,
N, and D.
The year and its preceding hyphen are optional, and, if
given, can be one, two, or four digits. For example,
0, 90, and 1990 will all be interpreted as the year
1990.
keyword is one of the following options:
LOGIN (time of login)
NOON
MIDNIGHT
hours is based on a 24-hour clock (0 through 23) and is
required if you omitted the weekday, date, or keyword, or if
you specify minutes.
minutes is optional unless you specify seconds.
seconds is optional.
1-14
INTRODUCTION
The following example specifies Wednesday at 9:15:06 AM.
Example
WED:09:15:06
Because the date is known to be past or future from either the switch
used (/BEFORE and /SINCE imply past, /AFTER implies the future) or by
a plus or minus sign, an unspecified field is filled in so that the
result is the next or last occurrence of the specified date. If you
omit the time argument, the time defaults to 00:00:00 (midnight) if
past, and 23:59:59 (11 o'clock, 59 minutes, and 59 second PM) if
future.
Examples
/AFTER:SAT is after 23:59:59 next Saturday
/BEFORE:25-FEB is before last February 25th
/SINCE:JUL-3-85 is since July 3, 1985 at midnight
1-15
INTRODUCTION
1.8.4 Command Switches
You can modify some commands by including a switch in the command
line. You precede each switch with a slash (/) and terminate it with
a nonalphanumeric character, usually <RET>, a comma, or another
switch. You can abbreviate the switch if its name remains unique.
Abbreviation is not recommended for batch control files. Valid
switches for each command are documented as part of the command
descriptions in Chapter 2. The following is an example of a command,
command argument, and command switch:
Example
.PRINT MYFILE.EXT/COPIES:2
1.8.4.1 Temporary Switches - The switches for COMPILE-class commands
are either temporary (local) or permanent (global). COMPILE-class
commands are further described in Appendix C. A temporary switch
applies only to the immediately preceding file. Do not place a space
or comma between the file name and the switch. In the command
construction:
.COMPILE PROG,TEST/MACRO,SUBLET
the /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.
1.8.4.2 Permanent Switches - A permanent switch, sometimes called a
sticky switch, applies to all files following it on the command line,
until you modify it by a subsequent switch. You separate the switch
from the file name by spaces, commas, or a combination of both. For
example, using the /MACRO switch:
Examples
Temporary switch that affects PROG:
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO TEST,SUBLET
Temporary switch that affects PROG:
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET
Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:
.COMPILE PROG,/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET
Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:
1-16
INTRODUCTION
.COMPILE PROG,/MACRO TEST,SUBLET
The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG command descriptions in Chapter
2 list the switches for these commands.
1.8.5 Comments
You can type a comment on the same line as a command by preceding the
comment with a semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!). The monitor
and the batch command language interpreters do not attempt to
interpret the characters after the semicolon. Comment lines are
useful when you are using a hard-copy terminal, or making control
files for batch jobs. The following is an example of a line that
contains both a command and a comment:
.DIRECT ;will list names of files in default area <RET>
1-17
INTRODUCTION
1.9 FILE SPECIFICATION
The system stores programs and data as named files. When they are
stored on DECtape or disk, files are identified by a file
specification. The file specification includes the following
identifications:
1. A device name or file structure name
2. A file name
3. A file name extension
4. An ordered list of directory names
5. An access protection code
The file specification is necessary to identify a disk file. If you
issue a file specification for devices other than DECtape or disk, the
monitor ignores them. File specifications are used to choose a file
from a directory, a set of files belonging to a specific user.
DECtapes and disks are the only directory-oriented devices. Items 4
and 5 in the above list do not apply to DECtapes.
The device name can be any valid device name described in the Section
1.9.1. Always type a colon following the device name. An example of
a device name is DSKC:.
A file name is one to six alphanumeric characters. The monitor
ignores all characters past the sixth. File names are discussed in
Section 1.9.2. An example of a device name and a file name is
DSKC:MYFILE.
The file name extension is a period (.) followed by zero to three
characters. It is used to indicate the type of information in the
file. (Refer to Appendix D for a list of standard file name
extensions.) For the most efficient use of system resources, use only
standard file name extensions, though other extensions can be valid.
Most programs recognize file names and extensions consisting only of
letters and digits. Often the term file name refers to both the file
name and the file extension. An example of a device name, file name,
and file extension is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT.
The directory name identifies the disk area where the file is stored.
This list can be a user file directory (UFD) represented by the
owner's project-programmer number, or a user file directory followed
by one or more sub-file directories (SFDs). You must enclose a
directory name in square brackets ([]). Directory names are discussed
in Section 1.9.3. An example of a device name, file name, file
extension and directory name is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589].
1-18
INTRODUCTION
The access protection code of a file is a 3-digit octal code
designating the users who can read or write the file. The code must
be enclosed in angle brackets (< >), and you specify it only for
output files. For a given file, users are divided into three groups:
owner of the file, users with the same project number as the owner,
and all other users. The standard protection code is <057>, allowing
users in the owner's project to read and execute the file, and
preventing access by all other users. The standard protection code
may be different at your installation. Protection codes are described
in Section 1.9.4. An example of a full file specification is
DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589]<055>.
The following information is necessary when you refer to a file:
o The file name.
o The device name, if the file is not on disk and not in your
default search list.
o The directory name, if the file is not in your directory.
The following information is optional in a file specification:
o The file name extension.
o The device name, if the file is on a file structure in your
search list.
o The directory name, if the file is in your directory.
o The protection code (if an output file).
Examples
File name and file name extension:
TEXT.MAC
Physical device name and file name:
DTA3:FILEA
Generic device name, file name, file name extension and directory
name:
DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]
A complete file specification: device name, file name, file name
extension, directory name, and protection code:
DSKA:MAIN.F4[27,235]<057>
1-19
INTRODUCTION
1.9.1 Device Names
TOPS-10 supports a number of peripheral input/output devices to handle
data acquisition, storage, retrieval, and display. These devices are:
Card Punch Card Reader DECtape
Disk Display Terminal Graphics Display
Hard-copy Terminal Line Printer Magnetic Tape
Paper Tape Punch Paper Tape Reader Plotter
The monitor allocates a device to your job when you request access to
the device. (Refer to the ASSIGN and MOUNT commands in Chapter 2.)
Until you request a device, it resides in the system pool of available
resources.
To reference a device, you must specify a device name. In the command
descriptions in this manual, places where you must supply a device
name have the symbol dev: in the command line format. The types of
device names are listed in Table 1.1 and are described in Sections
1.9.1.1 through 1.9.1.5.
Table 1-1: Device Names
______________________________________________________________________
Type of Name Meaning
______________________________________________________________________
generic These specify a generic type of device such
as a disk (DSK:) or a magnetic tape (MTA:).
physical These specify a particular physical unit on
a specific controller such as MTA1:,
magnetic-tape unit number 1.
logical These are substitute names for devices. You
assign these names with the ASSIGN command.
ersatz These are names for ersatz (pseudo-disk)
devices normally used to contain libraries
or special directories.
system defined These are names defined by the system.
logical Each name corresponds to a physical unit so
long as the unit is declared to be the
system default for that unit.
______________________________________________________________________
1-20
INTRODUCTION
1.9.1.1 Generic Device Names - The most general type of device name
is the generic device name. When you specify a generic name, the
monitor selects a free unit of the device type specified. When your
computer is in a network environment, the monitor chooses the device
from those devices at your location, or, if none are available, the
monitor chooses the device from the host (central) site.
A generic name can be two or three letters long and is followed by a
colon (:). The generic names are listed in Table 1-2.
Two-character generic names are less specific than three-character
generic names. For example, MT: means any magnetic tape unit, but
MTA: means any magnetic tape unit on controller A. When you specify
the generic name DSK: or DS:, the monitor uses your job search list to
determine which disk device should be selected for you. (Refer to
Section 1.12.)
Table 1-2: Generic Device Names
______________________________________________________________________
3-Letter 2-Letter
Device Device Name Device Name
______________________________________________________________________
Card punch CDP: CP:
Card reader CDR: CR:
Console terminal CTY: ---
DECtape DTx: DT:
Disk DSK: DS:
Packs DPx: DP:
RPx: RP:
Fixed head FHx: FH:
FSx: FS:
Display DIS: ---
Line printer LPT: LP:
lowercase/uppercase --- LL:
uppercase --- LU:
Magnetic tape MTx: ---
7-track --- M7:
9-track --- M9:
Operator terminal OPR: ---
Paper-tape punch PTP: PP:
Paper-tape reader PTR: PR:
Plotter PLT: ---
Pseudo-terminal PTY: ---
System library SYS: SY:
Terminal TTY: TT:
______________________________________________________________________
1-21
INTRODUCTION
When you specify a generic name, the monitor selects the
lowest-numbered available unit of the device type specified. There
are two defaults when you specify a generic name:
1. When your program specifies DSK or DS, the system uses your
job search list.
2. When you specify TTY: or TT:, the monitor always selects your
terminal (assuming that these are not logical names).
1.9.1.2 Physical Device Names - Every I/O device has a physical name.
This name consists of the generic name, a letter indicating the
controller, and one numeric character indicating the unit number. For
example, the generic name MTA: indicates any magnetic tape unit on
controller A. However, MTA1: indicates magnetic tape unit 1 on
controller A.
1.9.1.3 File Structures - The TOPS-10 operating system organizes disk
devices into file structures. File structures are logical
arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more disk units. A file
structure can exist on one disk unit, or it can be distributed over
several disk units designated by a single name. However, two file
structures cannot exist on the same unit.
The operator or system administrator assigns a name to every file
structure when he or she defines the system's file structures. This
name is one to four characters long, and cannot duplicate a physical
device name, a unit name, or an existing file structure name. The
recommended names for public file structures are DSKA:,
DSKB:,...,DSKO: in order of decreasing speed.
File structures are illustrated and explained in detail in the TOPS-10
Monitor Calls Manual Vol. 1.
1.9.1.4 Logical Device Names - You can assign a logical name to a
physical device. The monitor will recognize the name that you assign,
and associate the logical name with the physical device. You can
assign a logical name to a device using the ASSIGN command.
The logical name that you assign may be up to six alphanumeric
characters and may optionally be ended by a colon (:). Thereafter,
the monitor will use the device that you associated with the logical
name, when you or your programs specify that logical name. Logical
names are cleared by the DEASSIGN command. That is, use the DEASSIGN
command to disassociate logical names from devices. Logical names are
also cleared when you log off the system, and when you specify another
logical name for the same device.
1-22
INTRODUCTION
Logical names are useful when you are writing a program that needs a
device, but you will not know until program execution what device you
will need. Use a logical name in the program to represent the device.
Before you run the program use the ASSIGN command to associate the
logical name with a physical device.
Logical names take precedence over physical names. Therefore, if you
assign the logical name DSK: to the device MTA3: (magnetic tape unit 3
on controller A), all output to generic DSK will go to the magnetic
tape.
Some names are recognized by the monitor as special system-defined
logical names that the monitor translates into physical device names.
One example is the generic device name OPR:. The generic name OPR: is
the system-default logical name for the operator's terminal.
Therefore, the terminal specified as OPR: can change during system
operation; but if you send a message to OPR:, the message will be
routed to the last physical device declared to be the operator's
terminal at your node.
All devices except terminals can be designated as being restricted
devices. You request a restricted device from the system pool of
available resources by issuing the MOUNT command. This command
requires operator intervention before the specified device is assigned
to your job. The system deassigns a restricted device from your job
when you log off the system or issue the DISMOUNT, DEASSIGN, or FINISH
command.
Unrestricted devices are assigned to your job on a first-come,
first-served basis when you issue the MOUNT or ASSIGN command. The
device assignment remains in effect until you release the device by
issuing a DEASSIGN command or a FINISH command, or you log off the
system.
The following example illustrates the use of both physical and logical
device names.
1-23
INTRODUCTION
Example
You request a DECtape drive with the logical name ABC:
.ASSIGN DTA: ABC:
The monitor gives you unrestricted device DTA0: (DECtape number 0
on controller A). You then mount a DECtape on drive DTA0:
DTA0 ASSIGNED
You request any paper-tape punch and request that the logical
name ABC: be assigned to it.
.ASSIGN PTP: ABC:
The monitor prints a warning message, telling you that the
logical name was previously assigned to another device. The
monitor changes the logical-name assignment, so that the logical
name ABC: now refers to the paper-tape punch.
%LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, PTP0 ASSIGNED
You run the system program PIP.
.R PIP
You issue a command string to PIP asking that file FILEA.EXT be
transferred from device DTA0: to logical device ABC: (physical
device PTP0:).
*ABC:=DTA0:FILEA.EXT
You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.
*^C
You request another DECtape drive and request that logical name
DEF: be assigned to it.
.ASSIGN DTA: DEF:
The monitor prints a message telling you that all DECtape drives
are in use by the specified jobs. The monitor does not assign a
DECtape drive or a logical name to your job.
?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB 13
1-24
INTRODUCTION
You request that DECtape unit 0 (which you already have assigned
to you) be assigned the logical name DEF:
.ASSIGN DTA0: DEF:
DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name DEF:.
DTA0 ASSIGNED
You deassign the paper-tape punch, clearing the logical name
ABC:.
.DEASSIGN PTP:
You run the system program PIP.
.R PIP
You request that the file FILEB is to be transferred from device
DEF: to device ABC:
*ABC:=DEF:FILEB
TOPS-10 prints an error message indicating that the logical
device name ABC: is no longer assigned.
?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST
You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.
*^C
You request drive DTA0: (DECtape drive 0) again and request that
the logical DEF: be changed to XYZ:
.ASSIGN DTA0: XYZ:
The system disassociates the logical name DEF: from DTA0:.
DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name XYZ:.
DTA0 ASSIGNED
1.9.1.5 Ersatz Device Names - An ersatz device is a disk-simulated
library. Although you specify an ersatz device like a file structure,
an ersatz device represents a particular project-programmer number on
a disk structure. Ersatz device names are three characters long.
Appendix D contains a complete list of the ersatz device names used by
TOPS-10.
1-25
INTRODUCTION
1.9.2 File Names
Data and programs are stored in the system files. Files are used to
arrange and protect data and programs. The essential part of a file
specification is the file name. You name a file when you create,
rename, or copy it.
The file name that you choose must be one to six alphanumeric
characters long. It is possible to use non-alphanumeric characters,
but some symbols have a special meaning to the system (see Section
1.10), and some programs may not recognize non-alphanumeric
characters.
The file name is divided into the name of the file and the file
extension. The format is:
FILE.EXT
Where FILE is the name you choose to distinguish the file, and .EXT is
a standard or non-standard file extension. The period (.) is used to
separate the file name from the file extension.
It is recommended that you use standard file extensions where
applicable. The standard file name extensions are listed in Appendix
D. File extensions are optional. You can name or specify a file
without an extension.
File names and extensions can be changed using the RENAME command.
1.9.3 Directory Names
Your directory is a file that serves as an index to your other files.
There are directories on three levels of file storage:
The directories in a file structure are indexed by the Master
File Directory (MFD) of that structure.
The files in your directory area are indexed by your User-File
Directory (UFD). Your UFD is designated by your
project-programmer number enclosed in brackets. The following is
a valid directory name:
[30,112]
A Sub-File Directory (SFD), is a directory you can create to
arrange the files in your UFD. A file in your UFD points to the
SFD. This file has the same name as the SFD, with an extension
of .SFD. SFDs are discussed in Section 1.14.
1-26
INTRODUCTION
The directory name is an optional part of a file specification.
1-27
INTRODUCTION
1.9.4 Protection Codes
Every file has a protection code. The code tells who can and cannot
access the file. The protection code consists of three octal digits.
Each digit specifies the amount of protection against a group of
users. The first (leftmost) digit is the protection code for the
owner of the file; the middle digit is the protection code for all
users having the same project number as the file owner; the last
(rightmost) digit is the protection code for all other users. For
example:
<0 5 7>
| | |
| | |
| | Protection code for all other users.
| |
| |
| Protection code for all members of file owner's
| project.
|
|
Protection code for the file owner.
Ordinarily, the owner of a file is the user whose programmer number
matches the User File Directory (UFD) containing the file, regardless
of the project number. That is, a user logged in under the [27,4072]
project-programmer number is assumed to be the owner of files in the
User File Directory [44,4072]. This feature can be set by the
installation; therefore it may not be set at your own installation.
The access protection codes for the Owner Field (Field 1) are listed
in Table 1-3; the access protection codes for Fields 2 and 3 are
listed in Table 1-4.
1-28
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-3: Protection Codes for Field 1
______________________________________________________________________
Owner Protection Codes
Code Accessibility by Owner
______________________________________________________________________
7*, 6* You can execute, read, or change the protection code of
the file.
5* You have unlimited access to the file, except for
renaming it.
4* You have unlimited access to the file.
3 You can execute, read, or change the protection code of
the file.
2 You have unlimited access to the file, except for
renaming it.
1, 0 You have unlimited access.
______________________________________________________________________
* The File Daemon is called on a protection failure on this file
1-29
INTRODUCTION
Table 1-4: Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3
______________________________________________________________________
Project-members and Other User Protections
Code Access Privileges
______________________________________________________________________
7 The user cannot access the file.
6 The user can only execute the file.
5 The user can execute or read the file.
4 The user can execute, read, or append to the file.
3 The user can execute, read, append to, or update the
file.
2 The user can execute, read, append to, update, and write
to the file.
1 The user can execute, read, append to, update, write to,
and rename the file.
0 Unlimited access, including changing the protection code
of the file.
______________________________________________________________________
When you create a file, and you do not specify a protection code to be
associated with the file, the system uses one of the following default
protection codes:
o The default protection code that is defined in your
SWITCH.INI file on the LOGIN line, using the /DEFPROT switch.
o The default protection code you previously specified with the
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command.
o The standard TOPS-10 default protection code that is defined
by your installation (usually <055> or <057>).
1-30
INTRODUCTION
1.9.5 File Daemon
The File Daemon, a system program, may determine the protection status
of files with a file protection code of 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the owner's
protection field. (Protection codes are discussed in Section 1.9.4.)
When you set such a protection, a protection violation causes the File
Daemon to access a file named ACCESS.USR. The file ACCESS.USR is a
list of the protected files and the users who may access them. If you
have no such file, or if the File Daemon is not running, the user who
attempted to access the file receives an error message, and cannot
access the file. The File Daemon and the file ACCESS.USR are
described in the FILDAE Specification in the TOPS-10 Notebook Set.
1.10 SYSTEM DEFAULTS
The operating system contains defaults for many arguments, switches
and parts of file specifications. Defaults are the values or
instructions that the system uses if you do not specify those values
or instructions in the command string.
Some system defaults are set by the system administrator when he
generates the monitor. Other defaults are set according to your
project-programmer number when you log in. There are commands that
allow you to set some defaults, which will be effective until you
change those defaults or log off the system.
File specification defaults are determined by the system according to
the program you are running, the search list, and the directory path
of your job. Search lists and directory paths are discussed in
Sections 1.12 and 1.14.
1.11 WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS
You can use wildcard constructions with many command strings. A
wildcard is an asterisk used to specify a part of a file
specification, or a question mark used to replace a character in a
file specification field.
You use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to designate an entire part of
a specification.
1-31
INTRODUCTION
Examples
All files with this file name and any extension:
file-name.*
All files with this extension and any file name:
*.ext
All files:
*.*
All files in directories with this project number and any
programmer number:
*.*[project,*]
You can use the question mark as a wildcard to designate a character
of a file specification. You type a question mark for each character
that is to be matched. For example, PR?? matches four characters or
less, of which the first two are PR.
Examples
All files with this file name and any extension beginning with M:
file-name.M??
All files with this extension and any file name up to five
characters, beginning with TES:
TES??.ext
All files with file names of two characters or less and a file
name extension of three characters or less:
??.???
All files in directories with the project number 25 and a
programmer number 500 through 577:
*.*,[25,5??]
You can specify the asterisk and the question mark in the same command
construction:
All files with file names of two characters or less:
??.*
1-32
INTRODUCTION
The DIRECTORY and QUEUE programs recognize a number sign (#) in the
file specification to indicate that SIXBIT octal code follows. For
example,
.DIR #640000000000.
gives the same directory listing as
.DIR T.
because 120000000000 is the 36-bit left-justified SIXBIT code for the
character "T". This function is useful for file names which contain
special characters. Although the SIXBIT code for an asterisk is
120000000000, the command line
.DIR #120000000000.
would not give the same directory listing as
.DIR *.
because the first command would list only a file literally named *.
The second command would interpret the * as a wildcard and would list
all files without extensions.
You cannot mix SIXBIT code and regular characters within the file name
or within the file extension. However, you can combine a SIXBIT file
name with a regular file extension and vice versa.
Appendix G contains a chart of SIXBIT and ASCII character codes.
You can specify a directory name with the project number, the
programmer number, or both numbers missing from the specification.
The following examples represent directory specifications.
[15,23] The User-File Directory [15,23]
[,30] The UFD that has your project number and the
specified programmer number (30)
[36,] The UFD that has the specified project number
(36) and your programmer number
[,] Your UFD
[-] Your default directory, which can be
different from your UFD. (See the SETSRC
Program description in the TOPS-10 User
Utilities Manual.)
[,,SUB1,SUB2] The sub-file directory SUB2 under the
sub-file directory SUB1 in your UFD
1-33
INTRODUCTION
1.12 SEARCH LISTS
A search list is a list of file structures listed in the order that
the operating system will search through them for a file. There are
two types: the system search list and a job search list.
The system search list, designated by the ersatz device name SSL:,
contains all files pertinent to the daily operation of the system. It
is the same for every job on the system. Only the system
administrator can define and change this list. However, you may
display the system search list using the SETSRC program.
Some of the types of files kept in the system search list file
structures include: accounting files, help and documentation files,
compilers, and system programs.
The job search list, designated by the ersatz device name DSK:, lists
structures that contain user files for an individual job. The system
administrator creates the default job search list for each new user
account. You can display, add, remove, and rearrange the file
structures in your job search list using the SETSRC program. (Refer
to the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about
SETSRC.) The MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands also modify your job search
list. (MOUNT and DISMOUNT are described in Chapter 2.)
For example, in the following command line
.MAKE TEST.LIS
the system uses the system search list to find the program (TECO)
invoked by the MAKE command. The system uses your job search list to
find your user file TEST.LIS.
The format of the job search list is:
fs/switch,fs/switch,...FENCE,fs/switch...
Where: fs is the file structure name,
FENCE is a logical delimiter to separate the active search
list from the passive structures.
/switch indicates how the file can be accessed (read only,
for example).
The job search list has two parts, the active search list and the
passive search list. The active search list is the list of file
structures on the left side of the fence. The system searches each of
these file structures from left to right.
1-34
INTRODUCTION
The passive search list is to the right of the fence. It is composed
of the file structures that you removed from the active search list
using the SETSRC program. Therefore, when you first log in, you have
no structures in your passive search list. The file structures in the
passive search list are not searched by the the monitor, but are used
to compute disk usage when you log off the system.
1.13 LIBRARIES
The system libraries contain compilers, system programs and other
important files. Wherever a device can be specified, an ersatz device
may be specified instead. An ersatz device is a monitor-defined
logical name for a directory specification. There are several special
ersatz devices defined for some libraries. There are three separate
PPNs, [1,3], [1,4], and [1,5], where system library files can be
stored. The standard version of a file or program is usually found on
SSL:[1,4].
The newest version of a file, sometimes in an experimental or untested
state, can sometimes be found in the [1,5] system library. NEW: is a
special ersatz device. When the operating system looks for a file on
NEW: it will first look on SSL:[1,5]. If the file is not found there,
however, it will next look on SSL:[1,4] for the same file. Likewise,
an outdated version of a file might be found on OLD:, which searches
SSL:[1,3] before SSL:[1,4].
The current system library for the job is called SYS:. By default
SYS: is SSL:[1,4] or the standard system library. You may, however,
change the default definition of SYS: by specifying the /NEW switch to
LOGIN or to the SETSRC program. This changes the definition of SYS:
to be NEW:. In other words, the system looks on SSL:[1,5] before
looking on SSL:[1,4]. When you use the R command, the program comes
from SYS:.
LIB: is the job's library directory. If you define LIB:, any file the
system cannot find on DSK: will be searched for in the user-file
directory (UFD) defined in LIB:. LIB: may be set by the SETSRC
program.
1.14 DIRECTORY PATHS
A directory path is an ordered list of directory names, starting with
a user-file directory, that uniquely identifies a directory.
Directory names are discussed in Section 1.9.3.
The default directory path for your job can be any directory: your
job's user-file directory (UFD), a sub-file directory (SFD) in your
job's UFD, a UFD different from your job's UFD, or an SFD in a
different UFD.
1-35
INTRODUCTION
You can change your default directory path using the SETSRC program.
See the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about
SETSRC.
Sub-file directories allow you to organize your files, and to access
them in sets. Any directory acts as an index to a set of files. An
SFD is pointed to by a file in the UFD, or by a higher-level SFD. You
create SFDs with the CREDIR program, and you can nest them in any
structure, to the level that is predetermined by the system
administrator. The maximum level to which SFDs can be nested is five.
(See the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about the
CREDIR program.) Nested directories form a directory tree structure,
which is illustrated in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
The following example shows the creation and use of an SFD and
directory paths.
Example
Show a list of all the files in your UFD with a file extension
.TST.
.DIRECT *.TST<RET>
NUMB TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
109 TST 5 <055> dd-mmm-yy
FILL TST 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
PAY3 TST 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Run the CREDIR program.
.R CREDIR<RET>
CREATE DIRECTORY: [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
CREATED DSKC:[27,5434,TEST].SFD/PROTECTION:775
Create a sub-file directory called TEST. Then exit from the
CREDIR program.
CREATE DIRECTORY: ^C
Request a list of all your files named TEST.
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
TEST SFD 1 <775> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 2 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
The directory shows an SFD named TEST.
1-36
INTRODUCTION
Use the RENAME command to transfer all files with the extension
.TST from your UFD to your SFD.
.RENAME [27,5434,TEST]=*.TST<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:NUMB.TST
DSKC:109.TST
DSKC:FILL.TST
DSKC:PAY3.TST
Show that your UFD no longer lists the files with the extension
.TST.
.DIR *.TST<RET>
%WLDNSF NO SUCH FILES AS DSKC:*.TST[27,5434]
Show that the files have been transferred to the SFD
[27,5434,TEST].
.DIR [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
NUMB TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]
109 TST 5 <055> dd-mmm-yy
FILL TST 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
PAY3 TST 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]
1.15 USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS
User-definable commands are available at both the system programming
level and at the monitor command level for the timesharing user.
As a timesharing user, you use the DECLARE command to define a command
to run a specified program for your job. This can be done during a
timesharing session, or you can include the DECLARE command in a
SWITCH.INI file. Any program can be invoked with a user-defined
command.
For example, you can define COMPAR as a user-defined command to
execute the FILCOM program as follows:
.DECLARE COMPAR=SYS:FILCOM.EXE<RET>
You can also use DECLARE to display your job's command list. The
commands in the following list were defined previously.
.DECLARE/LIST<RET>
COMPAR LOOK EDIT DISKSP
1-37
INTRODUCTION
Use the COMPAR command. Use CTRL/T to display the current state of
your job, including the name of the program that is running. Note
that, although CTRL/T is shown here, it does not echo on your
terminal. CTRL/Z is used to exit FILCOM and return to the monitor.
.COMPAR<RET>
*<CTRL/T>
Day: 14.83 Run: 0.14 R2.5 Wr:6 FILCOM 3+4P TI PC:401570
Input wait for TTY70:
^Z
.
For more information on user-definable commands, see the DECLARE
command.
1.16 PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER
This section describes the use of escape and control sequences, which
you use to direct printing on the LN01 laser printer. Font loading,
which is one application of control sequences, and font management are
also discussed. For a detailed discussion of programming on the LN01,
refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.
1.16.1 LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES
You can use escape and control sequences to specify tab stops or
margins, change fonts within a file, or indicate the text's
orientation, for instance. ESCape and control sequences are typed in
as part of a file you want to print on the LN01 laser printer. Every
time the printer encounters the characters that introduce an escape or
control sequence, it regards the next few characters as instructions,
until it encounters a final character (described below). However, you
must specify the /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch to the PRINT or QUEUE command
in order for the sequences to be interpreted. Otherwise, these
characters will be printed as part of the file.
For a complete description of all valid escape and control sequences,
please refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.
1-38
INTRODUCTION
NOTE
You use the ESC control character as the first
character of all escape and control sequences. When
referred to here, it means that you actually press the
ESC key. Since the ESC key is interpreted as a
function by most text editors, consult the reference
manual to find out how your editor can actually print
the ESC control character. The examples in this
section use a dollar sign ($) to show that the ESC
control character has been pressed.
1.16.1.1 ESCape Sequences - An escape sequence can have three
sections: an introducer, intermediate characters, and a final
character. You must include the escape sequence introducer, which is
the ESC control character, and the final character; the intermediate
characters are optional. Intermediate characters define the
interpretation of the sequence. The final character indicates the end
of a string, and is defined by the function requested in the sequence.
The following sequence shows how to reset a printer to a known state:
ESC control character
| Final character
| |
| |
$ c
The characters are spaced here for clarity only. The sequence must
appear as $c to actually be interpreted by the LN01. Case is
significant when final characters are alphabetic.
1.16.1.2 Control Sequences - The format for control sequences is
similar to that of escape sequences. However, control sequences begin
with an ESC control character and a left square bracket. Also, one or
more parameters are allowed before the intermediate character(s).
Parameters are separated by the use of a semicolon (;).
Numeric parameters that designate length (such as specifying 5 inches)
are given in terms of points or decipoints. A point is a unit of
length equal to 1/72 of an inch. A decipoint, then, is a length of
1/720 of an inch. In these units, 5 inches equals 360 points or 3600
decipoints.
1-39
INTRODUCTION
A sequence using length in points is below. In this example, the left
margin is set to 5 inches (360 points), and the right to 8 inches (576
points).
$[ 3 6 0 ; 5 7 6 s
| | |
| | Final character
| |
| Numeric parameter
|
Control sequence characters
In this example, a control sequence is used to clear all horizontal
tab stops.
$[ 3 g
| | |
| | Final character
| Numeric parameter
Control sequence characters
Remember, as with escape sequences, there should be no blank spaces
between the characters. (They would appear in the file as "$[3g".)
1.16.2 Font Management
The LPTSPL program supports font management for the LN01 laser printer
by means of a font handler. LPTSPL requires the LPFONT.INI file to
automatically process fonts by name. LPFONT.INI resides on
SSL:[5,36,LN01]. LPFONT.INI maps the font names to the files in which
the actual fonts are kept. Font files must be kept in the same area.
LPFONT.INI has the format:
filenm = fontnm1<TAB>fontnm2<TAB>...<TAB>fontnmN
Where: filenm is the six character filename of the font.
fontnm is an alphanumeric string from 1 to 30 characters long,
representing a fontname. Each fontname must be separated by
at least one tab character, and the line must be ended with a
carriage return/line feed.
1-40
INTRODUCTION
1.16.3 Loading Fonts
When you want to print a file using non-standard fonts, you have two
options. You may use the either /FONT:fontnm or /PRINT:GRAPHICS
switches to the PRINT or QUEUE commands.
Use the /FONT:fontnm switch when you want an entire file printed in
the same font. LPTSPL loads the font you request, and the LN01 prints
your file in the font you specified.
The /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch allows you to dynamically load fonts, so
that you can print a file in several different fonts. The Load
Character Set (LCS) and Assign Character Set (ACS) sequences are used
to prepare the fonts for printing. If you are using fonts which
reside on the ersatz device FNT: ([5,36,LN01]), you do not need to
explicitly specify the LCS sequence; LPTSPL loads the character sets
for you. You will always need to place an ACS sequence at the
beginning of your file. The ACS sequence assigns a font name to a
number. You refer to this number immediately before the text you want
printed in that font. The text continues printing in that font until
you specify a new font. For example, if you assigned 13 to represent
a Times Bold font, and 14 to represent Times Italic, you could print
text in those fonts using the following:
$[13mPrint in Times Bold and $[14mnow switch to Italic
In the above example, the ESC/square bracket combination indicates a
control sequence is about to follow, the 13 and 14 represent the
fonts, and the letter m is the final character. For more information
on font programming on the LN01, refer to the LN01 Programmer's
Reference Manual.
1-41
2-1
CHAPTER 2
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all system configurations. Also,
you or your system administrator can add and delete commands.
Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on all
of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.
2.1 FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
In Section 2.1, the TOPS-10 commands are divided into functional
groups. Each section contains:
o A discussion of a functional group.
o A list of the commands that make up the functional group.
Section 2.2 contains a detailed description of each command. The
commands are arranged in alphabetical order.
Appendix A of this manual contains a table that lists the commands by
functional description, including a short description of each command.
This table is included for reference, so that you can find a command
by its function. Please read the description of each command in
Section 2.2 before using the command.
2-1
2-1
CHAPTER 2
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all system configurations. Also,
you or your system administrator can add and delete commands.
Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on all
of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.
2.0.1 Job-Control Commands
Job-control commands control the state of your job. You can use them
to create, detach, and terminate your job. Also, you can change the
accounting profile and privilege status of your job. The job control
commands are:
ATTACH CONTEXT DECLARE
DETACH DISABLE ENABLE
KJOB LOGIN PASSWORD
POP PUSH REATTACH
SESSION
2.0.2 Information Commands
The information commands allow you to gain information from the
monitor. You can obtain information about your job, your program, the
operating system, or your terminal characteristics. The information
commands are:
ACCOUNT ALLOCATE CONTEXT CORE
CPUNCH DAYTIME DIRECTORY DSK
HELP INITIA MOUNT NETWORK
NODE PJOB PLOT PRINT
PUNCH QUEUE RESOURCES SCHEDULE
SET WATCH SHOW ALLOCATION SHOW QUEUES SUBMIT
2-1
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SYSTAT TPUNCH USESTAT VERSION
WHERE
2.0.3 Terminal-Control Commands
Terminal-control commands allow you to set the characteristics of your
terminal, and to see the characteristics that are set for your
terminal. The terminal-control commands are:
INITIA SET TERMINAL
SET TTY TERMINAL
TTY
2.0.4 Terminal-Communication Commands
You can use the operating system to communicate with a user at another
terminal. The commands that allow you to do this are:
MAIL PLEASE SEND
2.0.5 File-Handling Commands
You can use the operating system to create, change, and store files.
You can create and change directories. You can output files to
various devices. The file-handling commands are:
CLOSE COPY CPUNCH
DELETE DIRECTORY EOF
FILE LIST MAKE
PLOT PRESERVE PRINT
PROTECT PUNCH QUEUE
RENAME SET DEFAULT PROTECTION SUBMIT
TECO TPUNCH TYPE
ZERO
2.0.6 Device-Handling Commands
You can use the operating system to control peripheral devices. The
2-2
SYSTEM COMMANDS
device-handling commands are:
ALLOCATE ASSIGN BACKSPACE
CANCEL CLOSE CPUNCH
DEALLOCATE DEASSIGN DISMOUNT
EOF FINISH LABEL
LIST LOCATE MOUNT
PLOT PRINT PUNCH
QUEUE REASSIGN REWIND
SET BLOCKSIZE SET CDR SET DEFER
SET DENSITY SET FORMAT SET RETRY
SET SPOOL SKIP TPUNCH
UNLOAD
2.0.7 Program-Preparation Commands
The program-preparation commands help you to write a program, change
it, debug it, and obtain information about it. These commands help
you to run programs more easily and effectively. The
program-preparation commands are:
CLOSE COMPILE CREF
DDT DEBUG DEPOSIT
EOF EXAMINE FUDGE
LOAD MAKE MERGE
SET BREAK SET DDT BREAKPOINT TECO
2.0.8 Program-Control Commands
Program-control commands help you to control your program while it is
running and after it has been run. These commands are used to start
and stop execution, save the core image, manipulate the core area, and
to facilitate the execution of your program. The program-control
commands are:
CCONTINUE CONTEXT CONTINUE
CORE CSTART EXECUTE
GET HALT (CTRL/C) JCONTINUE
LOAD MERGE POP
PUSH R REENTER
RUN SAVE SSAVE
SET BREAK SET CPU SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS SET DSKFUL SET DSKPRI
SET HPQ SET PHYSICAL SET TIME
2-3
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET VIRTUAL START
2.0.9 Network Commands
Network commands help you to use a data network system. They allow
you to use the resources on another system, and get information about
the network configuration. The network commands are:
ASSIGN LOCATE
NETWORK NODE
SET HOST WHERE
2.0.10 MIC Commands
MIC (Monitor Interpreted Commands) allows you to create a new command
by writing any desired sequence of monitor and MIC commands in a
command file. Some MIC commands are briefly described here, and are
more fully described in the file MICV2.DOC.
DO Executes a MIC command file.
or
@
BACKTO Specifies a label at which MIC processing is to
GOTO resume within the command file.
COJOB Creates a COJOB.
ERROR/ Specifies an error condition character.
NOERROR
IF Conditionally processes a monitor command.
LET Changes the values of user parameters.
MIC Passes a subcommand to MIC.
OPERATOR/ Introduces a line requiring user attention.
NOOPERATOR
SILENCE/ Suppresses/resumes output to the terminal.
REVIVE
WHENEVER/ Changes the default action wherever a particular
2-4
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ON event occurs.
2.1 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ACCOUNT Command
Function
If the monitor is running usage file accounting software, the
ACCOUNT command prints the account you are logged in under (set
by a LOGIN or SESSION command) on your terminal. If you do not
have an account, the monitor issues only a carriage-return.
Format
ACCOUNT
After you press RETURN, the monitor prints the account you are
logged in under.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires LOGIN.
Examples
1. This example indicates that you do not have an account
string.
.ACCOUNT<RET>
.
2. The ACCOUNT command prints the string TS547 as the name of
your account.
.ACCOUNT <RET>
TS547
.
2-5
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
ALLOCATE Command
Function
The ALLOCATE command informs the system that you will need a
resource. A resource is a tape or disk unit. With ALLOCATE, you
can reserve a resource from the system and assign a logical name
to the resource you will use.
An allocated resource can contain all the specifications
necessary when the resource is mounted. The switches that you
specify with the ALLOCATE command will be retained and applied
when you use the MOUNT command to mount the same resource.
The ALLOCATE command allocates a resource, and the SHOW
ALLOCATION display will show such a resource as both allocated
and mounted. If you use the ALLOCATE command to explicitly
allocate a resource, you will be granted extended ownership over
the resource. For example, if a resource that you have
explicitly allocated and mounted goes off-line unexpectedly (as
when the operator dismounts it), your mount request for that
resource will be automatically requeued, and the resource will be
mounted for your job when it comes on line.
Format
ALLOCATE resource:log-name/switch/switch...
Where: resource is the name of the resource that is to be
allocated. The colon (:) in the resource name is
optional. The resource name is one of the following:
o A disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.
o A tape volume set name and volume identifiers, such
as PAY-WK(PM34,PM35) where PAY-WK is the volume set
name, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the volumes in
the volume set.
o A tape volume identifier of a single-tape volume
set.
o The logical name previously associated with a
resource.
o A physical device name.
2-6
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
Note that a tape allocation request requires a volume
identification. If you do not include the volume set
name followed by volume identifiers, you must supply
the /VOLID switch.
log-name is the logical name you can assign to the
resource that you will use. The logical name can be up
to 6 alphanumeric characters. A tape volume set must
always have a logical name. If you do not specify a
logical name for a tape volume set, the system defaults
to the first six characters of the volume set name, or
up to the first non-alphanumeric character of the
volume set name. A disk volume set does not require a
logical-name.
To allocate more than one volume set, separate the
volume set identifications with commas.
/switches are always preceded by a slash. Some
switches can be used for any kind of volume set; others
are restricted to either tape or disk volume sets only.
NOTE
The logical name and switches that you specify
in the ALLOCATE command string are saved by the
system, and are applied when you MOUNT the
volume set.
You can obtain a list of the resources that are allocated and
mounted for your job by typing ALLOCATE with no arguments or
switches. The output is the same as the output from the SHOW
ALLOCATION command.
The following is a list of the switches you can use with
ALLOCATE. The center column lists the kind of resource(s) the
switch applies to.
Switch Device Function
/ACTIVE Disk Requests that the volume set be placed
in your job's active search list when
the structure is mounted. (See SETSRC
in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual).
The structure will become part of the
list that the system automatically uses
to search for a file. This is the
default. Complement to /PASSIVE.
/CHECK Tape Prints a list of all the allocation
Disk requests for your job. (Same as
ALLOCATE with no arguments or switches.)
2-7
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
/CREATE Disk Allows files to be created on this
structure. This switch is the
complement to /NOCREATE and implies the
/ACTIVE switch.
/DENSITY:n-BPI Tape Specifies the recording density
(bits-per-inch) of the volume set. The
density (n) can be: 200, 556, 800,
1600, or 6250. The -BPI portion of the
value is optional.
/DISK Disk Identifies the volume set as a disk
volume set.
/EXCLUSIVE Disk Ensures that you will have exclusive
access to the resource. No other users
will be allowed to access the resource.
You must have the same project number as
the owner of the volume set.
/HELP Tape Prints a brief description of the
Disk command.
/LABEL-TYPE:arg Tape Specifies the kind of label processing
to be used and indicates the label
status of the tape. The arguments and
their meanings are:
ANSI The label is formatted
according to ANSI standards.
BLP The tape may or may not have
BYPASS labels, but it is treated as
if it were unlabeled. Only
privileged users can use this
switch.
EBCDIC The label is formatted in
IBM EBCDIC.
USER-EOT The tape does not have
standard labels. However, you
will be informed at the end of
tape. Volume switching (for
multivolume tape volume sets)
will not be performed
automatically. Therefore, the
user program is responsible
for mounting subsequent tapes.
This is useful for programs
that create unique labels,
such as BACKUP.
2-8
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
UNLABELED The tape is not labeled. When
NONE a new tape is mounted from the
NOLABELS same volume set, you will not
be notified. The switching of
tapes in the volume set will
be handled automatically by
the system. You will not be
informed when the end of tape
is reached.
/NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape Specifies that a new volume set is going
to be created. The operator will choose
tapes for your job from a pool of
available tapes. This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.
/NOCREATE Disk Prevents the creation of files on this
volume set, unless you specify the
volume set when you write the file.
This switch is the complement to /CREATE
and it implies /ACTIVE.
/NONOTIFY Tape Does not inform you when the resource is
Disk mounted or dismounted.
/NOTIFY Tape Sets the system to inform you when the
Disk resource is mounted or dismounted. The
system sends a message to your terminal
when any of the following occurs:
o The resource is physically mounted.
o The resource is dismounted by the
operator without a request by your
job.
o Another volume in a tape volume set
is mounted.
o The disk structure is locked or
unlocked by the operator.
/PASSIVE Disk Requests that the structure be placed in
your job's passive search list. (Refer
to SETSRC program.) The system will not
search for files in the structure unless
you specify the structure name in the
file specification. This switch is the
complement to /ACTIVE.
/QUOTA Disk Removed.
2-9
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
/READ-ONLY Tape Specifies that you will not write on the
Disk volume set. Tape volume sets will be
checked as they are mounted, to ensure
that they are write-locked. This is the
default for tape volume sets.
On disk volume sets, the monitor will
not update access dates. If you specify
both /EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY, the
operator may write-lock the structure.
/REMARK:"text" Tape Allows you to send a message to the
Disk operator identifying the volume to be
mounted. The argument (text) can be up
to 50 characters long. Use quotation
marks around the text if it contains
spaces or punctuation marks.
/SCRATCH Tape Instructs the operator to mount a
scratch tape. By implication, a scratch
tape will be returned to the system's
pool of available tapes, after you are
finished with it. This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.
/SHARABLE Disk Allows other users to access the
resource. This is the default function.
This switch is the complement to
/EXCLUSIVE.
/TAPE Tape Specifies that the volume set is a tape
volume set. This switch is required
when the volume set has the same name as
a catalogued disk volume set.
/TRACKS:n Tape Specifies the number of tracks on the
tape. The value n can be 7 or 9.
/VOLID:volid Tape Identifies the volumes in a tape volume
set. This switch can be used only if
the volid-list was not specified
previously. If the volume set is
comprised of more than one volume, the
volids should be separated by commas,
and the volid-list should be enclosed in
parentheses.
/WRITE-ENABLE Tape Ensures that you can write on the
Disk volume set. For tape, the system checks
each volume as it is mounted to be sure
that it is write-enabled. This is the
default for disk volume sets.
2-10
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
Associated Commands
MOUNT Makes a device available to you.
DISMOUNT Removes the specified volume set from your job's
search list. Dismounts the volume set if you
have exclusive access to it.
DEALLOCATE Removes the specified resources(s) from your
job's list of allocated resources.
SHOW ALLOCATION Prints a list of the resources that are
allocated and mounted for your job.
SHOW QUEUE Prints a list of system queues.
CANCEL Cancels a mount or queue request.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Example
The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE, DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands. The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command. The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes. The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.
.ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
2-11
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
---------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
---------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 1
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure, the structure is dismounted. Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated:
.DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
2-12
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
The job's resources are displayed:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
---------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it can be
deallocated. The tape set is dismounted:
.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
---------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
.
2-13
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ASSIGN Command
ASSIGN Command
Function
The ASSIGN command allocates an input/output device to your job
until you log out or until you issue a REASSIGN, FINISH, or
DEASSIGN command. (Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.)
When an assignment is performed, the system prints a message
indicating the name of the physical device assigned to your job.
You can ASSIGN any unrestricted device to your job.
Format
ASSIGN node-id_device-name: logical-name:
Where: node-id is an identifier of the node from which the
device is to be assigned. This identifier can be
either a node name or a node number. The node-id is
optional. If you omit the node-id, the node to which
your terminal is connected is assumed.
The node-id and the device name must be separated by an
underscore (_).
device-name: is any physical device name or previously
assigned logical name. (Device names are discussed in
Section 1.9.1.)
logical-name is a logical name that you request to be
assigned to the physical device. Separate the physical
device name from the logical name with a space. This
argument is optional. Subsequent ASSIGN commands
replace the old logical name with the new one. Logical
names are disassociated from the devices when you issue
the DEASSIGN command.
Characteristics
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
2-14
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ASSIGN Command
Associated Messages
If the assignment is successful, the system prints a message in
the following format:
device-name: ASSIGNED
where device-name is the physical device name . If you specify a
restricted device, the monitor prints the following message:
?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE
You can access restricted devices using the MOUNT command. The
following message occurs when the device is assigned to another
job:
?Already assigned to job n
Where: n is the number of the job to which the device is
assigned.
Examples
1. Assign line-printer number 2.
.ASSIGN LPT2:<RET>
LPT262 ASSIGNED
.
2. Assign the logical name SYS to DSKB.
.ASSIGN DSKB: SYS:<RET>
DSKB: ASSIGNED
.
3. Assign the logical name TAPE to DTA5.
.ASSIGN DTA5: TAPE<RET>
DTA5: ASSIGNED
.
4. Assign a card reader from node COMET to your job.
.ASSIGN COMET_CDR:<RET>
CDR701: ASSIGNED
.
2-15
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
ATTACH Command
Function
The ATTACH command detaches your current job (if you are logged
in) and connects your terminal to a detached job.
To prevent unauthorized access to detached jobs, the monitor
temporarily creates a new job when you specify the
project-programmer number argument. This temporary job runs
LOGIN, which asks for your password. If the temporary job
exceeds the system's maximum job capacity, you may be unable to
attach to the specified job. In this case, your first job
remains detached. You will be unable to ATTACH to any job until
there is room in the system.
Formats
ATTACH
ATTACH job [ppn]/switch
ATTACH job/switch
ATTACH [ppn]/switch
ATTACH user/switch
Where: job is the job-number of the job to which your terminal
is to be attached.
[ppn] is the project-programmer number of the desired
job. You must enclose the PPN in square brackets ([]).
If you are trying to attach from one job to another,
and both have the same PPN, you can omit the
project-programmer number argument.
user is the user-name associated with the desired job.
/switch is one of the following options:
/HELP:keyword Prints the HELP text. Valid keywords
are ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT. The
ARGUMENTS keyword displays a list of
valid switches and arguments. The
SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
switches without detailed information.
The TEXT keyword displays the full HELP
text. TEXT is the default keyword.
/HELP may be abbreviated to /H.
/MAILCHECK: If YES, checks for the existence of
YES or NO new mail.
2-16
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
/MONITOR Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
/SETTTY: If YES, sets terminal parameters as
YES or NO specified with the /TERMINAL switch.
/TERMINAL:key Defines the terminal characteristics.
key is a keyword. The keywords for
/TERMINAL are described after the
switches.
/USER Leaves your terminal at user level.
/Terminal Keywords
The /TERMINAL switch takes a list of parameters to specify
terminal attributes. You can include multiple keywords for the
/TERMINAL switch, in which case you must enclose them in
parentheses and separate them with commas. Valid keywords are:
ALTMODE:yes-no Do [not] convert ASCII 175 and 176 to
ESCAPE (Altmode (ASCII 33)).
BLANKS:yes-no Do [not] print blank lines.
CRLF:yes-no Do [not] give a free CRLF at right margin.
DEFER:yes-no Do [not] set deferred echo mode.
DISPLAY:yes-no Terminal is [not] a display terminal.
ECHO:yes-no Do [not] set terminal echo.
EIGHTBIT:yes-no Do [not] set 8-bit mode.
ESCAPE:chr Set <ESCAPE> translation character to chr.
FILL:dnum Set filler class to dnum (0<=dnum<=3).
FORM:yes-no Terminal does [not] have hardware form
feeds.
GAG:yes-no Do [not] accept SEND messages at user
level.
LC:yes-no Terminal does [not] have lowercase
characters.
LENGTH:dnum Set the terminal screen length to dnum.
LOCALCOPY:yes-no Do [not] set terminal to local copy.
2-17
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
NOFILL Do not set terminal fill (same as FILL:0).
QUOTE:yes-no Do [not] enable control-V character
quoting.
RTCOMP:yes-no Do [not] disable special effects of R and
T.
RCVSPEED:n Set terminal receive speed to n baud.
SBELL:yes-no Do [not] ring the bell when output is
stopped due to exceeding STOP/SSTOP value.
SPEED:dnum Set receive and transmit speed to dnum
baud.
STOP:dnum Set the terminal STOP counter to dnum.
SSTOP:dnum Set the terminal SSTOP counter to dnum.
TABS:yes-no Terminal does [not] have hardware tabs.
TAPE:yes-no Do [not] allow XON to start paper-tape
reader.
TYPE:xxx Set terminal type to xxx.
UNPAUSE:chr Set the unpause character to chr.
UC:yes-no Terminal does [not] have uppercase
characters only.
WIDTH:dnum Set carriage width to dnum columns.
XONXOFF:yes-no Do [not] allow S/Q to pause output.
XMTSPEED:dnum Set terminal transmit speed to dnum baud.
Switches of the form /*xxxxxx are unique to one character.
The asterisk is NOT part of the switch name. The following
is a list of possible arguments which may be accepted by
some switches and keywords:
args A list of keywords and optional arguments.
atxt A possibly quoted string of ASCII characters.
You must include quotation marks if the string
contains any characters other than alphanumerics
or a dash.
2-18
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
chr A single, possibly quoted character or an octal
constant.
cnum Core argument: decimal number followed by
optional K or P.
dnum Decimal number followed by optional K, M, or G.
filespec A standard TOPS-10 file designator of the form
dev:file.ext[path].
onum Octal number followed by optional K, M, or G.
pathspec A standard TOPS-10 path designator of the form:
[project#,programmer#,sfd1,sfd2,...].
prefix A prefix is the last three characters of the
"[LGNxxx ...]" or "%LGNxxx ..." messages.
stxt A possibly quoted string of SIXBIT characters.
You must include quotation marks if the string
contains any characters other than alphanumerics
or a dash.
yes-no Switch and keyword arguments may either be NO,
YES, OFF (no), ON (yes), 0 (no), or 1 (yes). In
addition, you can precede the switch or keyword
name with NO to negate its action (such as
/NOxxxxxx instead of /xxxxxx:NO).
Characteristics
Does not destroy the core image of either job.
Does not require that you be logged in.
Restrictions
Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.
Batch programs cannot use this command.
2-19
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
Examples
1. Look at jobs 1 and 5 with SYSTAT.
.SYSTAT 1 5<RET>
1 27,5434 DET QUOLST 36+62 to 6 #
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
5 27,5434 TTY31 SYSTAT 19+SPY RN 25 $
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
Output shows that job 1 is detached, and job 5 is attached to
terminal number 31.
You attach to job 1 from job 5.
.ATTACH 1<RET>
FROM JOB 5
The two jobs have the same project-programmer number;
therefore, neither the project-programmer number nor the
password is required.
Check jobs 1 and 5 again.
.SYSTAT 1 5<RET>
1 27,5434 TTY31 SYSTAT 19+SPY RN 25 $
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
5 27,5434 DET SYSTAT 24+SPY ^C 23 $
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
Job 1 is now attached to TTY31, and job 5 is detached.
2. You log in to the system. You are given job 7; terminal
number 116 is attached to your job (7).
.LOGIN 27,235<RET>
JOB 7 R5743A SYS #40/2 TTY116
PASSWORD: <RET>
hh:mm dd-mmm-yyyy TUE
You attach to an existing detached job (35) with a different
PPN. This automatically detaches your current job (7). You
enter the correct password at the prompt and LOGIN attaches
your terminal to job 35.
.ATTACH 35<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
FROM JOB 7
2-20
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
You attach to job 7 again. You do not need to enter a
password because job 7 has your original PPN.
.ATTACH 7<RET>
FROM JOB 35
You attach to job 35 again, but you mis-type the password.
LOGIN does not give you a second chance.
.ATTACH 35<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
?CAN'T ATTACH TO JOB
2-21
SYSTEM COMMANDS
BACKSPACE Command
BACKSPACE Command
Function
The BACKSPACE command spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified
number of files or physical records. This command runs the
COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Formats
BACKSPACE MTAn: x FILES
This command skips backward x files.
BACKSPACE MTAn: x RECORDS
This command skips backward x records.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1. Backspace 7 records on the tape on MTA2.
.BACKSPACE MTA2: 7 RECORDS<RET>
.
2. Backspace 11 files on the tape on MTA3.
.BACKSPACE MTA3: 11 FILES<RET>
.
2-22
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CANCEL Command
CANCEL Command
Function
The CANCEL command deletes the specified request from the
specified queue. You can delete the request before it is
started, or you can terminate the request after it has been
started.
Format
CANCEL request-type request-id/switch
Where: request-type is any of the following:
BATCH-REQUEST
CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
MOUNT-REQUEST
PAPER-TAPE-REQUEST
PLOTTER-REQUEST
PRINTER-REQUEST
The request-type argument can be abbreviated to a
unique set of characters.
request-id is a request identification. This can be
any one of the following:
o The request-id number. The request-id number is
assigned to the request when it is made, and it is
displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command.
o The job name of the request.
o A wildcard construction representing the job names
of several requests. The standard wildcards (* and
?) are valid, as well as the percent sign (%) to
represent a single character. Wildcards are
described in Section 1.11. Note, however, that the
asterisk (*) wildcard cannot be used to specify
mount requests.
2-23
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CANCEL Command
There are two switches that can be used to specify the CANCEL
command:
Switch Function
/HELP Prints information on your terminal about the
CANCEL command. When you use this switch, no
requests are cancelled.
/JOBNAME:name Specifies the name of the job. This switch is
used to specify the name of the job when the
request-id is the same as the name of another
job.
Associated Messages
The following message is printed if the request cannot be
cancelled:
NO JOBS CANCELED
This may be the result of trying to cancel a request over which
you have no authority.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Example
The following example illustrates the use of the CANCEL, MOUNT,
and SHOW QUEUES commands.
A mount request is made for the structure GAL0:
.MOUNT GAL0:/NOWAIT<RET>
The mount queue is displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command:
.SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS TYPE WRITE REQ# JOB# USER
------ ------- ---- ------- ---- ---- -----------------------
BLKA WAITING DISK ENABLE 650 35 MARTIN,C [30,5621]
GAL0 WAITING DISK LOCKED 672 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
THERE ARE 2 REQUESTS IN THE QUEUE
2-24
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CANCEL Command
To cancel the mount request, the user issues the CANCEL command:
.CANCEL MOUNT GAL0<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST FOR GAL0 CANCELED]
Again, the mount queue is displayed:
.SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS TYPE WRITE REQ# JOB# USER
------ ------- ---- ------- ---- ---- -----------------------
BLKA WAITING DISK ENABLED 650 35 MARTIN,C [30,5621]
THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE
.
2-25
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
CCONTINUE Command
Function
The CCONTINUE command starts program execution, leaving your
terminal at monitor level.
Format
CCONTINUE
To use:
1. Begin running a program.
2. Exit from user mode by typing two CTRL/Cs.
3. Type CCONTINUE to allow the previously begun program to
continue running from the point at which you interrupted it.
Your terminal is left at monitor level.
4. You can now use commands that do not require core, or you can
detach from your job and create a new job to run other
programs.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Associated Commands
CONTINUE - Continues the operation of your program, bringing your
terminal back to user level.
START - Starts the program from the beginning or from the
specified address, leaving your terminal at user level.
CSTART - Starts the program from the specified address or from
the beginning, but leaves your terminal at monitor level.
NOTE
If your program requires terminal I/O, the
CCONTINUE command allows the program to run only
to that point. The program then waits for
terminal I/O, before it continues executing. Use
the CONTINUE command to re-enter user level and
2-26
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
accept or input the required I/O.
2-27
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
Example
This is a program that finds all the numbers up to 10,000 and
writes them out to disk.
.TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
N = 0
100 N = N + 1
IF (N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
WRITE (22, 201) N
GO TO 100
201 FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
300 STOP 'DONE'
END
Execute the program.
.EXECUTE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN: NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
^C
^C
Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.
Continue the program, leaving your terminal at monitor level.
.CCONTINUE<RET>
Type CTRL/T for job status. CTRL/T does not echo on your
terminal.
DAY: 8.85 RUN: 2.05 RD:0 WR:0 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC:000175
The status message RN* indicates the program NUMBER is running.
Detach from the job to do work on another job.
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19
.
.
.
2-28
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
Later, attach to your original job.
.ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
Type CONTINUE to re-enter user level.
.CONTINUE<RET>
System message (see NOTE).
?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to enter user level.
.^C
.CONTINUE<RET>
Program message indicates execution is finished. The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4.60 ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83
EXIT
.
NOTE
It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
because the program is running. The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.
2-29
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLOSE Command
CLOSE Command
Function
The CLOSE command terminates any input or output currently in
progress on the specified device.
Although most programs close files when they finish executing a
command string, the CLOSE command is provided for a program that
does not terminate or a program that is being debugged. This
command causes all files which are open for output to be closed.
If a CLOSE is not done, the next RESET by a command (R, RUN, GET)
or program deletes any partially written disk files.
Format
CLOSE dev:
Where: dev: is the logical or physical name of the device on
which I/O is to be terminated. dev: cannot refer to a
disk device. This argument is optional.
If dev: is omitted, I/O is terminated on all devices,
except for the job's controlling terminal, and all
files are CLOSEd.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions
You cannot continue the program after using CLOSE, but you can
restart at the beginning of your program or you can access DDT.
You cannot specify a disk device as an argument.
2-30
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLOSE Command
Examples
1. Terminate input from the paper-tape reader number 2.
.CLOSE PTR2:<RET>
.
2. Terminate I/O from all devices except your terminal.
.CLOSE<RET>
.
3. Attempt to terminate I/O from DSKB: assigned logical name
DEVA.
.ASSIGN DSKB: DEVA<RET>
DSKB assigned
.
.
.
.CLOSE DEVA<RET>
?Not legal for disk-like devices
.
2-31
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
COMPILE Command
Function
The COMPILE command produces relocatable binary files (.REL
files) and/or compilation listings for specified source program
files. The system determines which language compiler to use by
the source file extension or by switches you specify in the
command string. If you do not supply any switches in the command
string, but you do use a standard extension, the system uses the
following compilers:
Source File Extension Compiler Used
.ALG ALGOL compiler
.BLI, .B10 BLISS-10 compiler
.CBL COBOL compiler
.F4 or .FOR FORTRAN compiler
.FAI FAIL compiler
.MAC MACRO assembler
.PAL PAL10 compiler
.PAS Pascal compiler
.P11 MACY11 assembler
.SAI SAIL compiler
.SIM SIMULA compiler
.SNO SNOBOL compiler
NOTE
The compiler cannot be changed with a switch, but it
can be specified with a switch when the source file
has an unrecognizable or no extension. If the source
file has a non-standard extension, and you do not
specify the compiler in a switch, FORTRAN is used as
the default compiler. All standard file extensions
are listed in Appendix D.
Usually, the system translates the source file if there is no
corresponding binary (.REL) file, or if the date and time of the
source file is later than the date and time of the binary file.
If the binary file is newer than the source file, the system does
not generate a new .REL file.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running the appropriate language compiler.
FAIL, MACY11, SAIL, and SNOBOL are recognized as compilers only
if the appropriate assembly switches are set at your
installation.
2-32
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
Each time you issue the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
commands, the system remembers the command, with its arguments,
in a temporary file on disk or in TMPCOR if they are small
enough. When you issue one of these commands without an
argument, it causes the system to use the argument saved in the
temporary file.
The COMPILE command accepts several command constructions: the @
construction (indirect commands), the + construction, the =
construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.
Format
COMPILE file-spec/switch,file-spec/switch,...
Where: file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas. The standard
file specification consists of: a device name, a file
name (with or without an extension), and a directory
name. If you omit the file specification argument, the
system uses the argument specified in a previous
COMPILE-class command, if possible. (Refer to Section
1.9.)
NOTE
Note that a maximum of 150 processor switch
characters can be passed to the compiler.
You can use the following switches as temporary or permanent
switches. (Refer to Section 1.8.4.) Switches relevant to COMPILE
follow; all switches allowed with COMPILE can be used with LOAD,
EXECUTE and DEBUG.
Switch Function
/ALGOL Compiles with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the
.ALG extension.
/BINARY Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file name of the binary file is .REL. This is
the default action.
/BLISS Compiles the file with BLISS-10. Assumed for files
with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.
/C68 Compiles with COBOL-68.
/C74 Compiles with COBOL-74.
2-33
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
/COBOL Compiles the file with COBOL. Assumed for files
with the extension of .CBL.
/COMPILE Forces a compilation of this source file even if
the relocatable binary file is newer. Use this
switch to obtain an extra compilation (for example,
to obtain a listing of the compilation). NOCOMPILE
is the default switch.
/CREF Produces a listing file on the disk for each file
compiled, for later processing by the CREF program.
The file extension of the listing file is .CRF.
The file can then be listed with the CREF command.
With COBOL files, the CREF file is appended to the
output file; additional commands are needed to
obtain the cross-referenced file.
/DDT Loads the program debugger DDT with the file.
/DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
Passes the arguments to FORTRAN. Refer to the
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.
/DLIST Creates a listing file with the extension .LST and
stores it in your disk area. You can have this
file printed on the line printer by using the PRINT
command.
/F66 Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and EXTERNAL
statements.
/FAIL Assembles the file with FAIL. Assumed for files
with the .FAI extension.
/FORTRAN Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler. Assumed
for files with either the extension of .F4 or .FOR
and for all files with unrecognizable compiler
extensions, if FORTRAN is the standard compiler for
your system. This switch is necessary if the file
has a unrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN
is not the standard compiler or is not the current
default.
/FORDDT Loads the FORDDT debugger with the program.
/FOROTS Obsolete
/FORSE
2-34
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
/FUDGE:file Creates a temporary file that contains the library
file name and the names of the .REL files produced
by the command string. When you issue the FUDGE
command, PIP reads this file to generate the
library .REL file. (See the TOPS-10 MAKLIB User's
Guide for information about library files.)
The argument to /FUDGE is the library file
specification. If you omit the file extension, the
default is .REL.
This switch is permanent (sticky). That is, it
pertains to all .REL files generated by this
command string.
/GFLOAT Indicates that double-precision numbers are to be
stored in G-floating format. This format has an
expanded exponent range. This option is available
on KL10 processors only.
/K?10 Designates the machine on which the program will
execute after it has been loaded. The default is
the processor that is executing the command. The ?
can be replaced by L or S. To designate a KS
processor, use /KS10.
/LIBRARY Loads the program in library search mode.
(/LIBRARY is identical to /SEARCH.)
/LINK Obsolete
/LIST Prints the listing file on the line printer (LPT:).
If the line printer is spooled or available to your
job, the listing file is automatically printed.
/LMAP:file Produces a loader map while loading. The map
contains local symbols.
/MACRO Assembles the file with MACRO. Assumed for files
with the extension of .MAC.
/MACY11 Assembles the file with MACY11. Assumed for files
with the extension .P11. MACY11 is recognized as a
compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
set. This switch is not supported.
/MAP:file Produces a loader map while loading. The default
file name is MAP.MAP.
2-35
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
/NEW Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental library area [1,5] (device NEW:). If
the compiler does not exist on device NEW:, COMPIL
tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
/NOBINARY Does not generate binary files. This switch, when
combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is useful
when compiling programs solely to generate
listings.
/NOCOMPILE Compiles the source file if there is no relocatable
file newer than the source file. Note that
/COMPILE always compiles, /REL never compiles, and
/NOCOMPILE (the default switch) compiles
conditionally.
/NODEBUG Does not pass previously specified arguments to
FORTRAN.
/NOLIST Does not generate listing files. This is the
default action. Complement to /LIST.
/NOOPTIMIZE Does not optimize the object source code. This is
the default. Complement to /OPTIMIZE.
/NOSEARCH Does not load the program in library search mode.
Complement to /SEARCH.
/OPTIMIZE Optimizes the object code of a FORTRAN program.
/OLD Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library [1,3] of old programs (device OLD:).
If the compiler does not exist on device OLD:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
/PAL10 Assembles the file with PAL10. Assumed for files
with the .PAL extension.
/PASCAL Compiles the file with Pascal. Assumed for files
with the .PAS extension.
/REL Loads an existing .REL file rather than compiling a
new one. Refer also to /COMPILE and /NOCOMPILE.
/SAIL Compiles the file with SAIL. Assumed for files
with the .SAI extension.
/SAVE Saves the core image to disk in an executable file
after it is loaded.
2-36
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
/SEARCH Loads the program in library search mode. (/SEARCH
is identical to /LIBRARY.)
/SELF Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
DSK: instead of from the system library (device
SYS:). This switch is useful if you keep a private
copy of a compiler in your own disk area.
/SIMULA Compiles the file with SIMULA. Assumed for files
with the .SIM extension.
/SNOBOL Compiles the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files
with the extension .SNO. SNOBOL is recognized as a
compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
set. This switch is not supported.
/SSAVE Saves the core image in a sharable executable file
after the program is loaded.
/SYS Compiles the program with the compiler from SYS:.
This is the default.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the appropriate language compiler, destroying your original
core image.
Restrictions
You cannot use wildcard constructions with COMPILE.
A language compiler appearing more than once within a single
command string cannot access more than one disk area. For
example, the following is invalid:
.COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW,SUBRTN.F10/SYS
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW
.COMPILE SUBRTN.F10/SYS
2-37
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
Examples
1. Compile PROG (with the null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC
with MACRO, and MANAGE (with the null extension) with MACRO.
A listing file is generated for MANAGE. The files generated
are PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST.
.COMPILE PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/MACRO/LIST<RET>
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN
MACRO: TEST
MANAGE
EXIT
.
2. Compile SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with the null extension)
with FORTRAN, and MULTI.ALG with ALGOL. Listing files are
generated for SIGN.MAC and MULTI.ALG.
.COMPILE/LIST SIGN.MAC,TABLES/NOLIST,MULTI.ALG<RET>
MACRO: SIGN
FORTRAN: TABLES
MAIN
ALGOL: MULTI
EXIT
.
3. Compile the files DIVIDE, SUBTRC, and ADD with the FORTRAN
compiler, even if current .REL files exist. Generate files
to be processed by CREF. The files generated are DIVIDE.CRF,
DIVIDE.REL, SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF and ADD.REL.
.COMPILE/CREF/COMPILE DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD<RET>
FORTRAN: DIVIDE
MAIN.
FORTRAN: SUBTRC
MAIN.
FORTRAN: ADD
MAIN.
.
2-38
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
4. Compile the files contained in the command file LIBALL.
Create a temporary file which contains all the .REL file
names and the library file name (MONITR.REL). The FUDGE
command creates the library file, MONITR.REL, with the .REL
files in the same order as they were specified in the command
file.
.COMPILE/FUDGE:MONITR.REL@LIBALL<RET>
FORTRAN: DIVIDE
MAIN.
FORTRAN: SUBTRC
MAIN.
FORTRAN: ADD
MAIN.
.FUDGE<RET>
5. Compile and execute the program NUMBER.FOR.
.COMPILE NUMB2.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN: NUMB2
MAIN.
.EXECUTE
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMB2 EXECUTION]
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.12 ELAPSED TIME: 0.53
EXIT
.
2-39
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTEXT Command
CONTEXT Command
Function
The CONTEXT command displays the status of a job's context. It
also allows you to create, kill, and switch between contexts.
When issued without arguments, the command gives you information
about your current contexts, such as the name of the program in
core for that particular context. You can also use CONTEXT to
create parallel contexts. Parallel contexts permit you to switch
between programs (in separate contexts) without waiting for them
to reinitialize. You can specify switches to list the status of
a particular context or delete a context. (Section 1.5 contains
a discussion of contexts.)
Format
CONTEXT argument/switch
Where: argument is optional. With no arguments, CONTEXT
displays information about all of your job's contexts,
including the program loaded in each context.
/switch is one of the options listed below.
Argument, when specified, can be one of the following:
handle A context name or number. This argument
switches your job's current context to the
specified one. A period (.) can replace a
context name for the current context only.
name=number Where name is a one to six character
alphanumeric string to be associated with the
specified context number.
= An equal sign can be used to create a new,
parallel context, without switching the current
context to the newly created context.
/Switch, when specified with the handle argument, can be one of
the following:
/KILL Deletes the specified parallel context.
/LIST Lists information about the specified context only.
2-40
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTEXT Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Preserves your core image.
Restrictions
To use the CONTEXT command, you must be at monitor level, and the
job must be halted.
Associated Commands
POP Returns you to a previous superior context, and destroys
the current context.
PUSH Creates an inferior context.
Examples
1. Name context 1 (the current context, in this case) TOPLVL.
.CONTEXT TOPLVL=1
2. Display the status of the current context.
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
Contexts Superior Prog Idle time
* TOPLVL 1 PATH
Notice that the current context, TOPLVL, is marked by an
asterisk (*). For this particular example, one of four
allotted contexts is being used, none of the 1,000
saved-pages is in use, the context name is TOPLVL, the
context number is 1, and the PATH program is running in this
context.
2-41
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTEXT Command
3. Create an adjacent context, run MAIL under it, and exit.
Then look at the context status.
.CONTEXT=
.MAIL
21 messages, 116 blocks.
MS>quit
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 4/1000
Context Superior Prog Idle time
TOPLVL 1 PATH 19.78
* 2 MS
Note the differences from the previous status. There are now
two contexts in use, and the current, unnamed context 2 is
running MS. Also, PATH has been idle for 19.78 seconds since
the last CONTEXT command was issued. MS will restart very
quickly if you type CONTINUE, because it does not have to
re-initialize.
4. Finally, kill one context that is running MS, and examine
your status. You have to move to another context to do this,
because you cannot kill the current context.
.CONTEXT 1
.CONTEXT 2/KILL
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
Context Superior Prog Idle time
* TOPLVL 1 PATH
Context 1 is now the current and only context.
2-42
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTINUE Command
CONTINUE Command
Function
The CONTINUE command continues your program from the point at
which you interrupted it. You interrupt program execution with
CTRL/C. After you use CONTINUE, your terminal returns to user
level.
Format
CONTINUE
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Requires core.
Example
This is a program that finds all the numbers up to 10,000.
.TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
N = 0
100 N = N + 1
IF (N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
WRITE (22, 201) N
GO TO 100
201 FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
300 STOP 'DONE'
END
Execute the program.
.EXECUTE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN:NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK:LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
^C
^C
Type two CTRL/Cs to halt the program.
2-43
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTINUE Command
Detach from the job to do work on another job.
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19
.
.
.
Later, attach to your original job.
.ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
Type CONTINUE to enter user level.
.CONTINUE<RET>
?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST
System message (see NOTE).
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE to enter user level.
.^C
.CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4.60 ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83
EXIT
.
Program message indicates execution is finished. The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
NOTE
You must type CTRL/C to re-enter user level, because
the program is running. The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.
2-44
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COPY Command
COPY Command
Function
The COPY command copies a file from one device to another, or
within a device, file structure, or directory. The command
string can contain one output specification and any number of
input specifications.
Format
COPY dev:file.ext[directory]<nnn>=dev:file.ext[directory],...
Where: The file to the left of the equal sign (=) is the
destination, or output file, and the file(s) to the
right of the equal sign is the source, or input
file(s).
dev: is a physical or logical device name. If you
omit a device name, the system assumes DSK:.
file.ext is the name of the file(s) to be used in input
or output. If you omit the output file name, the
system defaults to the input file name. If you
transfer many input files to one output file, the
system combines the files. You can use wildcard
constructions with the COPY command.
[directory] is the disk area in which the files are to
be read or written. If you type this area before the
file name, the system uses this area as the default for
all succeeding files. If you omit this argument, your
default directory is accessed. You can transfer files
to or from another directory only if you have access to
that directory.
<nnn> is the protection code to be given to the output
file. If you omit this argument, the system assigns
the system standard protection code, even if the input
file already has a non-standard protection code
associated with it. Protection codes are described in
Section 1.9.4.
Use the equal sign (=) to separate the destination
(output) side from the source (input) side.
2-45
SYSTEM COMMANDS
COPY Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Runs the PIP program.
Example
Find file NOTICE.TXT in SYS:
.DIRECT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
NOTICE TXT 2 <155> 6-SEP-79 DSKC:[1,4]
Search your own directory.
.DIRECT DSKB:NOTICE<RET>
%WLDNSF No such files as NOTICE.TXT
Copy NOTICE from SYS: into your directory on DSKB:
.COPY DSKB:NOTICE.TXT=SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
Check your directory to find NOTICE on DSKB:
.DIR NOTICE<RET>
NOTICE TXT 2 <055> 6-SEP-79 DSKB:[27,5434]
.
2-46
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CORE Command
CORE Command
Function
The CORE command prints or changes the amount of core memory
assigned to your job. Because programs usually allocate core,
you generally do not need this command.
If your job is locked in core and you issue this command with a
nonzero argument, the monitor prints an error message.
Format
CORE nx
Where: n is a decimal number; this argument is optional.
You may not assign more than one section of core to
your job.
If n is 0, the low and high segments are removed from
the virtual addressing space of your job.
If n is greater than 0, n represents the total number
of blocks of core to be assigned to your job from this
point on.
If n is less than the high-segment size plus the
minimum low-segment size, n plus the high-segment size
is assumed.
x is either K or P. K represents units of 1024 words.
P represents 512-word pages. For example, 3P
represents three pages or 1536 words. If you do not
specify x, K is assumed.
If you omit nx, the monitor prints the amount of core currently
being used by your job, as well as the octal page number, page
(accessibility) status, and the origin of the pages. This form
of the CORE command does not change the core assignment.
2-47
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CORE Command
Page status can be any of the following:
o executable (EX)
o readable (RD)
o writable (WR)
o sharable (SH)
o locked (LK)
o allocated-but-zero (AZ).
Origin can be private pages, spy pages, or the file
specification.
The total pages in the space is also displayed.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not operate when your job is in run state.
Example
Use CORE to look at the amount and contents of memory assigned
after using MAIL.
.CORE<RET>
Page number Page status Origin
0-74 EX RD WR Private pages
76-165 EX RD WR Private pages
620-674 EX RD SH DSKA:MS[1,4]
Total of 162 pages
Virt. mem. assigned 118+45P (Current limit: 16384P Max limit: 16384P)
Phys. mem. assigned 118+45P (Guideline: 16384P Max limit: 999P)
Swap space left: 81502P
2-48
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
CPUNCH Command
Function
The CPUNCH command places entries in the card punch queue. Refer
to the QUEUE command for further information and examples.
Format
CPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec/switches
Where: dev: is the name of the individual device on which the
file is to be punched. (For example, CDP2: is card
punch number 2.) The device name is optional. To punch
the file on a card punch at a different node, use
devSxx;, where xx is the node number. (For example,
CDPS22: is a card punch on node number 22.)
jobname is the name of the job you are entering into
the queue. The default job name is the name of the
first file in the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify either the
device or job name.
file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas, for the files
being processed. A file specification is in the form
dev:file.ext[directory]. (Refer to Section 1.9.)
If you specify neither a job name nor a file-spec, a
list of all the jobs in the card punch queue will be
printed on your terminal.
The wildcard construction can be used for the file
specifications.
2-49
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/switches are listed below. The switches to this
command can be divided into two categories, depending
on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two
categories are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in a command
string. They affect the entire request, and you
can place them anywhere in the command string. If
you have used one of these switches in a command
string, you cannot use it again in the same string.
Many commands have a /NO construction, which takes
a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command string
with the positive construction.
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in
the command string. You can also use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command
string. To achieve a temporary or permanent effect
by the placement of the switch, refer to Section
1.8.4.
Switches Category Function
/ABEFORE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is before the specified date
and time.
/ACCOUNT:name Queue Specifies the account to which the
operation job should be charged.
/AFTER: Queue Processes the request after the
date-time operation specified time.
/ALLFILES: Queue Accepts the request only if all of
YES or NO operation the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately. This switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist, no files should be
processed. The value YES or NO is
optional. If you use YES, all of
the files you specified must exist.
If NO, existing files are
processed, and warning messages are
printed for files that do not
exist.
2-50
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/ASINCE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is later than the specified
date and time.
/BEFORE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates before the specified date and
time.
/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue Specifies an output characteristic.
arg operation You can find a list of the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.
/CHECK Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation the queue entries made by your job.
/COPIES:n File Repeats the output the specified
control number of times (n must be less
than 64). The default is one copy.
/CREATE Queue Makes a new entry in the specified
operation queue. This function is the
default, except when listing queue
entries.
/DEFERRED Queue Causes deferred output to be
operation released to the card punch queue.
You must use one of the following
switches with /DEFERRED.
/CREATE to complete the released
output requests.
/KILL to eliminate the released
output requests.
Refer to the SET DEFER command for
more information.
/DELETE File Deletes the file after processing
control it. Same as /DISPOSE:DELETE.
2-51
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/DESTINATION: Queue Specifies the node at which the
node operation file will be punched. Use the node
name or node number to specify the
node. The files will not be
punched at any host other than the
host to which the terminal is
connected.
/DISPOSE:arg File Controls the disposition of the
control file after it is processed. The
arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after processing it.
PRESERVE preserves the file after
processing it.
RENAME renames the file from your
directory into the spooling area.
Thus, the file is effectively
deleted immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue Specifies text to place in the
"text" operation distribution field, on the banner
page of output. You can use this
field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the operator should leave the
listing. The text field may be up
to 39 alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File Prints an error message if a binary
control file is included in the queue.
This is the default.
/ERNONE Queue Prints an error message if no files
operation match the file specification. This
is the default.
/ERPROTECTION Queue Prints an error message if the
operation the request involves a protection
violation. This is the default.
/FAST Queue Prints the entries in the queue on
operation your terminal.
2-52
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/FILE:arg File Specifies how the file format is to
control interpreted. The following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as ASCII
text.
ELEVEN interprets the file as four
8-bit bytes in each 36-bit word.
The bits are arranged as follows:
Byte 1: bits 10-17
Byte 2: bits 2-9
Byte 3: bits 28-35
Byte 4: bits 20-27
/FORMS:arg Queue Specifies any special cards to be
operation used. Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.
/GENERIC File Sends output to the next available
control card punch. Complement to /UNIT.
/HEADER: File Makes header cards for the file.
YES or NO control The default is YES.
/HELP:arg Queue Prints information on your terminal
operation about the QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any files.
The switch can be used alone
(/HELP) or with one of the
following arguments:
TEXT prints a message with the
format and switches of the QUEUE
command. This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name Queue Specifies the name of the job. The
operation name can be up to 6 alphanumeric
characters.
/KILL Queue Removes the specified entry from
operation the queue. You must specify the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
left of the equal sign in the
command line.
2-53
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/LENGTH:n:m File Processes only the files whose
control length is between n and m blocks in
length.
/LIMIT:n Queue Limits the output to the specified
operation number of cards.
/LIST:arg Queue Prints information about the jobs
operation in the queue. If you use /LIST
alone, it shows the jobs in the
queue. This is equivalent to using
the CPUNCH command with no
arguments and no switches. /LIST
can be abbreviated to /L. The
switch can also take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue. (Same as /LIST with no
arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.
/MESSAGE:arg Queue Specifies the information to be
operation output if an error occurs. The
arguments are:
ADDRESS Prints the location
in memory where the
error occurred.
CONTINUATION Prints information
about the error.
FIRST Prints a one-line
error message.
PREFIX Prints the six
character prefix.
2-54
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/MODIFY Queue Alters the specified parameter in
operation the specified job. This switch
requires that you have access
rights to the job. You must
specify the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE, left of the equal
sign in the command line. This
switch can be used to modify a
previously submitted request as
long as the request has not been
started.
/NEW: File Accepts file specifications of
YES or NO control files that do not exist.
/NOHEADER File Does not make header cards for each
control file.
/NONEW File Does not accept file specifications
control of files that do not yet exist.
This is the default.
/NONOTIFY Queue Does not notify you when the job is
operation finished. This is the default.
/NONULL Queue Prints a fatal error message on a
operation null request. This is the default.
/NOOPTION Queue Suppresses reading the SWITCH.INI
operation file.
/NOPHYSICAL File Allows logical names for devices in
control the command string.
/NOSTRS File When scanning structures for the
control file, takes only the first
occurrence. This is the default
function.
/NOTES:"text" Queue Prints the text in the header card.
operation
2-55
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/NOTIFY: Queue Notifies you on your terminal when
YES or NO operation your request is completed. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument. To suppress
notification, use /NOTIFY:0 or
/NOTIFY:NO. By default, you are
not notified when a request is
finished. Special cases, such as
printing of batch log files and
output of deferred requests, will
never notify you when they are
completed.
/NULL: Queue Does not print a fatal error
YES or NO operation message if the specified files do
not exist.
/OKBINARY File Accepts files whose extensions
control indicate that they include binary
information. Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.
/OKNONE Queue Does not produce a warning message
operation if no files match the file
specification.
/OKPROTECTION Queue Does not print an error message if
operation a file protection violation occurs.
/OPTION:name Queue Uses the option line QUEUE:name
operation in the SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI
files are described in Appendix B.
/PHYSICAL File Ignores logical device names in the
control command line.
/PRESERVE File Saves the file after
control processing it. This is the
default. This switch is the same
as /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.
/PRIORITY:n Queue Assigns the specified priority (n
operation is 1 to 63) to the request. A
larger number has greater priority.
2-56
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/PROTECTION:nnn Queue Specifies a protection code to be
operation associated with the request. Queue
requests may have protection codes.
These are exactly like file
protection codes. Refer to Section
1.9.4.
/PUNCH:arg File Punches the file in the specified
control mode. If you omit this switch, the
file is punched according to the
data mode specified in the file.
The following arguments can be used
with this switch:
026 Punches the files in 026
Hollerith mode.
ASCII Punches the files in ASCII
card mode.
BCD Punches the files in 026
Hollerith mode. (Same as
026.)
BINARY Punches the files in a
checksummed binary card
mode.
IMAGE Punches the files in image
card format.
/REMOTE Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
/REQUESTID:n Queue Specifies the request
operation identification number of the job
you wish to modify or terminate.
The request identification number
is assigned when you queue the
request.
/RUN:file Queue Executes the specified file after
operation the request is accepted.
/RUNCORE:n Queue Executes the specified file in nK
operation of core after the request is
accepted.
2-57
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue Executes the specified file with
operation start offset n after the request is
accepted.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue Specifies a sequence number to aid
operation in identifying a request to be
modified or deleted.
/SINCE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates after the specified date and
time.
/STRS: Queue Searches for the file on all
YES or NO operation structures in the search list and
takes every occurrence. The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.
/TMPFIL:file: Queue Creates a temporary file on TMP:
text operation and enters the text into the file.
/UNIT:n Queue Specifies the unit number of the
operation device you want the output sent to.
/USERNAME: Queue Specifies the user name field for
"name" operation the banner page of output. This
field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters, and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.
Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints a
message on the user's terminal. The message is in the form:
[CARD-PUNCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where: name is the name of the job in the queue. This
can be specified by the user. Otherwise, it
defaults to the name of the first file in the
request.
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
xxx is the maximum number of cards that the job
will use.
2-58
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if you desire a list of queue entries.
Examples
1. Punch the file SYSTAT.MAC in ASCII format.
.CPUNCH SYSTAT.MAC/PUNCH:ASCII<RET>
[CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #75, LIMIT 33]
.
2. Punch the file SYSTAT.REL in binary format, but do not begin
output until after 5:00 P.M.
.CPUNCH SYSTAT.REL/PUNCH:BINARY/AFTER:17:00<RET>
[CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #43, LIMIT 200]
.
2-59
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CREF Command
CREF Command
Function
The CREF command runs the CREF program. If you have created any
files to be processed with CREF (using the /CREF switch with a
COMPILE, LOAD, DEBUG, or EXECUTE command), CREF processes them
and prints them on the line printer. The file containing the
names of these CREF files is then deleted so that subsequent CREF
commands will not list them again.
When the logical device name LPT: is assigned to a device other
than the line printer, the CREF files are stored on that device
with the same file name and the extension .LST. (See the CREF
manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks for more information.)
Format
CREF file-spec
Where: file-spec is a valid file specification. (Refer to
Section 1.9.) When you supply a file specification in
the command line, CREF produces a cross-referenced
listing file for the specified file. If you do not
give an argument to the command, CREF uses the argument
saved from a previous COMPILE-class command. If there
is no stored argument, CREF prompts with an asterisk
(*).
You can use the following switches with the CREF command.
Switch Function
/A Advances magtape by one file (may be repeated).
/B Backspaces magtape by one file (may be repeated).
/C Cancels SWITCH.INI switch defaulting.
/D Permits default switches as for SWITCH.INI.
/H Types this text.
/K Kills user-defined symbol table listing.
/M Suppresses user macro's, OPDEF's, symbol table.
/O Lists the opcodes.
2-60
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CREF Command
/P Preserves (does not delete) input files.
/R Restarts listing and prompts for line number.
/S Suppresses program listing and lists only symbol
tables.
/W Rewinds tape.
/Z Indicates zero DECtape directory.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Examples
1. Compile the files contained in the command file PROMAC and
produce CREF listing files on the disk.
.COMPILE/CREF@PROMAC<RET>
FORTRAN: INPUT1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: INPUT2
MAIN.
Process and list the cross-referenced listing files produced
by the COMPILE command. The argument is the stored argument
that was used in the COMPILE command.
.SET SPOOL LPT<RET>
.CREF<RET>
CREF:INPUT1
CREF:INPUT2
.
2-61
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CREF Command
2. Compile and load the files contained in the command file
CONALL. Produce a loader map with the file name NAME and
CREF files on disk.
.LOAD/CREF/MAP:NAME@CONALL<RET>
MACRO: HIGH
MACRO: SHARE
EXIT
Assign the logical name LPT to magnetic tape unit 1. Store
the CREF files on MTA1: to be output at a later time.
.ASSIGN MTA1 LPT<RET>
MTA261 ASSIGNED
.CREF<RET>
CREF: HIGH
CREF: SHARE
.
2-62
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CSTART Command
CSTART Command
Function
The CSTART command begins executing the program from the
beginning, or from the address you specify in the command,
leaving your terminal at monitor level. The CSTART command is
the same as the START command, except that it leaves your
terminal at monitor level.
Format
CSTART addr
Where: addr is the address at which execution is to begin if
it is other than the location specified within the file
(.JBSA). If you do not specify an address, the
starting address comes from .JBSA (stored in the job
data area).
To use CSTART:
1. Use LOAD or GET to bring a program into memory.
2. Type one or two CTRL/Cs to halt your job with your
terminal at monitor level.
3. Type CSTART to begin running the program from the
beginning.
4. You can now type additional commands from your
terminal if they do not require core, or you can
detach your terminal from the job, using the DETACH
command.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Restrictions
This command should not be used if your program requests input
from the terminal. This command is not available to batch users.
2-63
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CSTART Command
NOTE
The CSTART command allows the program to run from the
beginning or from the specified address. If the
program requires terminal I/O, the program will wait
until you access user level with the START or CONTINUE
commands. Then your terminal can accept output or
provide input.
Example
This is a program to find all the numbers up to 10,000.
.TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
N = 0
100 N = N + 1
IF(N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
WRITE(22,201) N
GO TO 100
201 FORMAT(1X, I14, 'IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
300 STOP 'DONE'
END
Execute the program.
.EXECUTE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN:NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK:LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
^C
^C
Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.
Type CSTART.
.CSTART<RET>
Type CTRL/T for job status. CTRL/T does not echo on your
terminal.
DAY: :07:20 RUN: :01:00 RD:1093 WR:21 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC000200
The status message RN* indicates the NUMBER program is running.
2-64
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CSTART Command
Detach from the job to do work on another job.
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19
.
.
.
Later, attach to your original job.
.ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
Type CONTINUE to return to user level. System message (see
NOTE).
.CONTINUE<RET>
?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to access user level.
.^C
.CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4:6.88 ELAPSED TIME:5:30.97
EXIT
.
Program message indicates execution is finished. The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
NOTE
It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
because the program is running. The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.
2-65
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DAYTIME Command
DAYTIME Command
Function
The DAYTIME command prints the date and the time of day, in the
following format:
wkdy dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
Where: wkdy is the name of day of the week
dd is the day of the month
mmm is the name of the month
yy is the year
hh is the hour
mm is the minute
ss is the second to the nearest hundredth
Format
DAYTIME
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
.DAYTIME<RET>
MONDAY 29-FEB-88 16:46:42
.
2-66
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
DDT Command
Function
The DDT command starts DDT, the dynamic system debugger. If DDT
is already loaded with your core image, DDT starts at the address
given by the right half of .JBDDT in the Job Data Area. (The Job
Data Area stores information pertinent to your job. It is
described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) If DDT is not yet
loaded, the monitor tries to merge a special version of DDT
(called VMDDT) into the address space starting at location
700000.
If DDT is not yet loaded and the monitor cannot read in VMDDT, it
prints the message: ?NO START ADDRESS. The monitor will not
read in VMDDT if your core image is execute-only.
The DDT command copies the saved program counter value into
.JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry point
specified in .JBDDT (beginning address of DDT as set by the
monitor). DDT contains commands to allow you to start or resume
at any desired address.
If your job was executing a monitor call when interrupted (at
monitor level and not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the
monitor sets a status bit (UTRP) and continues the job at the
location where it was interrupted. When the monitor call
processing is complete, the monitor clears the status bit, sets
.JBOPC to the address following the monitor call, and then traps
to the DDT address found in .JBDDT.
If your job is at monitor level and in TTY INPUT WAIT or SLEEP
mode, the trap to the DDT address occurs immediately and .JBOPC
contains the address of the monitor call. If your job is at user
level, the trap also occurs immediately. Therefore, it is always
possible to continue the interrupted program after trapping to
DDT by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.
(For additional information on the DDT program, refer to the
TOPS-10 DDT Manual.)
Format
DDT
2-67
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
If .JBDDT is zero, the monitor will merge SYS:VMDDT.EXE at
location 700000.
Example
The following example shows how the DEBUG and DDT commands are
used. Begin by writing a simple program with a spelling
(syntactical) error.
.TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
\
TEST: JCLF
RESET
OUTSTR HIMSG
MONRT.
END TEST
Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
JCLF 0
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT
^Z
Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
corrected by using the SOS editor to replace "JCLF" with the
correct "JFCL".
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT: TEST.MAC
*SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
600 TEST: JFCL
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]
2-68
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT
^Z
The debugger successfully loaded the program; no errors were
detected. The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
.REL file. Next, save the core image of the loaded program, and
begin execution.
.SAVE TEST<RET>
TEST SAVED
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
The program ran successfully. However, when you try to run the
program again with the CONTINUE command, the command fails. No
provision has been made for rerunning the program.
.CONTINUE<RET>
?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303
Start the debugger, using the DDT command:
.DDT<RET>
DDT
13303/ 0 ^
TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>
PAT../ 0 JRST TEST<RET>
^Z
While running DDT, alter the core image of the program: since
the error was reported at address 13303 (octal), examine that
address. Then type an uparrow (^) to see the previous line,
which is the last line of program code. Then type a line-feed
(<LF>) to see the next line. "PAT.." is on the next line. Here,
insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.
Next, start the program:
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
2-69
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
Then CONTINUE the program. The execution is successful.
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT:TEST.MAC
*P^:*<RET>
100 TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
200 SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
300
400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
500 \
600 TEST: JFCL
700 RESET
800 OUTSTR HIMSG
900 MONRT.
1000
1100 END TEST
*I950<RET>
950 JRST TEST
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]
Load the program, begin execution, and rerun the program:
.LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.
Execution is successful.
2-70
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
DEALLOCATE Command
Function
The DEALLOCATE command removes a volume set from your job's list
of allocated resources. DEALLOCATE implies a DISMOUNT of the
specified resource. The logical name for the volume set is
cleared, and you will not be able to use that logical-name to
refer to the volume set.
Format
DEALLOCATE resource-name,resource-name...
Where: For disk volume sets, the resource-name is the volume
set-name or the structure name.
For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the logical
name.
DEALLOCATE has one switch:
/HELP Prints a short description of the command. If you
specify an argument with this switch, the argument will
be ignored.
Associated Commands
ALLOCATE Informs the system of your future need for a
resource.
MOUNT Requests ownership of a resource.
DISMOUNT Removes the resource from your job's search
list. Dismounts the volume set from the unit if
no other users are accessing the resource.
SHOW ALLOCATION Prints a list of the resources that are
allocated and mounted for your job.
SHOW QUEUE Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
2-71
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
Example
The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE, DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands. The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command. The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes. The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.
.ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
2-72
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 1
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure, the structure is dismounted. Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.
.DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
2-73
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it can be
deallocated. The tape set is deallocated:
.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
.
2-74
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEASSIGN Command
DEASSIGN Command
Function
The DEASSIGN command returns one or more devices currently
assigned to your job to the monitor's pool of available devices
and clears the logical names associated with them. If you are
running an assembly-language program, and have an INITialized
device, it is not returned to the system's pool unless you have
issued a RELEASE or RESET monitor call; only the device's logical
name is cleared.
Format
DEASSIGN dev:
Where: dev: is either the logical or the physical device
name. This argument is optional. If you do not
specify this argument, the system deassigns all devices
from your job except your job's controlling terminal.
Also, the system clears any logical name that might be
associated with the controlling terminal.
Associated Messages
If you specify a nonexistent device, the monitor prints:
?NO SUCH DEVICE
and leaves all current device assignments. If you specify a
device that has never been ASSIGNed to your job, the monitor
prints:
?devxxn WASN'T ASSIGNED
and leaves all current job assignments.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
2-75
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEASSIGN Command
Example
Assign a card reader to your job. Card reader number 1 is
assigned.
.ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
CDR261 ASSIGNED
Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your job.
Show the devices that are busy.
.SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
TTY144 18 INIT
TTY235 18 INIT
LPT260 18 INIT
LPT261 18 INIT
LPT263 18 INIT
CDR260 18 INIT
CDR261 24 AS
Deassign the card reader.
.DEASSIGN CDR<RET>
Again, show the busy devices.
.SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
TTY144 18 INIT
TTY235 18 INIT
LPT260 18 INIT
LPT261 18 INIT
LPT263 18 INIT
CDR260 18 INIT
Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices. Therefore, it
is available to any user.
2-76
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
DEBUG Command
Function
The DEBUG command compiles the specified source files, loads the
resulting .REL files (if necessary), and prepares the loaded
program for debugging. A system debugging program is loaded
first, followed by your program, including local symbols. Upon
completion of loading, the system transfers control to the
debugging program.
The debugging program that is used depends on the first file in
the command string. If this file is a COBOL source file, COBDDT
(the COBOL debugging program) is used. If the file is a FORTRAN
source file, FORDDT is used.
Generally, a program debugged with the DEBUG command requires
more core to execute than the same program compiled with the
EXECUTE command requires. Extra space is occupied by the
debugging program and additional debugging information, such as
local symbols.
Each time the system executes a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command, the system stores the command argument in a temporary
file. When you issue one of these commands without arguments,
the system uses the arguments stored in the temporary file.
(Refer to Appendix C). EXECUTE runs the COMPIL program before it
runs the appropriate compiler and debugger.
Format
DEBUG file-spec
Where: file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas.
The following switches can be used to modify the command string:
Switch Function
/ALGOL Compiles the file with ALGOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .ALG.
/BIN Generates a binary file for each file
compiled. The file extension of the output
file is .REL. This is the default action.
/BLISS Compiles the file with BLISS-10. Assumed for
files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.
2-77
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
/C68 Runs the specified COBOL version.
/C74
/COBOL Compiles the file with COBOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .CBL.
/COMPILE Forces a compilation of this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file. This switch causes an
extra compilation, because compilation is not
normally performed if the binary file is
newer than the source file.
/CREF Produces a cross-referenced listing file on
the disk for each file compiled for later
processing by the CREF program. The file
extension of the output file is .CRF. The
file can then be listed with the CREF
command. However, with COBOL files, the
cross-referenced listing is always appended
to the listing file. You must issue the CREF
command to obtain the listing.
/DDT Loads DDT and disregards the extension of the
first file in the command string. This
switch applies to all subsequent files.
/DEBUG: Passes the specified arguments to FORTRAN.
(arg, arg,...) Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language
Manual.
/DLIST Creates a .LST file in your disk area. You
can list the file on the line printer with
the PRINT command.
/F10 Obsolete
/F40
/F66 Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and
EXTERNAL statements.
/FOROTS Obsolete
/FORSE
/FORTRAN Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension .F4 and
.FOR and all files with unrecognizable
compiler extensions, if FORTRAN is the
standard compiler. This switch is necessary
if the file has a unrecognizable compiler
extension and FORTRAN is not the standard
compiler or is not the current default.
2-78
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
/FUDGE:file Creates a disk file containing the names of
the .REL files produced by the command
string. When the FUDGE switch is given, PIP
reads this file to generate a library .REL
file. (Refer to the FUDGE command
description.) The argument to this switch is
a valid file specification, as described in
Section 1.9.
/GFLOAT Indicates that double-precision numbers are
to be stored in G-floating format. This
format has an extended exponent range. This
option is available on KL10 processors only.
/K?10 Designates the processor where the program
will execute after it has been loaded. These
switches are necessary for FORTRAN-10
programs because the compiler generates
different codes for different processors.
The default is the processor where your
program is running. The ? can be replaced
by L or S.
/LIBRARY Loads the file in library search mode. This
mode causes a program file in a special
library to be loaded only if one or more of
its declared entry symbols satisfies an
undefined global request in the source file.
The system libraries are always searched.
(See the LINK documentation.) /LIBRARY is the
same as /SEARCH.
/LINK Obsolete
/LIST Generates a disk listing file for each file
compiled. The file extension of the output
file is .LST. These files can be listed
later with the PRINT command. If the line
printer is being spooled for this job, the
listing files are written on device LPT: and
are automatically spooled when you log out.
/LMAP Produces a loader map during the loading
process that contains the local symbols.
/LOADER Obsolete
/MACRO Assembles the file with MACRO. Assumed for
files with the .MAC extension.
2-79
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
/MACY11 Assembles the file with MACY11. Assumed for
files with the .P11 extension. This switch
is not supported.
/MANTIS Compiles the file with the MANTIS debugging
information. This switch affects FORTRAN-40
programs only. This switch is not supported.
/MAP:file Produces a loader map during loading. The
file name can be specified. If the file is
not specified, the default is MAP.MAP.
/NEW Runs the appropriate language compiler from
the experimental system library (device NEW:)
area [1,5]. If the compiler does not exist
on device NEW:, COMPIL tries to obtain it
from device SYS:.
/NOBIN Does not generate binary files. Binary files
are generated unless you give this switch.
This switch, when combined with the /LIST or
/CREF switch, is useful when compiling
programs solely for the purpose of generating
a listing.
/NOCOMPILE Complement to the /COMPILE switch, this
switch does not force a compilation on a
source file whose date is not as recent as
the date on the binary file. This switch
differs from the /REL switch, in that it
turns off all compilation, even if the source
file is newer than the .REL file. /NOCOMPILE
is the default action.
/NODEBUG Does not pass arguments that were previously
specified to FORTRAN.
/NOLIST Does not generate listing files. This is the
default action.
/NOMANTIS Compiles the file without the MANTIS
debugging information. This switch affects
FORTRAN-40 programs only. This switch is not
supported.
/NOOPTIMIZE Does not optimize the object source code for
FORTRAN programs.
2-80
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
/NOSEARCH Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not. Because this
is the default action, this switch is used
only to turn off library search mode
(/LIBRARY). The /NOSEARCH default is to
search the system libraries.
/OLD Runs the appropriate language compiler from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:), which resides on disk area [1,3]. If
the compiler does not exist on device OLD:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
/OPTIMIZE Optimizes the object source code for FORTRAN
programs.
/PAL10 Assembles the file with PAL10. Assumed for
files with the .PAL extension.
/PASCAL Compiles the file with Pascal. Assumed for
files with the .PAS extension.
/REL Uses the existing .REL files although newer
source files might be present.
/SAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program.
/SEARCH Loads the files in library search mode. The
action is identical to that of the /LIBRARY
switch.
/SELF Runs the appropriate language compiler from
device DSK: instead of from the system
library (device SYS:). This switch is useful
if you keep a private copy of a compiler in
your own disk area.
/SNOBOL Compiles the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for
files with the .SNO extension. This switch
is not supported.
/SSAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program in
a sharable executable file.
/SYS Runs the appropriate language processor from
the system library (device SYS:) area of
[1,4]. This is the default action.
2-81
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
Restriction
A language processor appearing more than once within a single
command string cannot specify more than one disk area. For
example, the following is invalid:
.DEBUG MAIN.MAC/SELF,PART1.MAC/OLD
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE MAIN.MAC/SELF
.COMPILE PART1.MAC/OLD
.DEBUG /REL MAIN,PART1
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Runs the appropriate processor, LINK, and the debugger,
destroying your core image.
Example
The following example shows how the DEBUG and DDT commands are
used. Begin by writing a simple program with a spelling
(syntactical) error.
.TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
\
TEST: JCLF
RESET
OUTSTR HIMSG
MONRT.
END TEST
Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
JCLF 0
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT
^Z
2-82
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
corrected by using the SOS editor to replace "JCLF" with the
correct "JFCL".
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT: TEST.MAC
*SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
600 TEST: JFCL
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]
After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT
^Z
The debugger successfully loaded the program; no errors were
detected. The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
.REL file. Next, save the core image of the loaded program, and
begin execution.
.SAVE TEST<RET>
TEST SAVED
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
The program ran successfully. However, when you try to run the
program again with the CONTINUE command, the command fails. No
provision has been made for rerunning the program.
.CONTINUE<RET>
?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303
Start the debugger, using the DDT command:
.DDT<RET>
DDT
13303/ 0 ^
TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>
PAT. ./ O JRST TEST<RET>
^Z
2-83
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
While running DDT, alter the core image of the program: since
the error was reported at address 13303 (octal), examine that
address. Then type an uparrow (^) to see the previous line,
which is the last line of program code. Then type a line-feed
(<LF>) to see the next line. "PAT.." is on the next line. Here,
insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.
Next, START the program:
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Then CONTINUE the program. The execution is successful.
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT:TEST.MAC
*P^:*<RET>
100 TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
200 SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
300
400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
500 \
600 TEST: JFCL
700 RESET
800 OUTSTR HIMSG
900 MONRT.
1000
1100 END TEST
*I950<RET>
950 JRST TEST
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]
2-84
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
Load the program, begin execution, and run the program again:
.LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.
Execution is successful.
2-85
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DECLARE Command
DECLARE Command
Function
The DECLARE command defines new monitor commands to run specified
programs for your job. You can invoke any program with a
user-defined command. When you define a command, the monitor
searches your command table and then the monitor command table.
Exact definitions are given precedence. An exact definition
occurs if you type the complete, exact command name. Inexact
definitions occur when a command is abbreviated. If there are
conflicts within the exact definitions, your definitions are
given precedence.
To use abbreviations when typing a command, you can define
"uniqueness" for a command. The monitor will behave as if the
command had been given an exact definition. If conflicts arise,
the monitor searches its own command table without searching your
command table.
Format
DECLARE name/switch=filespec
Where: name is a command name of 1 to 6 alphanumeric
characters.
filespec is the complete file specification of an
executable program. There is no default filespec.
/switch is one of the optional switches listed below.
Switches allowed by this command are:
Switch Function
/AUTOPUSH Defines a command to automatically PUSH to a new,
temporary context, in which the called program
will run. When the program is completed, the
original context is restored, and the temporary
context is destroyed.
NOTE
Do not define the PATH or DECLARE programs
with the AUTOPUSH switch. This is because
the original context is restored and all
changes made in the temporary context are
destroyed when they finish running.
2-86
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DECLARE Command
/CLEAR Clears all user-defined commands. Do not include
a command name with this switch.
/KILL Removes the definition of a command. Requires a
command name.
/LIST Lists the command names currently defined by your
job. Do not include a command name with this
switch.
/UNIQUE:n Defines the number of characters in the command
that must be typed to be interpreted as your
definition and that cannot be overridden by a
monitor command. The variable n can be 1, 2, 3,
4, ALL, NONE, or a list of these values separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses. /NOUNIQUE
is the same as /UNIQUE:NONE.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Use DECLARE to define a command, LOOK, to run the SETSRC program.
.DECLARE LOOK=SYS:SETSRC.EXE<RET>
Use DECLARE to display your job's command list. Other commands
in the following example were defined previously.
.DECLARE/LIST<RET>
EDIT DSR TAPE LOOK
2-87
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DECLARE Command
Use the new command. Use CTRL/T to display the current state of
your job, including the name of the program that is running.
Note that, although CTRL/T is shown here, it does not echo on
your terminal.
.LOOK<RET>
*<CTRL/T>
Day: 1:02:23 Run: 0.13 Rd:32 Wr:0 SETSRC 4+OP T1 PC:002030
Input wait for TTY52:
<CTRL/Z>
EXIT
.
2-88
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DELETE Command
DELETE Command
Function
The DELETE command deletes files. Because of protection codes
associated with files, it is not usually possible to delete files
in another user's directory. Once a file is deleted, it cannot
be recovered.
Format
DELETE file-spec
Where: file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas. The full
wildcard construction (* and ?) can be used in the file
specification. (Refer to Section 1.11.)
If you do not specify a device name or a file structure
name, your job's search list is used. You can specify
a directory name before the file names and that
directory becomes the default for all subsequent files
in that command line. If you specify a directory name
after a file name, the directory applies only to that
file.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Requires LOGIN.
Permanently deletes the file(s).
Destroys your core image.
2-89
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DELETE Command
Examples
1. Delete all files with .MAC extension.
.DELETE *.MAC<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKB:T1.MAC
DSKB:T2.MAC
DSKB:T3.MAC
14 BLOCKS FREED
.
2. Delete the file TEST.FOR.
.DELETE DSKC:TEST.FOR<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKC:TEST.FOR
3 BLOCKS FREED
.
3. Delete all files with the file name TEST followed by 2
alphanumeric characters or less, and the extension .FOR.
.DELETE TEST??.FOR<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKB:TEST1.FOR
DSKB:TEST2.FOR
DSKB:TEST22.FOR
DSKB:TESTER.FOR
23 BLOCKS FREED
.
2-90
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEPOSIT Command
DEPOSIT Command
Function
The DEPOSIT command deposits information in your core area (high
or low segment). This function is useful for debugging programs.
Format
D lh rh addr
Where: lh is the octal value to be deposited in the left half
of the location. This argument is required.
rh is the octal value to be deposited in the right half
of the location. This argument is required.
addr is the address of the location into which the
information is to be deposited. This argument is
optional. If you omit the address, the system deposits
the data into the location following the address you
specified in the last D command or into the location
you looked at with your last E command. The command
used is the one specified most recently.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Example
Deposit in location 141.
.D 266000 2616 141<RET>
Examine location 140.
.E 140<RET>
000140/ 265720 40011
Because the address is omitted, the deposit made is in the
location of the last E command (that is, location 140).
.D 47000 1<RET>
2-91
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEPOSIT Command
Examine the location specified in the previous D command.
.E<RET>
000140/ 047000 000001
.
2-92
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DETACH Command
DETACH Command
Function
The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from your job without
changing the status of your job. Your terminal is then free, so
that you can start a new job, attach to another detached job, or
cause your terminal to become a slave terminal for another job.
Format
DETACH
Characteristics
Detaches your terminal.
Does not destroy your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions
This command is not available to batch users.
Example
Show the status of your job.
.SYSTAT .<RET>
1 27,5434 TTY263 SYSTAT 6+7 ^C
.
System message shows that your terminal line number is 263.
Detach your terminal.
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 24
Show the status of your job.
.SYSTAT .<RET>
1 27,5434 DET SYSTAT 6+7 ^C
.
System message shows your job is detached.
2-93
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
DIRECTORY Command
Function
The DIRECTORY command prints a list of the file names in a
specified directory area. The standard output consists of the
following information: file name, file name extension, length of
the file in blocks, protection code, creation date, version
number, account, structure name, and directory name.
Format
DIRECTORY output file-spec=input file-spec
Where: input file-spec is a single file specification, or a
string of file specifications separated by commas or
plus signs. The devices used on input can be DSK:,
DTA:, or MTA: If the device is a magnetic tape, the
tape is rewound before and after the listing operation
and analyzed to determine if it is a BACKUP tape. The
default input specification is DSK:*.*, and the files
in all file structures defined by your job's search
list are listed. Generally, a device name, file name
extension, or a directory name that precedes the file
name becomes the default for all succeeding files in
the list.
output file-spec = This argument and the equal sign are
optional. If you omit the entire output specification,
the default is TTY:. If you do not specify an output
device, the default device is DSK:. If you do not
specify an output file name, and one is needed, the
file name is generated from the time of day as hhmmss.
The default output extension is .DIR.
The full wildcard construction (* and/or ?) can be used in the
input file-spec. When a wildcard designation is used, DIRECTORY
limits its search for the file to certain directories. When you
give a wildcard designation for a file name or extension, the
program only searches the specified directory or your default
directory. No additional devices, such as LIB: or SYS:, which
might be in your default path, are searched. (Refer to Section
1.14, and to the PATH monitor call description in the TOPS-10
Monitor Calls Manual, for information about directory paths.)
If you use the wildcard construction in the directory name, only
the directories implied by the wildcard construction are
searched. No additional directories are searched.
2-94
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
The following switches can be used in the command string.
Generally, any switches can be used together in the same command
string, unless the switches contradict one another. Switches
that precede the file name become the default for all succeeding
files in the same command line.
You can abbreviate switches as long as the result is unique.
This is not recommended for batch control files. Spaces are not
permitted within a switch.
Switch Function
/ACCESS:n Updates the access date of any file of n
blocks or less to the current date. Because
some installations delete files that have not
been recently accessed, this switch allows
you to prevent such deletion by updating the
files. n is a decimal number, and refers to
the number of blocks written in the file
unless the /ALLOC switch is also used. If
you omit the /ACCESS switch, the system does
not change the date. If you specify /ACCESS
but you omit :n, 5 is assumed.
/ACCOUNT Prints the account name associated with that
file. The account you are logged in under is
stored in the RIB of all files created or
superseded.
/ALLOCATED Lists the allocated length of the file
instead of the written length. Space on a
structure is sometimes allocated in units of
more than one block for efficiency.
Therefore, the number of blocks allocated to
a file can be greater than the number of
blocks actually written. The LOGOUT program
uses the allocated length when checking
quotas. The total allocated length of all
files is the same as the length output by the
QUOLST program under the USED column.
Normally, when a file is created, the system
allocates 30 blocks for it. Then the system
deallocates unused blocks after file creation
is complete. This switch is the complement
to the /WRITTEN switch.
/ANYDEVICE Searches all devices.
/AUTHOR Prints the project-programmer number of the
author of the file.
2-95
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/BEFORE:date-time Lists those files created before the
specified date and time. Default is
+infinity. Refer to Section 1.8.3.
|
| /BLOCKINGFACTOR:n Sets the number of disk blocks per tape block
| read from tape. The default value is 4 for
| compatability with tapes written by BACKUP
| without blocking-factor capability. The
| specified value must be in the range of 4 to
| 96, and must be a multiple of 4 disk blocks.
| Due to KS10 UNIBUS adapter limitations, the
| maximum blocking-factor on a KS10 is 56.
/BLOCKS Prints the length of the file in blocks.
This is the default. Complement to /WORDS.
/CHECKSUM Computes and prints an 18-bit checksum for
each file. This checksum is computed by
rotating the result to the left one bit
before adding each word. Complement to
/NOCHECKSUM.
/COMPARE Suppresses headers and titles, as well as
error messages in the output. This makes the
output file suitable for comparison with
another file (with FILCOM). Default is
/NOCOMPARE.
/DENSITY:n Uses the specified density when reading a
magnetic tape. n is 200, 556, 800, 1600, or
6250 bpi. The default depends on your
installation. You can change the default
with the SET DENSITY command.
/DETAIL Prints all available information about a
file. The information includes:
The full file specification for the file.
The access date.
The time and date of creation.
The access protection code associated with
the file.
The data mode that the file is written in.
The estimated length of the file.
The blocks allocated for the file.
The data block in the directory in which the
file is located.
The internal date and time of creation.
The RIB block number.
All numbers that are followed by a decimal
2-96
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
point are decimal values; all other numbers
are octal. The project-programmer number
associated with the file is printed only if
it is not the same as that of the user who
issued the DIRECTORY command.
/DIRECT Provides ASCII-formatted output. This the
default. Complement to /NODIRECT.
2-97
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/DSKONLY Searches all disk devices.
/DTA Lists the directory in old DECtape form.
/EOTS Stops at the logical end of tape (two
consecutive tape marks) when reading a
magnetic tape. This is the default.
Complement to /NOEOTS.
/ERLOG Enables automatic device error logging.
Complement to /NOERLOG. /ERLOG is the
default.
/FAST Lists short form of directory: file name,
extension, structure name, and directory
name. Abbreviated to /F. Complement to
/NORMAL and /SLOW.
/FILES:n Stops after n files when reading a magnetic
tape. If you specify /FILES but you omit :n,
5 is assumed. When the system reaches the
logical EOT, it will stop reading the tape.
/FIND Looks for the Find Files for the directory
listing rather than the devices. A Find File
is the binary output of a directory listing,
and is created with the /FNDBLD switch.
/FIND looks for the Find File in
SYS:FNDDAT.FDF or .FPF. You can use the
/FNDDAT switch to specify the file name of
the Find File.
/FLSDIR Prints each file's device and directory to
the right of the first line of output for
each directory. Complement to /NOFLSDIR, the
default is /FLSDIR, unless /HDSDIR or /WIDTH
is specified.
/FNDBLD Creates Find Files from the DIRECTORY output.
A Find File is the binary output from a
DIRECTORY listing. Find Files are useful for
archiving and retrieving files on magnetic
tape. The file name of the Find File is that
specified in the output specification of the
command format. If you do not specify the
output file name, the default is
DSK:FNDDAT.FDF or .FPF. The files can later
be accessed with the /FIND switch. The
complement to /FDNBLD is /NOFDNBLD.
/NOFNDBLD is the default.
2-98
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/FNDDAT:file Specifies the file name of the Find Files to
be read for the directory listing. A Find
File is the binary output for a directory
listing, and is created with the /FNDBLD
switch. You must use the /FIND switch with
the /FNDDAT switch.
/HDSDIR Prints the device and directory information
of the file as a separate header line,
immediately preceding the directory listing
for each directory. Complementary to
/FLSDIR. The default is /NOHDSDIR, unless
/WIDTH and /NOFLSDIR are specified.
/HELP:arg Prints DIRECTORY help text on your terminal.
/HELP can be abbreviated to /H. Valid
arguments are: TEXT, KEYWORDS, and SWITCHES.
TEXT is the default argument; it prints the
entire DIRECT.HLP file. The KEYWORDS
argument (K) lists and describes all LOGIN
switches which take keyword arguments.
SWITCHES (S) briefly lists all DIRECTORY
switches without explanations. Switches that
have a single-letter abbreviation are
prefixed with an asterisk.
/INDIRECT Creates the output listing file in a format
suitable for use as a command file to be
input to other programs.
/LENGTH:n:m Processes only files whose length is between
n and m blocks.
/LIST Queues the output to device LPT:.
Abbreviated to /L. Refer to the LIST command
for restrictions on this switch.
/MARKS Indicates each tape mark and UFD when reading
a magnetic tape. Complement of /NOMARKS.
/MVOLUME When reading BACKUP and DUMPER magnetic
tapes, asks the user to mount another reel
when the end of tape is encountered in the
middle of a save set. Complement to
/NOMVOLUME, the default is /NOMVOLUME.
/NOAUTHOR Does not print the project-programmer number
of the author of the file. This is the
default. Complement to /AUTHOR.
2-99
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/NOCHECKSUM Does not compute and print the checksum.
This is the default. Complement of
/CHECKSUM.
/NOCOMPARE Prints the normal headers, titles, and error
messages. Complement to /COMPARE, the
default is /NOCOMPARE.
/NODETAIL Does not print the words in the LOOKUP block.
This is the default. Complement to /DETAIL.
/NODIRECT Does not print the normal ASCII listing.
Complement to /DIRECT, the default is
/DIRECT.
/NOEOTS Does not stop at the logical end of tape when
reading a magnetic tape. Complement to
/EOTS.
/NOERLOG Does not enable automatic device error
logging. /ERLOG is the compliment to
/NOERLOG, and the default.
/NOFIND Does not look for Find Files for the output.
Complement to /FIND, the default is /NOFIND.
/NOFLSDIR Does not print each file's device and
directory to the right of the first line for
each directory listed. Complement to
/FLSDIR; the default is /FLSDIR, unless
/HDSDIR or /WIDTH is specified.
/NOFNDBLD Does not make a Find File from the output.
Complement to /FNDBLD; the default is
/NOFNDBLD.
/NOHDSDIR Does not print the device and directory as a
header for each directory listed. Complement
to /HDSDIR, the default is /NOHDSDIR, unless
/WIDTH is specified.
/NOINDIRECT Does not format the output listing so that it
can be used as input to a program.
Complement to /INDIRECT, the default is
/NOINDIRECT.
/NOMARKS Does not indicate each tape mark and UFD when
reading a magnetic tape. This is the
default. Complement to /MARKS.
2-100
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/NOMVOLUME When using BACKUP or DUMPER, does not ask the
user to mount another magnetic tape when the
end of tape comes in the middle of a save
set. Complement to /MVOLUME, the default is
/NOMVOLUME.
/NOPRDEVICE Does not print the device name. Complement
to /PRDEVICE.
/NOPRDIRECTORY Does not print the directory. Complement to
/PRDIRECTORY.
/NOPRVERSION Suppresses printing the version number of the
files. The normal listing prints the version
number only if it is not zero. Complement to
/PRVERSION.
/NORETRY Disables automatic error retry when reading a
file. Generates error messages for soft
errors. Complement to /RETRY, the default is
/RETRY.
/NOREWIND Does not rewind the tape before and after
reading a magnetic tape. Complement to
/REWIND.
/NORMAL Prints the normal directory list. This list
includes the file name, extension, length in
blocks written, protection, creation date,
structure name, nonzero version numbers, and
directory name. Complement to /FAST and
/SLOW. This is the default. Use this switch
to override a /FAST or /SLOW in your
SWITCH.INI file.
/NOSORT Does not produce a file suitable for sorting.
This is the default. Complement to /SORT.
/NOSUMMARY Does not use summary mode. This is the
default. Complement to /SUMMARY.
/NOTITLE Does not print page headers. This is the
default for output to the terminal.
Complement to /TITLE.
/NOUNITS Does not list the name of the actual disk
unit; instead, just lists the structure name.
This is the default. Complement to /UNITS.
/OKNONE Suppresses the error message if no files
match the wildcard construction.
2-101
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/OPTION:name Reads your option file (DSK:SWITCH.INI[,]) to
determine your specified switch defaults for
DIRECT. The name appearing as the value of
the switch is the pointer to the line to read
in the file. For example, if the file
contains the line:
DIRECT:ALL/DETAIL
then you reference this line by typing the
command:
DIRECT/OPTION:ALL
Refer to Appendix B for additional
information.
/PARITY:ODD Specifies the parity to be used when reading
/PARITY:EVEN a magnetic tape. The default is :ODD.
/PHYSICAL Ignores logical names. Refer to Section
1.9.1 for a description of logical names.
/PRDEVICE Prints the name of the device for each file.
/PRDIRECTORY Prints the name of the directory for each
file.
/PROTECTION:nnn Gives the output file the protection nnn
(octal). Protection codes are discussed in
Section 1.9.4.
/PRVERSION Prints the version of each file. If you do
not specify this switch, the default is to
print the version only if it is not zero.
The complement is /NOPRVERSION.
/RETRY Enables automatic error retry when reading a
file. Complement to /NORETRY, the default is
/RETRY.
/REWIND Rewinds the magnetic tape before and after
reading it. This is the default. Complement
to /NOREWIND.
/RUN:file-spec Runs the specified program when this command
is finished.
/RUNOFFSET:n Runs the program specified with /RUN with an
offset of n. If you omit the switch, the
default is 0; if you omit the value, the
default is 1.
2-102
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/SINCE:date-time Lists only those files created after the
specified date and time. The default is
January 1, 1964. Refer to Section 1.8.3.
/SLOW Prints a full listing that includes the file
name, extension, length in blocks written,
protection, access date, creation time and
date, structure name, and directory name.
Equivalent to /S. Complement to /FAST and
/NORMAL. (Disk and magnetic tape only.)
/SORT Lists the file structure name and directory
name for each file. The file structure name
is output for every file if you do not
specify a file structure name in the command
string or if you specify generic DSK:. The
wildcard construction is used in the
directory name. TABs are space-filled to
maintain a constant number of characters in
any given line. Project-programmer numbers
include leading zeros; the date is in ANSI
format: 19721009 for Oct 9, 1972. Use this
switch to prepare a file to be sorted by the
SORT program. (See the COBOL documentation.)
Complement to /NOSORT.
/SUMMARY Prints only the summary line that indicates
the total number of blocks and files. A
/FAST/SUMMARY prints a /FAST listing followed
by the summary.
/TITLE Causes a heading to be output on each page
consisting of a label for each column, date,
time, and page number. Standard output to
the line printer has this heading.
Complement to /NOTITLE.
/TMPCOR Lists the directory in old TMPCOR format.
/UNITS Lists the name of the actual disk unit on
which the files are stored instead of the
file structure name. Complement to /NOUNITS.
/WIDTH:n Prints several entries on a single line to
make the output appear in columns. The
default for n is the terminal carriage width.
(See the SET TTY WIDTH command.)
/WORDS Prints the length of the file in words
instead of blocks. Complement to /BLOCKS.
2-103
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/WRITTEN Prints the written length of the file rather
than the allocated length. This is the
default. Complement to /ALLOCATED.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1. List all files on DSKB:.
.DIRECT DSKB:<RET>
FILE DAT 220 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB: [27,5055]
SWITCH INI 10 <057> dd-mmm-yy
PROG MAC 5 <055> dd-mmm-yy
.
2. List all files with extension .MAC in all file structures in
your job's search list.
.DIRECT *.MAC<RET>
PROG MAC 5 <057> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB:[27,5055]
FILE MAC 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy 30(201) DSKC:[27,5055]
.
3. List the directory entry for the file TEST.F4 in user area
[27,4072].
.DIR TEST.F4[27,4072]<RET>
TEST F4 6 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKC:[27,4072]
.
4. List all files in sub-file directory WIZZER.SFD in the [7,2]
area on BLKT:.
.DIR BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]<RET>
ATTA TST 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]
NEW ALG 4 <055> dd-mmm-yy
ALGOL DOC 20 <055> dd-mmm-yy
.
2-104
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
5. Show the switches to the DIRECT command.
.DIRECT/HELP:SWITCHES<RET>
DIRECT switches are:
ACCESS, ACCOUN, *ALLOC, AUTHOR, CHECKS, COMPAR, DETAIL,
DIRECT, DTA, EOTS, ERLOG, *FAST, FILES, FIND,
FLSDIR, FNDBLD, FNDDAT, HDSDIR, *INDIR, *LIST, MARKS,
MVOLUM, *NORMA, PRDEVI, PRDIRE, PRVERS, RETRY, REWIND,
SBRMSG, *SLOW, SORT, SUMMAR, TITLES, TMPCOR, UNITS,
*WIDTH, WORDS, WRITTE
Standard switches are:
ABEFOR, ALLOCA, ANYDEV, APPEND, ASCII, ASINCE, BEFORE,
BINARY, BLOCKS, BYTESI, BUFFER, CONTIG, DATAMO, DELETE,
DENSIT, DSKONL, ERNONE, ERPROT, ERSUPE, ERUID, ESTIMA,
EXIT, FIXED, FRAMES, *HELP, IMAGE, IOMODE, LENGTH,
LIB, MACY11, MECY11, MESSAG, NEW, NOOPTI, OKNONE,
OKPROT, OKSUPE, OKUID, OPTION, PARITY, PBEFOR, PHYSIC,
PRINT, PROTEC, PSINCE, QUERY, RECSIZ, RECFOR, RUN,
RUNCOR, RUNOFF, SCERRO, SCWILD, SINCE, STRS, SUBMIT,
SYS, TELL, TMPFIL, VARIAB, VERSIO
.
6. Create an output listing file in a format suitable for input
to other programs.
.
.DIRECT OUT.FIL/INDIRECT=*.TXT
Total of 10 files
.
.TYPE OUT.FIL
DSKB:MAIL.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:OPRGD.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MCO.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:RDH.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MSRDH.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MSDPM.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:INITIA.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:STEVS.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:SPIDER.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:BARRY2.TXT[10,5763]
.
2-105
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
hl2 DISABLE Command
Function
The DISABLE command disables the POKE, SPY, and other privileged
monitor calls that were enabled when you first logged in or when
you used the ENABLE command. When you log in, your privileges,
if any, are enabled by default.
Format
DISABLE
Characteristics
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not change privileges associated with being [1,2] or on
the operator's terminal.
Requires LOGIN.
Example
Run FILDDT.
.R FILDDT<RET>
Look at monitor memory. Privileges are required to examine
address 41.
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ JSR 3600
C
The contents of 41 are shown, indicating your job has privileges
enabled. Disable the privileges:
.DISABLE<RET>
Run FILDDT.
.R FILDDT<RET>
2-106
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
When you attempt to examine address 41, the contents are not
revealed. 0 is printed.
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ 0
^C
Enable your privileges.
.ENABLE<RET>
Again, examine memory with FILDDT. Your job's privileges have
been reinstated.
.R FILDDT<RET>
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ JSR 3600
^C
.
2-107
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
DISMOUNT Command
Function
The DISMOUNT command relinquishes ownership of a device. It does
not affect your allocation requests, if you have used the
ALLOCATE command, and you can MOUNT the device again. Once you
have dismounted a volume set, the device is available to other
users. However, if the resource was not allocated with the
ALLOCATE command DISMOUNT performs an implicit DEALLOCATE.
If you used the ALLOCATE command for the resource, the DISMOUNTed
resource remains in an allocated state until you issue the
DEALLOCATE command. Once you have dismounted a volume set, your
programs can no longer reference the resource by the logical name
except with the MOUNT and DEALLOCATE commands.
Format
DISMOUNT resource-name/switch,resource-name/switch,...
Where: For disk volume sets, the resource-name is the volume
set-name or the logical name.
For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the logical
name.
You can use the following switches in the command string:
Switch Function
/HELP Prints a short description of the command. If you
specify any resource names with this switch, they
will be ignored.
/NONOTIFY Does not set the system to notify your job when
the dismount is complete. This is the default
function if you have not specified /NOWAIT.
/NOTIFY Sets the system to notify your job when the
dismount is complete. If you specify /NOWAIT,
this is the default function.
/NOWAIT Allows your job to return to monitor level before
the dismount is complete. This implies /NOTIFY.
/REMOVE Removes the specified file structure from your
job's search list. If no other jobs are accessing
the structure, and if it is not a system
2-108
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
structure, the operator physically dismounts it.
2-109
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
/WAIT Holds your job until the dismount is complete.
This is the default function.
Associated Commands
ALLOCATE Informs the system of your future need for a
resource.
DEALLOCATE Removes the resource from your job's list of
allocated resources. If the resource has not
been dismounted, DEALLOCATE dismounts it.
MOUNT Requests ownership of the resource(s).
SHOW ALLOCATION Prints a list of the resources that are
allocated and mounted for your job.
SHOW QUEUE Prints a list of the requests in the system
queues.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Examples
1. The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,
DEALLOCATE, MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.
The resources are reserved for a multivolume tape volume set
with the ALLOCATE command. The name of the volume set is
TAPE-SET, and it contains three volumes. The logical name TS
is assigned to the tape set. The tape is write enabled, and
it does not have standard labels.
.ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE
/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
2-110
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
The job's resources are displayed using the SHOW ALLOCATION
command:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
-------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again
displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
-------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 1
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
After work with the tape set and the structure is finished,
the structure is dismounted. Because the structure was not
explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.
.DEALLOCATE DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
2-111
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
-------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it can
be deallocated. The tape set is deallocated:
.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
-------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
.
2-112
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
2. In this example, you knew that the job was the only one using
the structure BLKJ: and included a /REMOVE switch, so that
the operator would remove the disk pack from the drive. The
message "BLKJ DISMOUNTED" means that BLKJ: is no longer in
your search list, and that a request has been queued to the
operator to remove the pack from the drive. The message does
not mean that BLKJ has already been physically removed.
Because this command implies /NOWAIT, you will not receive
notification of the physical removal of the disk pack.
.DISMOUNT BLKJ/REMOVE<RET>
[BLKJ DISMOUNTED]
3. The following DISMOUNT/WAIT command causes the job to suspend
further processing until all pending dismount requests from
it have been completed. There were no pending dismount
requests from this job, so the job returns to monitor level
immediately.
.DISMOUNT/WAIT<RET>
NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB
.
2-113
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DSK Command
DSK Command
Function
The DSK command prints disk usage figures for all disk I/O
performed since the last DSK command, followed by the total
amount of disk I/O performed since the job was started. Disk
usage is printed in the following format:
RD,WT=i,j
RD,WT=m,n
Where: i and j are the incremental number of 128-word blocks
read and written since the last DSK command.
m and n are the total number of 128-word blocks read
and written since the job started.
NOTE
i and j are kept modulo 4096. If you enabled
automatic READ or WRITE output, using the SET
WATCH command, i and j are usually zero,
because SET WATCH resets these values. CTRL/T
also resets these values.
Format
DSK job
Where: job is the number of the job for which you want the
disk usage. This argument is optional. If you include
the job number in the command string, only the total
statistics (m and n above) are printed.
If the job-number is omitted, the system prints the
disk usage figures for your job.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
2-114
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DSK Command
Example
Print the disk usage values for your job.
.DSK<RET>
RD,WT=5,10
RD,WT=474,12
Print the total disk usage values for job 50.
.DSK 50<RET>
RD,WT=474,12
2-115
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ENABLE Command
ENABLE Command
Function
If you are not a privileged user, this command has no effect.
However, if you are a privileged user (that is, you have the
privilege word set in ACTDAE.SYS) you can turn your privileges
off with the DISABLE command, and you can turn your privileges on
with the ENABLE command. Your privileges are enabled
automatically when you log in. Privileges allow you to use
privileged monitor calls such as POKE and SPY.
Format
ENABLE
Characteristics
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not affect privileges associated with [1,2] or with being on
the operator's terminal (OPR:).
Example
Run FILDDT. Look at memory area. Examine address 41.
Privileges are required to examine this location.
.R FILDDT<RET>
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ JSR 3600
^C
Disable your privileges:
.DISABLE<RET>
Run FILDDT. Examine 41. Your privileges are disabled;
therefore, 0 is printed rather than the contents of 41.
.R FILDDT<RET>
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ 0
^C
2-116
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ENABLE Command
Enable your privileges:
.ENABLE<RET>
Again, examine memory. The contents of 41 are displayed.
.R FILDDT<RET>
FILE: /M<RET>
41/ JSR 3600
^C
.
2-117
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EOF Command
EOF Command
Function
The EOF command writes an end-of-file mark on the specified
magnetic tape. This command runs the COMPIL program, which
interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Format
EOF MTxn:
Where: MTxn: specifies the magnetic-tape unit.
More than one magnetic-tape unit can be specified in
the command string by separating the specifications
with commas. Refer to Section 1.9.1 for a description
of device name formats.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Write end-of-file mark on magnetic tape MTA2:.
.EOF MTA2:<RET>
.
2-118
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXAMINE Command
EXAMINE Command
Function
The EXAMINE command displays a core location in your area (high
or low segment). The contents of the location are typed out in
half-word octal mode. This command is useful when debugging
programs.
Format
E addr
Where: addr is the address of the location being examined.
The address is required the first time the EXAMINE
command is used.
If you omit the address, the system will examine the
next location. If the previous command was a deposit,
the system will examine the location of the deposit.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Example
Examine location 140.
.E 140<RET>
000140/ 000000 000000
Examine the next location, 141. You do not need to specify the
address for a consecutive location.
.E<RET>
000141/ 000000 000000
Deposit 1 in location 141. You can omit the address because the
DEPOSIT command will use the location of the last EXAMINE
command.
.D 0 1<RET>
2-119
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXAMINE Command
Examine the same location, 141. You do not need to specify the
address. The EXAMINE command will use the location of the last
DEPOSIT command.
.E<RET>
000141/ 000000 000001
2-120
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
EXECUTE Command
Function
The EXECUTE command compiles the specified source files, if
necessary, loads the generated REL files into core, and begins
execution of the program. The system determines the proper
language compiler to use from the source file extensions or from
switches you specify in the command string. (Refer to the
COMPILE command.) If a .REL file already exists with a newer
date than that of the source file, the system does not compile
the file unless you request this explicitly with a switch.
This command is equal to issuing the LOAD and START commands.
Each time you issue a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command,
the system remembers the command with its arguments in a
temporary file on disk or in core. Therefore, when you issue one
of these commands without specifying any arguments, the system
uses the arguments that it saved in the temporary file. (Refer
to Appendix C.)
The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions: the @
construction (indirect commands), the + construction, the =
construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running the appropriate language compiler for
LINK.
Format
EXECUTE file-spec
Where: file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications separated by commas. A file
specification consists of a device name, a file name
with or without an extension, and a directory name.
(Refer to Section 1.9.)
You can use the following switches to modify the command string.
These switches can be temporary or permanent switches unless
otherwise stated. (Refer to Section 1.8.4.)
2-121
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
Switch Function
/ALGOL Compiles the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files
with the extension of .ALG.
/BINARY Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file name for the binary file follows the
standard conventions for determining the name of
the output file. (Refer to the COMPILE command.)
The file name extension is .REL. This is the
default action.
/BLISS Compiles the file with BLISS-10. Assumed for
files with the extension of .b10 or .bLI. This
switch is not supported.
/C68 Runs the appropriate COBOL compiler.
/C74
/COBOL Compiles the file with COBOL. Assumed for files
with the extension of .CBL.
/COMPILE Forces a compilation of this file even if a binary
file exists with a newer date and time than the
source file. You can use this switch to obtain an
extra compilation (for example, to obtain a
listing) because the system does not perform
compilation if the binary file is newer than the
source file.
/CREF Produces a cross-referenced listing file on the
disk for each file compiled, for later processing
by the CREF program. The file extension of the
output file is .CRF. You can then list the files
using the CREF command. However, with COBOL
files, the system appends the cross-referenced
listing to the listing file.
/DDT Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.
/DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
Passes the arguments to FORTRAN. Refer to the
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.
/DLIST Produces a .LST file in your directory area. You
can output the file to the line printer with the
PRINT command.
/F40 Obsolete
/F10
2-122
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/F66 Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and EXTERNAL
statements.
/FOROTS Obsolete
/FORSE
/FORTRAN Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4 and
.FOR and all files with nonrecognizable compiler
extensions if FORTRAN is the standard compiler.
You need to specify this switch if the file has a
nonrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN is
not the standard compiler or is not the current
default. (For example, EXE/ALGOL FIL1, FIL2,
FIL3/FORTRAN).
/FUDGE: Creates a temporary file that contains the names
file-spec of the .REL files produced by the command string
plus the library file name. When you issue the
FUDGE command, PIP reads this temporary file to
generate a library .REL file. (Refer to the FUDGE
command description.) The argument to this switch
is:
dev:file.ext[proj,prog]
Where: dev: is the device on which to write the
file. If you omit the device, the system
assumes DSK.
file.ext is the name of the library file.
The file name is required. If you omit
the extension, the system assumes .REL.
[proj,prog] is the directory in which to
place the file. Your directory is assumed
if you do not specify a directory.
This switch is permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all .REL files generated by the
command string.
/GFLOAT Indicates that double-precision numbers are to be
stored in G-floating format. This format has an
extended exponent range. This option is available
on KL-10 proessors only.
2-123
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/K?10 Designates the processor where the program will
execute once it has been loaded. The variable (?)
can be L or S. These switches are necessary for
FORTRAN-10 programs because the compiler generates
different code for the processors. The default is
the processor on the computer executing the
command.
/LIBRARY Loads the files in library search mode. This mode
causes a program file in a special library file to
be loaded only if one or more of its declared
entry symbols satisfies an undefined global
request in the source file. The system libraries
are always searched. (See the TOPS-10 LINK
Reference Manual.)
/LINK Obsolete
/LIST Generates a listing file for each file compiled.
The extension of the output file is .LST. The
system automatically spools it when you log out.
The complement of this switch is /NOLIST.
/LMAP Produces a loader map during the loading process
containing the local symbols.
/LOADER Obsolete
/MACRO Assembles the file with MACRO. Assumed for files
with extensions of .MAC.
/MACY11 Assembles the file with MACY11. Assumed for files
with extensions of .P11. This switch is not
supported.
/MANTIS Compiles the file with MANTIS debugging
information. This switch affects Fortran-40 files
only. This switch is not supported.
/MAP Produces loader maps during the loading process.
When this switch is encountered, a loader map is
requested from the loader. After the library
search of the system libraries, the map is written
in your disk area with either the file name
specified by you (for example, /MAP:file) or the
default file name nnnLNK.MAP. This switch is an
exception to the permanent switch rule in that it
causes only one map to be produced even though it
appears as a permanent switch.
2-124
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/NEW Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental system library (device NEW:) area
[1,5]. If the compiler does not exist on device
NEW:, COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to the Restriction.)
/NOBINARY Does not generate binary files. Unless you issue
this switch, the system generates binary files.
This switch, when combined with the /CREF or /LIST
switch, is useful when you compile programs solely
for the purpose of generating listings.
/NOCOMPILE Does not force a compilation on a source file
whose date is not as recent as the date on the
binary file. This switch is not the same as the
/REL switch, which turns off all compilations,
even if the source file is newer than the .REL
file. Complement to the /COMPILE switch.
/NOCOMPILE is the default action.
/NODEBUG Does not pass previously specified arguments to
FORTRAN.
/NOLIST Does not generate listing files. This is the
default action.
/NOMANTIS Compiles the file without MANTIS debugging
information. This switch affects Fortran-40
programs only. This switch is not supported.
/NOOPTIMIZE Does not optimize the object code of FORTRAN
programs.
/NOSEARCH Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not. Because this is
the default action, this switch is used to turn
off library search mode (/LIBRARY).
/OLD Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library of old programs (device OLD:) which
resides on the disk area [1,3]. If the compiler
does not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL tries to
obtain it from device SYS:. (Refer to the
Restriction.)
/OPTIMIZE Optimizes the object code of FORTRAN source
programs.
/PAL10 Assembles the file with PAL10. Assumed for files
with the .PAL extension.
2-125
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/PASCAL Compiles the file with Pascal. Assumed for files
with the .PAS extension.
/REL Uses the existing .REL files although newer source
files might be present.
/SAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program.
/SEARCH Loads the files in library search mode. The
action is identical to that of the /LIBRARY
switch.
/SELF Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
DSK: instead of from the system library (device
SYS:). This switch is useful if you keep a
private copy of a compiler in your own disk area.
(Refer to the Restriction.)
/SNOBOL Compiles the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files
with an extension of .SNO. This switch is not
supported.
/SSAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program in a
sharable executable file.
/SYS Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library (device SYS:) area [1,4]. This is
the default action.
Restriction
You cannot specify compilers from different structures in the
same command string. For example, the following is invalid:
.EXECUTE PARTA.FOR/NEW,PARTB.FOR/OLD
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE PARTA.FOR/NEW<RET>
.COMPILE PARTB.FOR/OLD<RET>
.EXECUTE/REL PARTA,PARTB
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Places your terminal at user level.
Runs the appropriate compiler or assembler and linking
loader, destroying your original core image.
Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.
2-126
SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
Example
Type out a test program.
.TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 10
10 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
END
Execute the program.
.EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.05
EXIT
.
Message shows the time parameters of your job.
2-127
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
FILE Command
Function
The FILE command remotely controls DECtape-to-disk and
disk-to-DECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.
NOTE
The FILE command is not part of the standard
system. Your site must run OMOUNT explicitly to
make the FILE command usable.
There are seven functions that can be performed by the FILE
command.
Format Function
FILE C Check
FILE D Delete
FILE F File
FILE L Read
FILE R Retrieve
FILE W Wait
FILE Z Zero
The C and W functions are the only requests that are performed
immediately. Your terminal and job are free to proceed before
the request is completed, except for batch jobs, which cannot
continue until execution is complete.
Formats
1. FILE C
Checks the queue of FILE requests to determine if any of your
requests are still pending. There is no argument to the
command in this format. Pending requests for your job will
be printed on your terminal.
2. FILE D,tape-id,file.ext,file.ext,...
Deletes the specified files from DECtape. This command
requires tape identification and a list of file names as
arguments. The tape-id is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric
name that identifies the tape. After the files are deleted,
an automatic FILE L is performed.
2-128
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
3. FILE F,tape-id file-spec,file-spec,...
Copies the specified files onto the specified DECtape. This
command requires a tape identification and list of file
specifications as arguments. The file specifications can
include an explicit file structure name and
project-programmer number so that you can copy files from a
disk area other than your own. You do not have to specify
the device and project-programmer number of subsequent file
specifications if they do not change. That is, you must
specify the programmer number (for example, [,104]) if the
file to be copied has the same project number as yours and
you must specify the project number ([41,]) if you are
copying files from another project.
The protection of the disk file is checked to see if the file
can be read. In addition, the protection of the DECtape
directory file (tape-id.DIR) is checked to see if you can
update it. If there is not enough room on the DECtape to
copy an entire file, that portion (if any) that has been
written so far is deleted and an error message is placed in
the directory file. When the files have been successfully
copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.
When the wildcard construction is used with the FILE F and
FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used. That
is, all files matching the construction are transferred from
all structures in the search list.
In most cases you do not need to specify which file
structures the files are on because UMOUNT determines this
(with LOOKUPs) and passes the information to OMOUNT. With
the FILE F and FILE Z functions, if a file structure is not
specified and the specified file exists on more than one
structure, the first one in your search list is copied.
4. FILE L,tape-id
Reads the directory of a DECtape and writes it into your disk
area as an ASCII file with the file name tape-id.DIR. The
file is placed on the first file structure that can be
written on in your search list, as long as that structure has
an area that matches your project-programmer number. Tape-id
is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name that is used to
identify the tape. You can then print the directory on your
terminal with the TYPE command. The format of the DECtape
directory is similar to the directory file written by the
DIRECTORY command. If errors occur while the FILE command is
being processed, the system writes error messages into the
directory file tape-id.DIR.
2-129
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
5. File R,tape-id,dev:file.ext,dev:file.ext...
Transfers the specified files from your DECtape to the disk.
This command requires tape-id and a list of file names as
arguments. If the specified files already exist in the disk
area, they are superseded, if their protection code allows
it. If the specified files do not exist, they are created on
the first file structure in your job's search list for which
creation is permitted. After files are transferred, an
automatic FILE L is performed.
If you have a search list containing multiple file
structures, the asterisk construction (when used with the
FILE R command) can cause files to be created rather than
superseded. For the FILE R function, when no file structure
is specified, the files are copied onto the first file
structure in your search list on which you are allowed to
create files. (Refer to the description of the SETSRC
program.) When a file structure name is typed or implied, it
becomes the new default.
6. FILE W
Waits until all of your pending requests are processed before
allowing your job to continue. If there are pending
requests, the message "WAITING... TYPE 2 ^C'S TO EXIT" is
printed on your terminal. Control returns to your job when
all requests have been processed. You can type two CTRL/Cs
if you decide not to wait.
7. FILE Z,tape-id,dev:file.ext[ppn],dev:file.ext[ppn]...
Deletes the files in the directory of the DECtape before the
files are copied and then performs the same operations as the
FILE F command. This command requires tape-id and can have a
list of file specification arguments. After the files are
copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.
When you use the wildcard construction with the FILE F and
FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used. That
is, all files matching the construction are transferred from
all structures in the search list.
2-130
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
The wildcard constructions can be used, but generic DSK: can
define many file structures; the specific file structure is
chosen as follows:
When you use the wildcard construction for the file name or
extension, the first structure in your search list that you
can access is used.
If you do not use the wildcard construction and the file
exists, the first file structure in the search list that
contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by a
default. (Refer to the examples.) If the file does not
exist, the standard structure is used.
Examples
In the following examples, your search list is as follows:
SORT:,DSKA:/NOCREATE,DSKB:,DSKC:
You are user 10,3421, with UFDs on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:, and
the file EX.1 exists on each of these three structures. User
10,4072 has the file EX.2 in his area on DSKB: and on DSKC:.
1. This command requests that the operator mount DECtape 1, that
the file EX.1 in your area be copied onto it, that the file
EX.2[10,4072] also be copied onto the DECtape, that a
directory of the DECtape be written in your area, and that
the operator dismount the DECtape.
The directory is written on the first structure encountered
in the search list that is both writable and on which you
have a UFD. In the preceding example, you do not have a UFD
on the first structure in your search list (SORT:), you
cannot create new files on the second structure in your
search list (DSKA:), and so the directory is written on the
third structure in your search list (DSKB:).
The file EX.1 on DSKA: will be copied only onto the DECtape
because the copy on DSKA: was encountered first. The file
DSKB:EX.2[10,4072] will be copied onto the DECtape because
the copy on DSKB: was encountered first.
.FILE F,TAPE1,EX.1,EX.2[10,4072]<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4072]
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
.
2-131
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
2. In this example, you specified that DSKC: be copied from both
areas. DSKC: was typed only once because a device given in a
file specification remains in effect for subsequent file
specifications in the same command, unless another device is
specified. When you omit the project number the default is
your project-programmer number. Also the project-programmer
number can be specified either before the file name (as in
this example) or after the file name (as in the preceding
example).
.FILE F,TAPE2,DSKC:EX.1,[,4072]EX.2<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
DSKB:DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
.
The response from the FILE C command indicates to you which
of your requests have not yet been processed. In this case,
both of your requests are still pending.
.FILE C<RET>
1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4071]
2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
DSKB:,DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
.
The FILE R command uses the same algorithm as the FILE F and
Z command for determining the device on which to write the
directory. The file EX.1 is written on the first file
structure in your search list. The file EX.1 already exists
on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:. DSKA: is NOCREATE, so the file
EX.1 is written onto DSKB, superseding the EX.1 already on
DSKB:.
.FILE R,TAPE1,EX.1<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
1. R JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKB:EX.1
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
.
2-132
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
3. When the wildcard construction is used, UMOUNT uses the
entire search list to determine what files to copy for FILE F
and FILE Z commands, whether or not you have a UFD on a
particular structure. UMOUNT passes the construction, along
with each structure in the search list, to OMOUNT.
.FILE F,TAPE3,E?.*<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
2. F JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE3
DSKB:,SORT:E?.*,DSKA:E?.*,DSKB:E?.*,DSKC:E?.*
DSKC:E?.*
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
.
2-133
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FINISH Command
FINISH Command
Function
The FINISH command terminates any input or output currently in
progress on the specified device, closes any open files, and
deassigns the device. This command completely disassociates a
device from your job and prevents you from continuing the
program. If you want to continue your program after ending I/O,
use the DEASSIGN command instead of the FINISH command.
Format
FINISH dev:
Where: dev: is the logical or physical name of the device on
which I/O is to be terminated. This argument is
optional.
If dev: is omitted I/O is terminated on all devices,
except your job's controlling terminal, and any logical
name associated with the controlling terminal is
cleared.
Refer to Section 1.9.1 for a description of device
names.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Restrictions
When running a program, you cannot continue your program after a
FINISH if the device was initialized, but you can start the
program from the beginning or enter DDT.
2-134
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FINISH Command
Example
Assign a card reader to your job.
.ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
Card reader number 1 is assigned.
CDR261 ASSIGNED
Show the devices that are busy.
.SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
TTY144 18 INIT
TTY235 18 INIT
LPT260 18 INIT
LPT261 18 INIT
LPT263 18 INIT
CDR260 18 INIT
CDR261 29 AS
Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your job.
Finish using the card reader.
.FINISH CDR<RET>
Again, show the busy devices.
.SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
TTY144 18 INIT
TTY235 18 INIT
LPT260 18 INIT
LPT261 18 INIT
LPT263 18 INIT
CDR260 18 INIT
.
Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices. Therefore, it
is available to other users.
2-135
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FUDGE Command
FUDGE Command
Function
The FUDGE command creates a library .REL file from a temporary
file generated by a previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command string containing the /FUDGE switch. (See the TOPS-10
MAKLIB User's Guide and the TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference
Manual for descriptions of library .REL files.)
The temporary file contains the library name and the list of .REL
files which were entered by the previous command's /FUDGE switch.
The FUDGE command runs PIP, which reads the list of .REL files
and the library file name from the temporary file. PIP then
copies the listed .REL files into the library file in the same
order that they are listed in the temporary file.
NOTE
Unlike the COMPIL program's default action, the /FUDGE
switch combines files in the order that you list them
in the command line. The COMPIL program sorts files
by compilers. COMPIL sorts mixed FORTRAN and MACRO
programs so that all FORTRAN programs are compiled
first and MACRO programs second.
After you use the /FUDGE switch, you must issue the FUDGE command
before you issue any other command that runs PIP (for example,
TYPE and COPY). Otherwise, the library information in the
temporary file will be superseded by the information generated by
the other PIP command.
Format
FUDGE
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program (at CCL offset).
Destroys your core image.
2-136
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FUDGE Command
Example
Compile the files PROG,NUMBER, and NUMB2.
.COMPILE/FUDGE:LIBRAR PROG.FOR,NUMBER.FOR,NUMB2.FOR<RET>
Create a file named LIBRAR that contains the .REL files generated
by the COMPILE command.
.FUDGE<RET>
A DIRECTORY command shows the files created less than an hour
ago, among them: LIBRAR.REL.
.DIR/SIN:-1<RET>
PROG REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:[27,5055]
NUMBER REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
NUMB2 REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
LIBRAR REL 3 <055> dd-mmm-yy
2-137
SYSTEM COMMANDS
GET Command
GET Command
Function
The GET command loads a core image from a retrievable storage
device but does not execute it.
This command clears all of your core. However, programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros. (That is, programs
should be self-initializing). This action allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C START sequence without another GET command.
Format
GET file-spec core/switch
Where: file-spec is a file specification in the standard
format.
core is the amount of core you want to reserve for the
program. The core argument is a decimal number
followed by an optional K or P for blocks or pages,
respectively. If you do not specify either K or P, K
is assumed. If you do not specify a core argument, the
default is the minimum amount of core needed to load
the program.
/switch is the following option:
/USE:n Specifies the octal section number (n)
in which a core image is loaded. Valid
section numbers are 0-37, octal. (Note
that the limit is 40 octal sections.)
Characteristics
Destroys your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
2-138
SYSTEM COMMANDS
GET Command
Example
Load a program.
.LOAD PROG.FOR
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
Save the executable format.
.SAVE
PROG SAVED
Use GET to bring the program into memory.
.GET PROG
JOB SETUP
START execution of the program.
.START
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.17
EXIT
.
2-139
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HALT Command
HALT Command
Function
The HALT command (or CTRL/C) stops your job.
Formats
HALT
(CTRL/C)
CTRL/C echoes on your terminal as ^C.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Examples
1. Request a list of your directory.
.DIR<RET>
PATH1.RNO 3 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:[27,5434]
SWITCH.INI 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
CALC.^C
^C
.
Type two CTRL/Cs to halt output.
2. Execute a program.
.EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
^C
^C
.
Two CTRL/Cs return you to monitor level, interrupting program
execution.
2-140
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HALT Command
Use CCONTINUE to continue execution while remaining at
monitor level.
.CCONTINUE<RET>
Use HALT to interrupt execution. (See NOTE below.)
.HALT<RET>
.
Use CONTINUE to re-enter user level and continue program
execution.
.CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:6.12 ELAPSED TIME:45.73
EXIT
.
Program successfully completes execution.
NOTE
It is necessary to halt execution of a
program if your terminal is to enter or leave
user level. Therefore, you must issue a HALT
or CTRL/C at monitor level, after you have
used the CCONTINUE or CSTART commands, for
your terminal to enter user level.
2-141
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
HELP Command
Function
The HELP command prints information about system features on your
terminal. You can select this information from the following
file structures: HLP:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:, and SYS:.
Formats
HELP
Prints instructions for using the variations of the HELP command.
HELP *
Lists the names of features for which HELP is available, all the
monitor commands, all site-specific commands, all user-defined
(declared) commands, all the monitor SET commands, the monitor
SET TTY commands, the terminal types supported by TOPS-10, and
the SET WATCH commands.
HELP name
Where: name is the name of a feature or program for which the
monitor has a HELP file. Only the first six
alphanumeric characters are read by the HELP program.
HELP dev:name
Where: dev: is the file structure that the file is on.
name is the name of the program or feature for which
you want help.
If the specified feature does not have a HELP file on
the specified device, or if you do not specify the
device, the devices are searched in the following
order:
HLP:, SYS:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:
You can change the search order by changing your job
search list. Refer to the SETSRC command.
2-142
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
You can use the asterisk wildcard construction (*) instead of the
feature name, for information about all the HELP available on the
specified device. (See examples.) You cannot use the asterisk
(*) to specify the device name.
| Because of the 6-character limit on file names, some of the help
| file names can be cryptic. The file names for the commands
| topics are fairly straightforward and, although truncated to
| 6-characters, can be understood. (For example, PASSWO is the help
| file for the PASSWORD command.) However, help files are provided
| for such general topics as line continuation (LNCONT), command
| switches (COMSWI), and directory paths (DIRPAT) and the file
| names for these topics may be difficult to ascertain. These
| general topics and their help file names are listed below:
|
|
| _________________________________________________________________
|
| Help file Topic
| _________________________________________________________________
|
| ATSIGN Indirect Commands (@ Construction)
| ANGLEB The Angle-Bracket (< >) Construction
| CHRCOD SIXBIT/ASCII Character Codes
| CMDARG Command Arguments
| COMSWI Compiler Switches
| COMCMD Compile-Class Commands
| CRDCOD ASCII Card Codes
| DEFCOM The Default Compiler
| DELKEY The DELETE Key
| DEVHND Device-Handling Commands
| DEVNAM Device Names
| DIRNAM Directory Names
| DIRPAT Directory Paths
| DTARGS Date-Time Arguments
| EQUAL The Equal (=) Construction
| ERSNAM Ersatz Device Names
| FILEXT File Name Extensions
| FILHND File-Handling Commands
| FILNAM File Names
| FISPEC File Specification
| FNCCMD Functional Groups of Commands
| INFCMD Information Commands
| JOBCTL Job-Control Commands
| LIBS Libraries
| LNCONT Line Continuation
| LNKSWI LINK Switches
| MICCTL MIC Commands
| NETCMD Network Commands
| NEWUSE Introductory Help to TOPS-10 Commands
| PCODES Protection Codes
2-143
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
| PLUS The Plus (+) Construction
| PRGCTL Program-Control Commands
| PRGPRE Program-Preparation Commands
| RESPPN Reserved Project-Programmer Numbers
| SERLST Search Lists
| SWINI SWITCH.INI Files
| SWITCH Command Switches
| SYSDEF System Defaults
| TEMFIL Temporary Files
| TERCTL Terminal-Control and Terminal Communication
| UCMNDS User-Definable Commands
| WLDCRD Wildcard Constructions
|
| _________________________________________________________________
|
|
| The various SET commands have their own help files and they are
| listed in the general-topic help file SET.
Characteristics
Does an autopush, so it preserves your core image.
Runs the HELP program.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
For information about the HELP command, type HELP.
.HELP<RET>
The HELP command prints information about the system on your
terminal. Use one of the following constructions for specific
information.
.HELP<RET>
Prints out this message.
.HELP *<RET>
Prints out the names of all subjects for which there is help.
Use one of these subjects as the name in the next construction.
HELP * also prints out the names of the system commands, the
names of site-specific commands, the names of job-specific
commands, the names of the SET commands, the names of the SET
2-144
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
DEFAULT commands, the names of the SET TTY commands, the names of
the SET WATCH commands, and the supported terminal types.
.HELP name<RET>
Prints all the information available about the subject "name".
For example:
.HELP DIRECT<RET>
Prints information about the DIRECT command/program.
2-145
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
.HELP lib:*<RET>
Prints out the names of all subjects for which there is help
available from the specified library device. The standard system
library devices are:
SYS: NEW: OLD: HLP: DOC:
For example:
.HELP NEW:*<RET>
Prints a list of all the information available in NEW:.
.HELP lib:name<RET>
Prints information about the specified subject in the specified
library.
2-146
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
INITIA Command
Function
The INITIA command sets the parameters for your terminal. This
command is issued automatically at system startup on certain
designated terminals. You can reissue the command at any time.
This command also starts certain system programs, when issued
from particular terminals.
If you are logged in and you run INITIA, INITIA reads your
SWITCH.INI file. Refer to Appendix B for a description of
SWITCH.INI.
Format
INITIA arg arg ...
Where: arg can be one of the following arguments. You can
precede any of the following arguments with NO (except
NORUN) to suppress a default setting.
Argument Function
ATTRIBUTES Prints the terminal attributes for this
terminal.
CHECK:keyword Sets your terminal type after requesting
identification from your DEC terminal. The
optional keyword is DEFAULT, meaning CHECK
only if the current terminal type is the
default type (usually TTY).
HELP Prints information about INITIA command.
KSYS Tells you when timesharing will end (if KSYS
is set).
NAME Prints the system name on your terminal.
NAME is the default argument.
NORUN Suppresses the execution of any default
program.
NOTICE Prints the general operator notice.
2-147
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
SETTTY Sets up your terminal characteristics or
attributes. The SETTTY argument is required
in order to set terminal characteristics from
SWITCH.INI if you are logged in. When you
are not logged in, INITIA reads terminal
characteristics from SYS:TTY.INI
automatically. SETTTY can be specified on
the INITIA command line or in the SWITCH.INI
file.
STRUCTURES Prints any operator notices about mounted
structures.
TEXT Prints quick operator notice.
TTY Prints the terminal characteristics for this
terminal.
Terminal Characteristics Arguments
In addition to the above arguments, you can use the following
arguments to INITIA SETTTY in your SWITCH.INI file. They are
effective for any job that is logged in. Most of the following
arguments are equivalent to an argument to a SET TTY command.
Many of the arguments can be preceded by NO and a space to
disable the defaults. These are included in the description of
the function of the arguments. (Refer to Appendix B for details
about using SWITCH.INI.)
Each argument, equivalent SET TTY command, and function, is
listed below.
Argument Equivalent Command Function
SETTTY None Must be present for the other
INITIA terminal arguments to
be effective.
ALTMODE TTY ALTMODE Converts ALTmode codes 175 and
176 to the ESCape character.
NO ALTMODE restores the
individual identities of codes
175 and 176.
BLANKS TTY BLANK Controls the output of blank
lines. NO BLANKS suppresses
the output of automatic,
consecutive carriage returns
at the end of output.
2-148
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
CRLF TTY CRLF Controls the automatic
carriage return and line feed
at the end of the terminal
line. NO CRLF suppresses the
automatic carriage return and
line feed.
DEBREAK TTY DEBREAK No longer supported.
DEFER TTY DEFER Suppresses echoing to a video
terminal until input is
requested. NO DEFER allows
characters typed to the system
to be echoed when the terminal
is idle.
DISPLAY TTY DISPLAY Notifies the system that you
have a display terminal. This
characteristic can be used by
programs that control output
to the terminal.
ECHO TTY ECHO Controls echoing to the
terminal.
ELEMENT:xxx TTY ELEMENT xxx No longer supported.
FILL:x TTY FILL x Assigns filler class x to the
terminal.
FORM TTY FORM Controls the output of
line-feeds for formfeed and
vertical tab characters. NO
FORM instructs the system to
output the line-feeds.
GAG TTY GAG Controls the reception of
messages sent with the SEND
command. NO GAG allows
messages when your terminal is
at user level.
IDLEDISCONN n None Sets the maximum number of
seconds your terminal can be
idle before the system
disconnects it.
LC TTY LC Informs the system that your
terminal has lowercase
ability. NO LC changes all
lowercase characters to
uppercase.
2-149
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
LENGTH:xx TTY LENGTH n Sets the forms length of your
terminal.
LOCALCOPY TTY LOCALCOPY Does not require the system to
echo characters to the
terminal.
LOCATE node None Changes the default device
list of the job, making
devices at other nodes
available to your job. LOCATE
is only valid in the
SWITCH.INI and TTY.INI files.
RCVSPEED:xxx TTY SPEED xxx nnn Changes the input speed of the
terminal to be xxx. This
argument affects the speed at
which the monitor receives
characters from your terminal.
REMOTE TTY REMOTE Sets your terminal for
accounts with remote or local
access types. REMOTE is not
recommended for use by
non-privileged users because
it can only be reversed by an
operator [1,2].
RTCOMP TTY RTCOMP Controls the use of CTRL/R and
CTRL/T. Refer to Section 1.6
for the function of these
control characters. RTCOMP
turns off the control
characters. NO RTCOMP turns
them on.
SPEED:xxxx TTY SPEED xxxx Sets the speed of your
terminal to xxxx baud. This
construction sets the input
and output speeds to be
equivalent.
SSIZE:n TTY [S]STOP n Sets the page length of your
terminal. This controls the
number of lines that are
output to your terminal before
an automatic stop.
SSTOP TTY SSTOP Ignores CTRL/Q until output is
stopped either automatically
by the system, or by CTRL/S
from the user.
2-150
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
STOP TTY STOP Stops output to the terminal
automatically after page
length is reached.
SYSDPY None Runs the display-oriented
SYSTAT program that is
appropriate for your set
terminal type. SYSDPY is only
valid in the SWITCH.INI and
TTY.INI files.
TABS TTY TAB Informs the system that your
terminal has tabular ability.
NO TABS instructs the system
to simulate tab stops.
TAPE TTY TAPE Turns on the XON (CTRL/Q) and
XOFF (CTRL/S) keys for paper
tape reading. NO TAPE gives
CTRL/Q and CTRL/S their normal
function. TAPE is discussed
in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
Manual. CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are
discussed in Section 1.6.
TERMINET None Sets tab spacing for a
TERMINET-300.
TYPE:xxxx TTY TYPE xxxx Informs the system that your
terminal is of the type xxxx.
UC TTY UC Changes all the characters
input from your terminal to
uppercase.
WIDTH:xxx TTY WIDTH xxx Sets the width of the line on
your terminal to xxx
characters.
XMTSPEED:xxx TTY SPEED nnn xxx Changes the output speed of
your terminal. This argument
affects the speed at which the
monitor sends characters to
your terminal.
The arguments listed above are described more thoroughly in the
description of the SET TTY command.
2-151
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
Terminal Attributes Arguments
The following arguments to INITIA SETTTY set up the attributes of
your terminal. Like the preceding terminal characteristics
arguments, you can use the following arguments in your SWITCH.INI
file.
Unlike the terminal characteristics arguments, most of the
following terminal attributes arguments do not have equivalent
SET TTY commands. The exceptions are DISPLAY, ISO, EIGHTBIT, and
OVERSTRIKE.
To display your current terminal attributes, you must use the
command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.
To set terminal attributes, use the following command format:
INITIA SETTTY arg arg ...
All the following arguments can be preceded with NO and a space
to disable the setting.
Argument Function
ANSLEVEL:n Indicates the level of conformance to ANSI
CRT programming standards.
AVO Indicates that the terminal has an advanced
video option or equivalent capability.
BLOCKMODE Indicates that the terminal is capable of
performing block-mode transfers.
COLOR Indicates the terminal has a color video
display.
DECLEVEL:n Indicates the level of conformance to DEC CRT
programming standards.
DECTCS Indicates the DEC technical character set.
DISPLAY Indicates that the terminal has a video
display; NO DISPLAY indicates a hard-copy
terminal.
DRCS Indicates dynamically redefinable character
sets.
EIGHTBIT Indicates that the terminal uses an eight-bit
ASCII character code.
2-152
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
8BITARCH Indicates the terminal is capable of using an
eight-bit ASCII character code.
GUARDEDAREA Indicates terminal allows guarded area
transfer.
HSCROLL Indicates the terminal supports horizontal
scrolling.
IDCHAR Indicates character insertion and deletion.
IDLINE Indicates line insertion and deletion.
INTERROGATION Indicates that the terminal supports terminal
state interrogation.
ISO Indicates ISO Latin-1 supplemental graphic
character set. NO ISO means DEC
Multinational Character Set.
KATAKANA Indicates the Katakana character set.
KEYBOARD Indicates the terminal has a keyboard.
LOCATOR:device Indicates whether locator is present. The
device can be MOUSE, TABLET or NONE.
NRC Indicates national replacement character
sets.
OVERSTRIKE Indicates that the terminal allows a
three-character sequence to create one
composite output character by printing one
character, backspacing and then printing
another character over the first.
PRINTERPORT Indicates that the terminal has a printer
port option.
REGIS Indicates that the terminal understands ReGIS
graphic commands.
SELECTERASE Indicates selective erase.
SESSIONS Indicates the terminal supports multiple
sessions.
SIXEL Indicates that the terminal is capable of
displaying SIXEL graphics.
SREGION Indicates scroll regions.
2-153
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
STATUSLINE Indicates that the terminal has an extra
status line in its video display.
TEKEMULATION Indicates TEK 4010/4014 terminal emulation.
UDKEYS Indicates that the terminal has
user-definable function keys.
USERWINDOWS Indicates the terminal supports user windows.
VLENGTH Indicates variable forms length.
VT52EMULATION Indicates VT52 terminal emulation.
VWIDTH Indicates variable forms width.
For more information about these terminal attributes, refer to
your terminal manuals.
Characteristics
Runs the INITIA program.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show the characteristics
and attributes of a generic terminal type:
.I TTY ATTRIB<RET>
RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:23 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
Job 20 User DOTY [27,10024]
TYPE:TTY MODEL:TTY CLASS:LT33 APC:HARDWIRED
ECHO:DEFER WIDTH:72 LENGTH:0 NOSTOP
FILL:1 NOLC NOTABS NOFORM
CRLF NOGAG SBELL NOTAPE
BLANKS ALTMOD NORTCOMP NOREMOTE
XONXOF NOUNPAUS NOESCAPE NOQUOTE
IDLEDI:0 EDITOR NOSLAVE
ANSLEVEL:0 DECLEVEL:0 NOEIGHTBIT NO8BITARCH
NODISPLAY NOOVERSTRIKE NOCOLOR NOSTATUSLINE
NOISO NONRC NODRCS NOUDKEYS
NOAVO NOPRINTERPORT NOIDCHAR NOIDLINE
NOREGIS NOSIXEL NOTEKEMULATION NOVT52EMULATION
NOSREGION NOHSCROLL NOVLENGTH NOVWIDTH
NOUSERWINDOWS NOBLOCKMODE NOGUARDEDAREA NOSELECTERASE
NOKATAKANA NOSESSIONS NODECTCS NOINTERROGATION
NOLOCATOR KEYBOARD
2-154
SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
Use the SET TTY TYPE command to set your terminal type.
.TTY TYPE VT240<RET>
Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show your new terminal
characteristics and attributes.
.I TTY ATTRIB<RET>
RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:40 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
Job 20 User DOTY [27,10024]
TYPE:VT240 MODEL:VT240 CLASS:VT200 APC:HARDWIRED
ECHO:DEFER WIDTH:80 LENGTH:24 NOSTOP
FILL:0 LC TABS NOFORM
CRLF NOGAG SBELL NOTAPE
BLANKS NOALTMOD NORTCOMP NOREMOTE
XONXOF NOUNPAUS NOESCAPE NOQUOTE
IDLEDI:0 EDITOR NOSLAVE
ANSLEVEL:2 DECLEVEL:2 NOEIGHTBIT 8BITARCH
DISPLAY NOOVERSTRIKE NOCOLOR NOSTATUSLINE
NOISO NRC DRCS UDKEYS
AVO PRINTERPORT IDCHAR IDLINE
REGIS SIXEL TEKEMULATION VT52EMULATION
SREGION NOHSCROLL NOVLENGTH VWIDTH
NOUSERWINDOWS NOBLOCKMODE NOGUARDEDAREA SELECTERASE
NOKATAKANA NOSESSIONS NODECTCS NOINTERROGATION
NOLOCATOR KEYBOARD
2-155
SYSTEM COMMANDS
JCONTINUE Command
JCONTINUE Command
Function
The JCONTINUE command forces the specified job to continue if the
job was in a CTRL/C state because of a device error.
Format
JCONTINUE n
Where: n is the number of the job to be continued. This
argument is required.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Examples
1. Continue job 44:
.JCONTINUE 44<RET>
.
2. Continue job 12:
.JCONT 12<RET>
.
2-156
SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Command
KJOB Command
Function
The KJOB command:
1. Stops all assigned I/O devices and returns them to the
system's pool of available devices.
2. Returns all allocated memory to the system's pool of
available memory.
3. Returns the job-number to the pool of available job-numbers.
4. Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
5. Prints run-time information for your job.
6. Completes all deferred spooling requests.
Format
KJOB/switch
KJOB can be abbreviated to K. KJOB accepts one or more of the
following switches. All switches can be preceded with NO (for
example, NOTEMP) to negate their functions.
Switch Function
/BATCH Deletes files only when you are over the
logged-out quota, then deletes enough files to be
below quota. The algorithm for determining which
files are deleted first is explained in detail
below.
/CLEAR Clears your terminal's display, if it has one and
if the monitor knows the terminal type.
/DISCONNECT Disconnects a terminal line when you log out.
This includes hanging up a dataset (modem), or
terminating a LAT connection, for example. This
switch may be abbreviated to /D. NODISCONNECT
maintains the connection with a terminal line
after logging you out.
2-157
SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Command
/HELP:key Prints information about KJOB on your terminal.
/HELP does not perform functions 1 through 4. The
keywords for /HELP are SWITCHES and TEXT. TEXT
prints the help file and is the default argument.
SWITCHES lists the KJOB switches and their
meanings.
/MESSAGE:key Tells the system which messages to print on your
terminal. NOMESSAGE supresses output of the
standard LOGOUT message but still prints error and
warning messages. The keywords for /MESSAGE are:
ADDRESS Prints out the address where the
message occurs.
CONTINUATION Prints out continuation text, if
any.
FIRST Prints out the first line of the
message.
PREFIX Prints out the six-character
message prefix.
/TEMP Searches your disk area and deletes all files with
.TMP extensions. TEMP is a default switch for
KJOB. Using the NOTEMP switch will log you out
faster.
KJOB/BATCH Algorithm
The KJOB/BATCH algorithm categorizes files in three groups,
according to their extensions:
o Expendable files have these extensions:
TMP, TEM, SFD, BAK, Q??, MAP, CRF, LSD, LSQ, LST, LIS, LPT,
PTP, PLT, CDP, Z??, FOO, LOG, BIN, DMP, FIN
o Important files have these extensions:
RNO, RND, RNH, CMD, KBD, CED, MCR, SNO, FAI, FOR, F4, MAC,
ALG, AID, BLI, B10, B11, COB, CBL, BAS, PAL, P11, SRC, IDA,
IDX, DAT, DBS, B16, B32, B36, REQ, R16, R36, PAS, INI
o Unimportant files have other extensions.
2-158
SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Command
Files are deleted in the following order until the user is under
quota:
1. Recompute disk usage and delete files that are too large.
The number of blocks used is recalculated by doing a wildcard
directory and adding up the total space used. Any files that
are larger than the logged-out quota are deleted.
2. Delete unprotected expendable files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the expendable list. If a match
is found and the protection code is less than or equal to
177, the file is deleted.
3. Delete unprotected unimportant files.
Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list and
that have a protection code less than or equal to 177 are
deleted.
4. Delete remaining expendable files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the expendable list. If a match
is found, the file is deleted, no matter how it is protected.
5. Delete unprotected important files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the important list. If a match
is found and the protection code is less than or equal to
177, the file is deleted.
Notice that the extensions toward the end of the important
list are considered to be more important than those toward
the beginning of the list.
6. Delete all unimportant files.
Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list are
deleted no matter what their protection codes.
7. Delete all files.
2-159
SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Command
Characteristics
Deassigns your terminal.
Stops all I/O devices that are assigned to your job.
Runs the LOGIN program.
Example
.K<RET>
JOB 99 User CUSTER,L. [27,4072]
Logged-off TTY64 at hh:mm:ss on dd-mmm-yy
Runtime: 0:00:05, KCS:44, Connect time: 0:31:23
Disk reads: 1534, Writes: 88, Blocks saved: 2510
.
2-160
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LABEL Command
LABEL Command
Function
The LABEL command writes an identifier onto a DECtape. The
identifier is stored on the tape itself and is printed when you
print a directory of the tape with the DIRECT command. You
should assign a unique label to each DECtape to avoid confusing
one tape with another. You must use the ASSIGN command to access
the tape before you can use LABEL.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
Format
LABEL dev: ^name^
Where: dev: is a physical or logical name that represents a
DECtape.
^ is the delimiter of the DECtape identifier. The
delimiter can also be quotes. If the identifier
consists entirely of alphanumeric characters, the
delimiters can be omitted.
name is a 1- to 6-character name to be used as the
identifier. Any characters can be used except the
delimiter.
Restriction
You must use the ASSIGN command to access the tape before you can
use LABEL.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
2-161
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LABEL Command
Examples
1. Identify DECtape 4, which has the logical name TIME:
.LABEL TIME ^2:00^<RET>
.
2. Identify DECtape 5 as NAME:
.LABEL DTA5: "NAME"<RET>
.
2-162
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LIST Command
LIST Command
Function
The LIST command prints one or more files on the line printer
(LPT:). The output goes either to the line printer immediately
or to the disk to be spooled to the line printer if the line
printer is being spooled for this job. (Refer to the QUEUE and
PRINT commands.) If the line printer is being spooled, the PRINT
command is preferred over the LIST command because it saves time
and disk accesses.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
Format
LIST file-spec
Where: file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications separated by commas. A file
specification consists of a device name, a file name
and extension, and a directory name. This argument is
required. When a directory name precedes the file
name, it becomes the default for all succeeding files.
Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in
parentheses in the LIST command string. When COMPIL
interprets the command string, it passes the switches
to PIP.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
2-163
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LIST Command
Example
Spool your line printer requests, print a file (FOR21.DAT) on the
line printer, and look at the line printer queue.
.SET SPOOL LPT:<RET>
.LIST FOR21.DAT<RET>
.PRI<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
JOB NAME REQ# LIMIT USER
*FOR21 61 12 MAROTTA[27,5434] ON UNIT:0
THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (1 IN PROGRESS)
.
2-164
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
LOAD Command
Function
The LOAD command translates the specified source files if
necessary, runs the loader, and loads the generated .REL files
into memory. The appropriate language compiler is determined by
the source file extension or by switches in the command string.
(Refer to the COMPILE command.) If a .REL file already exists
with a more recent date than that of the source file, compilation
is not performed (unless you request it using the /COMPILE
switch).
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running the appropriate language compiler and
linking loader.
The LOAD command generates a core image but does not begin
executing the program. After the LOAD command, you can START
your program or SAVE the core image for future execution.
Each time the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command is
executed, the system remembers the arguments and switches.
Therefore, if you issue one of these commands with no arguments,
the system uses the stored arguments.
The LOAD command accepts several command constructions: the @
construction (indirect commands), the + construction, the =
construction, and the < > construction. (Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.)
Format
LOAD file-spec,file-spec,...
Where: file-spec is one or more file specifications separated
by commas. A file specification consists of a device
name, a file name with or without an extension, and a
directory name. (Refer to Section 1.9.)
The following switches modify the command string.
Switch Function
/ALGOL Compiles the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files
with the extension of .ALG.
/BINARY Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file extension of the output file is .REL.
2-165
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
This is the default action.
2-166
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
/BLISS Compiles the file with BLISS-10. Assumed for
files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.
/C68 Runs the specified COBOL compiler.
/C74
/COBOL Compiles the file with COBOL. Assumed for files
with the extension of .CBL.
/COMPILE Compiles the file even if a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file.
This switch is used to obtain an extra
compilation (for example, to obtain a listing of
the compilation) because compilation is not
performed if the binary file is newer than the
source file.
/CREF Produces a cross-referenced listing file on the
disk for each file compiled, for later
processing by the CREF program. The file
extension of the output file is .CRF. The files
can then be listed with the CREF command.
However, with COBOL files the cross-referenced
listing is always appended to the listing file.
/DDT Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.
/DEBUG: Passes the specified arguments to FORTRAN.
(arg, arg,...) Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language
Manual.
/DLIST Produces a .LST file and stores it in your
directory. You can obtain a listing of the file
with the PRINT command.
/F10 Obsolete
/F40
/F66 Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and
EXTERNAL statements.
/FORDDT Loads the FORTRAN debugger with the program.
/FORTRAN Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4 and
.FOR and all files with nonstandard compiler
extensions. This switch is necessary if the
file has a nonstandard compiler extension and
FORTRAN is not the standard compiler or is not
the current default.
2-167
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
/FUDGE: Creates a disk file containing the names of the
file-spec .REL files produced by the command string. When
you give the FUDGE command, PIP reads this file
to generate a library REL file. (Refer to the
FUDGE command description.) The argument to the
switch is:
dev:file.ext[directory]
Where: dev: is the device on which to
write the file. If you omit the
device name, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext is the name of the library
file. The file name is required.
If you omit the extension, it is
assumed to be .REL.
[directory] is the directory in
which to place the file. Your
default directory number is assumed
if none is given.
This switch is permanent in that it pertains to
all .REL files generated by the command string.
/GFLOAT Indicates that double-precision numbers are to
be stored in G-floating format. This format has
an extended exponent range. This option is
available on KL10 processors only.
/K?10 Designates the machine on which the program will
execute once it has been loaded. The ? can be
replaced by L or S.
/LIBRARY Loads the files in library search mode. This
mode causes a program in a special library to be
loaded only if one or more of its declared entry
symbols satisfies an undefined global request in
the source file. The default libraries are
always searched. (Refer to the LINK
documentation.)
/LINK Obsolete
/LIST Generates a disk listing file for each file
compiled. The file extension of the output file
is .LST. These files can be listed later with
the PRINT command. If the line printer is being
spooled for this job, the files are
automatically printed. If you do not specify
this switch, listing files are not generated.
2-168
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
/LMAP Produces a loader map during the loading process
that contains the local symbols.
/MACRO Assembles the file with MACRO. Assumed for
files with extension of .MAC.
/MACY11 Assembles the file with MACY11. Assumed for
files with an extension of .P11. This switch is
not supported.
/MAP Produces a loader map during loading. After a
library search of the default libraries, the map
is written in your disk area with either the
file name you specify (for example, /MAP:file)
or with the default file name MAP.MAP. This
switch is an exception to the permanent switch
rule, because although it may be used as a
permanent switch, it causes only one map to be
produced.
/NEW Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental system library (device NEW:) area
[1,5]. If the compiler does not exist on device
NEW:, COMPIL tries to obtain it from device
SYS:. (Refer to Restriction.)
/NOBINARY Does not generate binary files. This switch,
when combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is
useful when compiling programs only to generate
listings.
/NOCOMPILE Does not force a compilation of a source file
whose date is not as recent as the date on the
binary file. Note that this switch is not the
same as the /REL switch, which turns off all
compilation, even if the source file is newer
than the .REL file. /NOCOMPILE is the default
action. Complement to the /COMPILE switch.
/NODEBUG Does not pass previously specified arguments to
FORTRAN.
/NOLIST Does not generate listing files. This is the
default action.
/NOOPTIMIZE Does not optimize the object source code of a
FORTRAN program.
2-169
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
/NOSEARCH Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not. Because this is
the default, this switch turns off library
search mode (/LIBRARY).
/OLD Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library of old programs (device OLD:)
that resides on the disk area [1,3]. If the
compiler does not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL
tries to obtain it from device SYS:. (Refer to
Restriction.)
/OPTIMIZE Optimizes the object source code of a FORTRAN
program.
/PAL10 Assembles the file with PAL10. Assumed for
files with the .PAL extension.
/PASCAL Compiles the file with Pascal. Assumed for
files with the .PAS extension.
/REL Uses the existing .REL files although a newer
source file might be present.
/SAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program.
/SEARCH Loads the files in library search mode. This
switch is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.
/SELF Runs the appropriate language compiler from
device DSK: instead of from the system library
(device SYS:). This switch is useful if you
keep a private copy of a compiler in your disk
area to test new features. (Refer to
Restriction.)
/SNOBOL Compiles the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for
files with an extension of .SNO. This switch is
not supported.
/SSAVE Saves the core image of the loaded program in a
sharable executable file.
/SYS Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library (device SYS:). This is the
default action.
2-170
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
Restrictions
Once a language compiler has been specified from a particular
area (for example, /SELF), it cannot be called from a different
area within the same command string. The following is illegal:
.LOAD ITEM.CBL/SYS,ITEM02.CBL/SELF
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE ITEM.CBL/SYS
.COMPILE ITEM02.CBL/SELF
.LOAD/REL ITEM,ITEM02
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the appropriate compiler or language compiler and LINK,
destroying your original core image.
Example
The following example shows how to LOAD and SAVE a program.
The DIRECTORY command shows all the files named TEST.
.DIR TEST.*
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5055]
LOAD the program. The monitor compiles and loads TEST.
.LOAD TEST.FOR
FORTRAN:TEST
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
Save the loaded program.
.SAVE TEST<RET>
TEST SAVED
A directory shows that the executable format has been saved in
your directory.
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5055]
TEST REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TEST EXE 160 <055> dd-mmm-yy 6(422)
TOTAL OF 162 BLOCKS IN 3 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5055]
.
2-171
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOCATE Command
LOCATE Command
Function
The LOCATE command changes the default device list of the job,
making devices at other ANF-10 nodes available to your job. For
example, if you want to use the devices at node FRATZ for your
job, you can issue the following command:
.LOCATE FRATZ
Thereafter, the default I/O devices used will be those on node
FRATZ. Note that terminal and disk I/O are not affected by this
command.
The LOCATE command does not change the location of your job; the
job runs on the node on which the job was started.
Format
LOCATE node-id
Where: node-id is the name or number of the ANF-10 node at
which you want I/O to be processed.
An argument of 0 locates your job at the node where the
job's command interpreter is. If you do not specify
the node-id, the default is your physical node/station.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Is valid only in networks or in systems with a remote station.
Does not destroy your core image.
Associated Messages
If the LOCATE succeeds, the system prints a message in the form:
NODE node-name (node-num) sys-id date LOCATED
Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is the number
of the node, sys-id is the system identification, and date is the
date the system was last reloaded.
2-172
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOCATE Command
If the node specified is not currently in communication with the
network, the following message is printed:
%NODE(x) LOCATED BUT OFF-LINE
The job is successfully LOCATEd, but the node is not presently
accessible.
Examples
1. You LOCATE the job at the node named LONDON, node number 3.
.LOCATE LONDON<RET>
NODE LONDON(3) RD020A KL10 SYS#1279 11-06-79 LOCATED
.
2. You attempt to LOCATE to a node that the monitor does not
recognize as part of the network. An error message is
printed and your location is not changed.
.LOCATE TOKYO<RET>
?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
.
2-173
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
LOGIN Command
Function
You use the LOGIN command to gain access to the system. The
LOGIN command runs the LOGIN program. LOGIN accepts:
o your project-programmer number (PPN) or your user name
o your password
o optional account and remark strings
You can obtain these from your system administrator. LOGIN can
accept a path specification (directory name) in place of the PPN.
To log in, type the LOGIN command, and press RETURN. LOGIN
prompts you with a pound sign (#). Type your project-programmer
number or your user name, and press RETURN. You can also type
your project-programmer number or your user name immediately
after typing LOGIN, followed by a space. After it receives this
information, LOGIN prints another prompt (PASSWORD:) on your
terminal. Type your password, and press RETURN. The password
does not echo on your terminal. You are finished logging in when
the monitor prompt (a period) is returned.
Your system may be running account validation software. In this
case, LOGIN may not be complete after you type your password. If
your job requires an account string, LOGIN prompts you for your
account (ACCOUNT:). Type your account string, and then press
RETURN, or just press RETURN if the system administrator has
established a default account for your job. If your job requires
a remark string, LOGIN prompts for it (REMARK:). Here you can
type anything that will identify your job. Your remark can be up
to 39 characters. If you do not have a remark, press RETURN.
The system records spaces for your remark. Example 3 shows the
procedure for logging in with account validation software.
NOTE
When the account string is validated, characters
are checked according to case. Therefore, you
must type your account in the same case
(uppercase or lowercase) as it is required. This
aspect of the system can be changed by the system
administrator.
2-174
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
You can put your account string and remark in your SWITCH.INI
file. See Appendix B for further information.
To specify a default path for disk I/O, type the path
specification instead of your project-programmer number. A path
specification more specifically identifies your directory area.
It specifies either a user-file directory or a sub-file
directory. Refer to Section 1.14 of this manual for more
information about path specifications.
If you have detached your terminal from a job, and begin to log
in to another job, the LOGIN program asks if you want to attach
to the old job or create a new job. For information about
detaching and attaching jobs, see the ATTACH and DETACH commands.
Example 2 shows the procedure for logging in to a new job after
detaching the first.
Format
LOGIN identification/switches
Where: identification represents either your
project-programmer number (PPN), path specification
([directory]), or your user name.
You can type a path specification in place of the PPN or user
name. This allows you to establish a default directory path for
the job. The path specification is either a user-file directory
or a sub-file directory. Directory paths are enclosed in
brackets (for example: [27,5434,SFD]).
The following switches modify the command string. These switches
can be included in your SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI files are
discussed in Appendix B.
Most parameters set by these switches can be changed by monitor
commands after you log in. (Refer to the SET commands and the
SETSRC program description in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.)
2-175
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
Switch Function
/ACCOUNT:"string" Specifies the account string for your job.
If the account string contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, you must enclose
the string in quotation marks. This switch
is often included in a SWITCH.INI file.
/ASSIGN: Assigns a device to your job and a logical
(dev1:log1, name to the device.
dev2:log2...)
dev: is the device name
log is the logical name
See Section 1.9.1 for more information about
device names.
The logical name is optional. This switch
can be used more than once to assign more
than one device.
/ATTACH:argument Sets the ATTACH state for the LOGIN dialog
and the job being created. /ATTACH:ASK is
the default action. By default, if a
detached job exists with the specified PPN,
and the job was logged in with /ATTACH:ASK,
LOGIN asks whether you want to attach to the
detached job, instead of creating a new job
with the same PPN. The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch
suppresses the default action of the
/ATTACH:ASK switch. Jobs you create with the
IGNORE argument will be ignored by LOGIN when
you do additional logins with the same PPN.
LOGIN will not ask you if you want to attach
to jobs set to the IGNORE argument.
| /BATCH: Sets the batch parameters. Used by BATCON
| (arg:n, arg:n) only). Multiple keywords can be given to the
| /BATCH switch; in that case, they must be
| enclosed in parentheses and separated with
| commas. Arguments and their meanings are as
| follows:
|
| Argument Meaning
|
| INTERVENTION Specifies whether the batch
| NOINTERVENTION job requires operator
| intervention to run.
|
| NAME:"name" Sets the batch job name to
| "name".
2-176
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
| SEQUENCE:n Sets the batch sequence number
| to "n".
|
| STREAM:n Sets the batch stream number
| to "n".
|
| REQUESTID:n Sets the batch request number
| to "n".
/CORE:nx Informs the system of the maximum amount of
core memory that your job can use. The value
for x must be either P or K. P represents
pages of memory (each page is equivalent to
512 words); K represents blocks of 1024
words. The value n is any decimal number.
Refer to the CORE command for further
information.
2-177
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/DEFAULT: Specifies job characteristics. Multiple
(arg:n, arg:n) keywords can be given to the /DEFAULT switch;
in that case, they must be enclosed in
parentheses and separated with commas.
Arguments and their meanings are as follows:
Argument Meaning
BIGBUF:n Sets the default BIGBUF buffer
size for disk to n blocks.
Refer to SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
command.
BUFFERS:n Sets the default number of
disk buffers to n. Refer to
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command.
PROTECTION:n Sets the default file
protection for your job to n.
Refer to SET DEFAULT
PROTECTION command.
/DEFER Defers queueing of spooled output until you
log out.
/DSKFUL:arg Sets the action to be performed if your job
exceeds the disk area allowed to it. The
arguments are ERROR and PAUSE. If the
argument is ERROR, an error condition is
passed to your job. This usually terminates
the program. If the argument is PAUSE, the
program is suspended, and your job is
returned to monitor level. This allows you
to request operator assistance and then
continue the job, as long as you do not issue
any commands that destroy your core image.
Refer to the SET DSKFUL command.
/DSKPRI:n Allows privileged users to set the priority
for their job's disk operations (data
transfers and head positionings). The value
can range from -3 to +3. The default
timesharing priority is 0. Refer to the SET
DSKPRI command.
/GUIDELINE Specifies that the numeric value cited in the
/PHYSICAL switch is a guideline. This is the
default setting for /PHYSICAL.
2-178
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/HELP:keyword Prints HELP text on your terminal. Valid
keywords are: ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
The ARGUMENTS keyword prints out a list of
valid switches and arguments. SWITCHES
displays only a list of switches. TEXT will
print the entire HELP text. TEXT is assumed
if no keyword is supplied. /HELP may be
abbreviated to /H.
/LIB:[ppn] Sets the library area (LIB:) to the specified
PPN.
/LIMIT Specifies that the numeric value specified in
the /PHYSICAL switch is a limit rather than a
guideline. If /LIMIT is not issued, the
system assumes that the numeric value given
for the /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.
/LOCATE:node Sets the job location to the specified octal
ANF node number. Refer to the LOCATE
command.
/MAILCHECK Checks the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to see if you
have mail from the MS mail system. You must
have DECMAIL/MS on your system. /MAILCHECK
is the default action.
/NAME:"name" Associates the given name with your job.
This name will appear on output, listings,
and on other information output by the
system. Enclose the name in quotation marks
if it contains non-alphanumeric characters.
/NEW /NEW causes NEW:([1,5]) to be searched before
SYS:([1,4]) whenever SYS: is specified or
implied. If the files are not on NEW:, SYS:
will be searched. (See Section 1.13 for more
information about NEW:.)
/NODEFER Does not defer queued output until logout.
Refer to the SET DEFER command. This is the
default.
/NOMAILCHECK Suppresses checking the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to
see if you have mail from the MS mail system.
/NONEW Removes the [1,5] directory (NEW:) from your
SYS: specification. This is the default
setting.
2-179
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/NOSCAN Cancels the /SCAN switch for the directory
path. When scanning is set, the system
searches for files through the entire
directory path. Directory paths are
described in Section 1.14. This switch
disables scanning. Thus, the system will not
search for files past the specified directory
area. (Refer to the SETSRC program
description in the TOPS-10 User Utilities
Manual.) /NOSCAN is the default switch.
/NOSETTTY Instructs the system not to change any of
your terminal's characteristics as specified
in your SWITCH.INI file. The default action
is that LOGIN reads SWITCH.INI, setting
terminal characteristics according to
switches specified in the LOGIN line. Refer
to Appendix B for more information about
SWITCH.INI files.
/NOSFDCREATE Does not create an SFD that was specified as
the directory path.
/NOSTR Suppresses the printing of SYS:STR.TXT.
/NOSYS Removes the SYS: structure from your
DSKspecification, which is your job's search
list. Refer to Section 1.12.
/NOTE:file-spec Prints the specified file after you log in.
The file specification must be included; it
may contain wild-cards. This switch is
useful for printing a project notice file
that is kept in a library area. Refer to
/NOTICE.
/NOTICE:arg Controls printing of SYS:NOTICE.TXT and the
argument to the /NOTE switch. The arguments
for /NOTICE are:
ALWAYS Always prints notices.
SOMETIMES Prints notices you have not
yet seen. SOMETIMES is the
default argument.
NEVER Never prints notices.
/NOWATCH Suppresses the printing of incremental job
statistics. Refer to the SET WATCH command.
2-180
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/PASSWORD Allows you to change your password during the
LOGIN procedure. Type in your current
password at the Password: prompt. Then type
in your new password when the monitor prompts
you, and verify it. Your password will then
be changed. This switch is ignored under
batch. The system manager may, at times, set
/PASSWORD on your account, so that when you
log in, you will have to change your
password.
/PATH:[dir] Specifies a default path for disk I/O. Refer
to Section 1.14 for further information.
/PHYSICAL:nx Sets the maximum physical page limit of your
job. The value n is any decimal number. The
value x is either K (for 1024-word blocks) or
P (for 512-word pages). You can use either
/LIMIT or /GUIDELINE with the /PHYSICAL
switch. The default is /GUIDELINE. Refer to
the SET PHYSICAL command.
/QUOTA: Recomputes the disk quota for the specified
(str1,str2,...) structures. If you specify more than one
ALL structure, you must separate the structure
DSK names with commas, and enclose the list in
parentheses. However, if you specify only
one structure, the parentheses are not
required. If you specify no structures, all
the structures in your job's search list are
assumed. Instead of (str1,str2,...), you can
use ALL or DSK. ALL expands to all
structures in the system. DSK expands to all
structures in your search list.
/REMARK:"text" Specifies a remark string for your job. If
you include non-alphanumeric characters in
the remark, you must enclose the remark in
quotation marks.
/RUN:file-spec Runs the specified program immediately after
LOGIN, unless another program has been
designated by the system manager.
/SCAN Sets the /SCAN switch for the directory path.
When /SCAN is specified, scanning is enabled
for the directory path. Scanning allows
searches to be made through the complete
path. If scanning is disabled, only the
first directory is searched. (Refer to the
SETSRC program.)
2-181
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/SETTTY Sets your terminal characteristics as
specified in the file SWITCH.INI. This is
the default function. Refer to Appendix B
for more information.
/SFDCREATE Automatically creates an SFD on the
structure, if the SFD was specified as the
directory path, and if the SFD does not
already exist. This is the default.
/SFDPROT:nnn Sets the protection of all created SFDs to
nnn.
/SPOOL:dev or Adds the specified device(s) to the current
/SPOOL:(dev1,...) list of those spooled for the job. Spooling
or is the mechanism by which I/O to or from
/SPOOL:ALL slow-speed devices is simulated on disk.
Data temporarily stored on disk can be
automatically output on the specified device
when it becomes available. These devices can
be spooled: the line printer (LPT:), the
card punch (CDP:), the card reader (CDR:),
the paper-tape punch (PTP:), and the plotter
(PLT:).
/STR Causes all files in the standard system
library [1,4] with name ???STR.TXT to be
printed on your terminal. Assume, for
example, that there is a file on private
structure "PR:" called PRLSTR.TXT[1,4] which
says: "PR:PAYROLL DEBUG PACK -- NOT REAL
DATA". Any user who logged in with /STR (or
had /STR in his SWITCH.INI file) would have
the warning message printed on his terminal.
/SYS Adds the SYS: structure to your DSK:
specification. Consequently, if a file is
not found in the directories in your search
list or in your library directory (if /LIB:
[proj,prog] has been specified), the system
directory [1,4] will then be searched for the
file.
2-182
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
/TERMINAL: Sets the terminal characteristics
(arg,arg,...) specified by the arguments.This switch is
useful for recording terminal characteristics
in your SWITCH.INI file. Refer to Appendix B
for information about the SWITCH.INI file.
To specify a single argument, type it after
the colon. To specify two or more arguments,
enclose them in parentheses and separate them
with commas.
The arguments to the /TERMINAL switch and
their meanings are listed after the
description of the switches. All of the
arguments except those which take values can
be preceded by NO to turn off the function of
the argument.
/TIME:n Sets a central processor time limit of n
seconds for a job. When the time limit is
reached, the system stops the job and prints
a message. A timesharing job can be
continued by typing CONTINUE, but unless the
time is reset with the SET TIME command, no
time limit will be in effect. A batch job
cannot be continued.
/UFDPROT:nnn Sets the protection of all created UFDs to
nnn.
/VIRTUAL:n Specifies the current virtual page limit, as
represented by n. (For a description of
CVPL, see the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
Manual.) In /VIRTUAL:nK and :nP, K
represents a block, and P a page; 1K equals
1024 words, and 1P equals 512 words. If you
type neither letter, K is assumed. K can be
specified within the range 1 to 512P. If you
type /VIRTUAL:0, the value of CVPL, as set by
the system administrator, is used.
/WATCH:ALL or Duplicates the SET WATCH command, printing
/WATCH (arg,arg...) messages automatically according to the
argument. See the SET WATCH command
description for a list of arguments and their
uses.
2-183
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
Arguments to /TERMINAL
Argument Meaning
ALTMODE Converts the ASCII characters 175 and 176 to
NOALTMODE ALTmode (ESCape). If you use NOALTMODE, 175
and 176 regain their original identity as
right brace (]) and tilde (~). The default
setting is NOALTMODE.
BLANKS Prints blank lines during output to the
NOBLANKS terminal. NOBLANKS is often used on a
display terminal to conserve space on the
screen. The default setting is BLANKS.
CRLF Prints an automatic carriage-return/line-feed
NOCRLF at the end of each line. The width of this
line is set with WIDTH. NOCRLF suppresses
the automatic carriage-return/line-feed. The
default is CRLF.
DEBREAK No longer supported.
NODEBREAK
DEFER Suppresses echoing of the characters you type
NODEFER until output to the terminal is finished.
For example, when the system is sending
output to your terminal and you type another
command, the system will echo the characters
as it is printing output on your terminal.
DEFER holds the characters you type until the
output is finished. NODEFER is the default
setting. For video terminals, it is
recommended that you set DEFER.
DISPLAY Informs the system that you have a display
NODISPLAY terminal. Your programs can use this
information when sending output to your
terminal. NO DISPLAY turns off the DISPLAY
function.
ECHO Prints the characters you type on your
NOECHO terminal. This puts your terminal in full
duplex mode. NOECHO puts your terminal in
half duplex mode. That is, the characters
you type are not printed on your terminal.
FILL:n Controls the filler class of the terminal.
NOFILL This effects the output of filler characters.
NOFILL is the equivalent to FILL:0.
2-184
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
FORM Sends eight line-feeds for every FORM
NOFORM character, and four line-feeds for each
vertical tab. NOFORM does not send the
line-feeds.
GAG Suppresses any messages sent by the SEND
NOGAG command when your job is in user mode. This
does not affect messages from the operator.
NOGAG allows you to receive messages at any
stage of your job.
LC Allows the system to print lowercase
NOLC characters on your terminal when echoing
characters from your terminal. This argument
is used on terminals that have lowercase
ability but are not printing lowercase
characters. NOLC makes the system translate
all input characters to uppercase as they are
transmitted.
LENGTH:n Sets the terminal page length to n lines.
RCVSPEED:nnnn Sets the speed at which your terminal will
receive characters to n baud.
RTCOMP Controls the function of CTRL/R and CTRL/T.
NORTCOMP NORTCOMP makes the control characters
function as they are described in Section
1.6. RTCOMP prevents them from functioning
this way, which is useful when you plan to
run a program that uses CTRL/R and CTRL/T for
other purposes.
SBELL Rings the bell when output is stopped
NOSBELL automatically by the system. NOSBELL
suppresses the terminal bell when output is
stopped automatically by the system.
SPEED:nnnn Sets the receiving and transmitting speed of
your terminal to n baud.
SSTOP:n Sets the terminal to stop output after n
lines, where n is page length, ignoring
intermittent <CTRL/Q>s.
STOP:n Sets the terminal to stop output after n
lines, where n is page length.
2-185
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
TABS Informs the system that your terminal has
NOTABS tab stops. NOTABS informs the system that
your terminal does not have tab stops. The
system will then simulate tab stops for your
terminal.
TAPE Informs the system that your terminal has
NOTAPE paper tape output. This changes the function
of CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to control the paper
tape. NOTAPE restores the function of CTRL/S
and CTRL/Q. Refer to Section 1.6.
TIDY No longer supported.
NOTIDY
TYPE:nnnn Specifies the type of terminal. This informs
the system that your terminal is of the type
nnnn. This sets some characteristics
automatically. For a complete list of
supported terminal types, type:
HELP *
A portion of the information returned is a
list of terminal types supported by the
monitor.
UC Tells the system to translate all the
NOUC characters that it receives from your
terminal to upper case. NOUC does not
translate the characters.
WIDTH:n Sets the width of the terminal screen to n.
Used in conjunction with CRLF, this controls
the automatic RETURNs that are output at
monitor level.
XMTSPEED:n Sets the speed at which your terminal will
send characters to n baud.
XONXOF Allows you to use CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to
NOXONXOF control the output to your terminal.
NOXONXOF prevents the system from stopping
terminal output automatically.
Characteristics
Returns your terminal to monitor level or starts a program if
specified in ACTDAE.SYS.
2-186
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
Associated Messages
If you are already logged in when you issue the LOGIN command,
the monitor prints:
?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH
If the system is running the maximum number of jobs it can
handle, you will not be able to log in. When you issue a LOGIN
command, you will receive the message:
?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED
In this event, wait a few minutes, then try again.
Examples
1. To gain access to the system, log in with your user name as
follows:
.LOGIN MCWILLIAMS
JOB 42 RZ373B KL#1026/1042 TTY363
If you do not type your project-programmer number or your
user name on the same line as the LOGIN command, LOGIN
prompts you for that information with a number sign (#).
.LOGIN<RET>
JOB 29 RZ373B KL #1026/1042 TTY220
#10,6073<RET>
LOGIN prints your assigned job number (job number 29),
followed by monitor name, version number, and terminal
number.
PASSWORD:<RET>
The system prompts you for your password. You type your
password followed by a carriage-return. To maintain password
security, the monitor does not echo your password. On
terminals with local-copy (see the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
Manual), a mask is printed to make your password unreadable.
[LGNLAS Last access to [10,6073] succeeded on
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON
.
2-187
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
If your entries are correct, the system responds with a
message indicating when the last attempt to login to your
account was, and whether it was successful time, date, day of
the week, the message of the day (if any), and a period,
indicating readiness to accept another command.
2. The following example illustrates the process of detaching a
job, logging in a second job, detaching the second job and
logging in a third job. First, detach the job that is
currently running:
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 52
Then log in again:
.LOGIN 27,5434<RET>
JOB 54 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
DO YOU WANT TO ATTACH TO THIS JOB? [Y] NO<RET>
[LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52]
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON
When you log in, if you have a detached job (logged in with
/ATTACH:ASK), LOGIN prompts you whether you want to log in a
new job or attach to the existing job. (To suppress this
function, use the /ATTACH:IGNORE switch when you log in.) To
log in a new job at this point, type NO and press RETURN. If
you type YES or just press RETURN, your terminal will be
attached to the existing job.
Detaching a job is useful when you are running a program you
expect to run for a long time. If you want to allow such a
program to run, while you start another job, use the
CCONTINUE command. For example, start a DIRECTORY search of
SYS:
.DIRECT EXEVER.SYS=SYS:*.EXE/PRVERSION<RET>
^C
^C
.CCONTINUE<RET>
The DIRECT program continues to search for files in SYS:
with the extension .EXE, and stores them in EXEVER.SYS.
Meanwhile, you can log in a third job.
2-188
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
To log in a third job, first detach the second:
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 54
Log in:
.LOGIN 27,5434/ATTACH:IGNORE<RET>
JOB 55 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
[LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52,54]
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON
.
The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch was used here to suppress the
question about existing detached jobs. To log in a new job,
as here, press RETURN.
When the DIRECT program is finished running (as may be seen
using SYSDPY), you may want to attach back to job 54. In
this case, detach the current job, or log out:
.K<RET>
[LGTOUL OTHER USERS LOGGED-IN UNDER [27,5434], JOBS:52,54]
JOB 55 USER MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
LOGGED-OFF TTY64 AT hh:mm:ss ON dd-mmm-yy
RUNTIME: 0:05:33, KCS:64, CONNECT TIME: 1:45:20
DISK READS: 1534, WRITES: 105, BLOCKS SAVED: 2513
Then log in again:
.LOGIN 27,5434
JOB 36 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
JOB 54 DIRECT RUNNING
TYPE JOB NUMBER TO ATTACH OR CARRIAGE-RETURN TO LOGIN
NEW JOB:54<RET>
.ATTACH 54[27,5434]
[LGNATJ ATTACHING TO JOB 52 IN USER MODE]
TOTAL OF 344 FILES
.
2-189
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
LOGIN prints a message after attaching to the running job.
This message informs you that the job is in the process of
running. Then DIRECTORY prints a message showing the total
number of files found.
2-190
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MAIL Command
MAIL Command
Function
The MAIL command starts up a program to send, receive, and store
messages to and from other users. For complete details, see the
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual.
Format
MAIL
Characteristics
Runs the MS program.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.
Places your terminal at user level.
Example
Start up MS, then exit.
.MAIL<RET>
MS>EXIT<RET>
.
2-191
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MAKE Command
MAKE Command
Function
The MAKE command creates a new file on the disk with TECO (Text
Editor and Corrector). If a file already exists with the same
name, the system prints a warning message. If you continue
despite this warning, the system program supersedes the file. If
you type two CTRL/Cs to leave TECO, the program does not destroy
the file. (See the TECO manual in the TOPS-10 Software
Notebooks.)
Format
MAKE dev:file.ext[directory]
Where: dev: is the device or file structure name on which the
system creates the file. If you omit it, the system
assumes DSK:.
file.ext is any legal file name and file name
extension. The file name is required; the file name
extension is optional.
[directory] is the directory area in which the system
creates the file. If you omit this argument, the
system assumes your default directory area (that is,
your project-programmer number). Note that the default
directory can be an SFD or a UFD.
You can pass switches to TECO if you precede each switch with a
slash in the MAKE command string.
Characteristics
Place your terminal at user level.
Destroys your core image.
2-192
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MAKE Command
Example
Create a file named TEXT3.MAI.
.MAKE TEXT3.MAI<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Exit from TECO.
Use DIRECTORY to see the file.
.DIR TEXT3<RET>
TEXT3 MAI 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:[27,5434]
.
2-193
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MERGE Command
MERGE Command
Function
The MERGE command combines the low segment of an executable
program in the specified file with the program that is currently
in memory. The MERGE command, like the GET command, does not
start execution of the program. MERGE is used to load page fault
handlers and DDT.
Format
MERGE dev:file.ext[directory] /switch
Where: dev: is the logical or name of the device containing
the program you want to merge into core. The default
device is DSK:.
file.ext is the name of the file containing the program
you want to merge into core. You must specify the file
name. The file extension defaults to .EXE.
[directory] is the directory name, required only if the
core image file is located in a disk area other than
yours. The default is the directory area that you
logged in to.
/switch is the following option:
/USE:n Specifies the octal section number, (n), into
which a program is merged. Valid section
numbers are 0-37, octal.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Requires LOGIN.
Changes your core image.
2-194
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MERGE Command
Example
Type two programs.
.TY FIRST.MAC<RET>
FIRST: RESET
JRST 700000
END FIRST
.TY SECOND.MAC<RET>
.PSECT FOO,700000
SECOND: OUTSTR [ASCIZ/
EXECUTION AT 700000
/]
EXIT
END
Compile the programs.
.COMPILE FIRST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: .MAIN
EXIT
.COMPILE SECOND.MAC<RET>
MACRO: .MAIN
EXIT
Run LINK and save the files.
.R LINK<RET>
*FIRST/SAVE=FIRST/GO<RET>
EXIT
.R LINK<RET>
*SECOND/SAVE=SECOND/GO<RET>
EXIT
Use GET to bring the first program into memory.
.GET FIRST<RET>
JOB SETUP
2-195
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MERGE Command
Use MERGE to bring the second program into memory.
.MERGE SECOND<RET>
SECOND MERGED
Start execution of the programs.
.START<RET>
EXECUTION AT 700000
EXIT
After a successful execution, examine the memory area. Note that
address 777 is occupied.
.E 777<RET>
000777/ 000000 000000 .
Address 1000 does not exist.
.E 1000<RET>
?OUT OF BOUNDS
Address 700000 is occupied.
.E 700000<RET>
700000/ 051140 700002 .
Address 701000 does not exist.
.E 701000<RET>
?OUT OF BOUNDS
.
2-196
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MIC Commands
MIC Commands
Function
MIC allows you to create a new command by writing any desired
sequence of monitor-mode and user-mode commands in a disk file.
MIC commands are discussed in the file DOC:MICV2.DOC, on the
system. MIC is not a supported product.
You may include any of the following commands in your MIC command
file, along with any number of monitor commands.
Commands
BACKTO Specifies a 1- to 6- character label at which MIC
processing is to resume. Note that labels in MIC
command files are terminated by :: and must be at the
beginning of a line.
ERROR/ Specifies a character that is used to denote an error
NOERROR condition when displayed at the beginning of a line.
GOTO Specifies a 1- to 6- character label at which MIC
processing is to resume. Note that labels in MIC
command files are terminated by :: and must be at the
beginning of a line.
IF Conditionally processes a monitor command.
LET Allows you to change the value of any user parameters
in a MIC file. For example, LET C= "THIS IS C"
substitutes the text within double quotes as the value
of C.
MIC Arg Allows you to ABORT, SUSPEND, CANCEL, RETURN, or EXIT
from MIC processing.
OPERATOR/ Specifies one ASCII character to be treated as
NOOPERATOR introducing a line that requires user attention. For
example, if the operator character is output in column
1, MIC suspends output and displays [BREAK]. After
this, type the requested information. Then type
CTRL/P (PROCEED), which will continue the processing
of the command file.
2-197
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MIC Commands
SILENCE/ Suppresses and resumes output to the terminal.
REVIVE You can type another monitor command on the same line
as the SILENCE/REVIVE command. For example,
.REVIVE.DIR<RET>
causes terminal output to be revived after the .DIR
command has been typed. Therefore, only the output
from the .DIR command will be printed on the terminal.
WHENEVER/ Changes the default action whenever a particular
ON action or event occurs. ON and WHENEVER are
equivalent commands.
Example
;A MIC DEMO OF THE ERROR COMMAND
;A MACRO TO COMPARE TWO FILES AND DELETE DSK COPY IF THEY
;ARE THE SAME
.
.TYPE CHECK.MIC<RET>
.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q='A.'B<RET>
.DELETE 'A<RET>
.
;A TYPICAL CALL - CHECK IF DSK:C.MIC IS A COPY OF SYS:C.MIC
.DIRECT/CHECK C.MIC.SYS:<RET>
.
.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED
*C
.DELETE C.MIC<RET>
FILES DELETED
C.MIC
01 BLOCKS FREED
;CREATE AN INCORRECT COPY OF C.MIC WITH PIP.
.R PIP<RET>
2-198
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MIC Commands
*C.MIC=TTY:
WRONG FILE
^Z
*^C
;AND USE C.MIC TO CHECK IT
.DO CHECK C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
.
.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
FILE 1) DSK:C.MIC CREATED: 1349 dd-mmm-yyyy
FILE 2) SYS:C.MIC CREATED: 1202 dd-mmm-yyyy
?FILES ARE DIFFERENT
*[ABORT ON ERROR]
^C
.
2-199
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
MOUNT Command
Function
The MOUNT command requests ownership of a device. Because MOUNT
calls for action by the operator, the command is not complete
(the monitor prompt is not printed on your terminal) until the
operator has mounted the device. If more than one volume in the
volume set must be mounted at one time, the system ensures that
the resources will be available. Volumes that must be mounted
sequentially, such as tape volume sets, will be mounted
automatically. Therefore, you use MOUNT only once for each
volume set.
Resources are pre-allocated to a job using the ALLOCATE command.
This informs the system of your future need for a resource. If
you use the MOUNT command without previously using the ALLOCATE
command for the same resource, MOUNT allocates the resource as
well as mounting it. Note, however, that the implicit MOUNT
allocation is cancelled when you use DISMOUNT. An explicitly
allocated resource remains your property until you use DEALLOCATE
to relinquish it.
You can use MOUNT to assign a logical name to a resource. A tape
volume set must always have a logical name. Therefore, if you do
not assign a logical name when you allocate or mount a tape
volume set, the system uses the first six alphanumeric
characters, or up to the first non-alphanumeric character, as the
default logical name.
Format
MOUNT resource:log-name/switch/switch...
Where: resource is one of the following:
o Disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.
o Tape volume set and identifiers, such as
PAY-WK4:(PM34,PM35), where PAY-WK4 is the name of
the volume set, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the
names of each tape in the volume set.
o A logical name that was previously associated with
a resource.
o A physical device name.
2-200
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
Note that a tape mount request must include a volume
identification. This is accomplished by including the
volume identifier in the resource name, or by using the
/SCRATCH, /VOLID or /REELID switch in the command line.
log-name is the logical name you assign to the device
that you will use. The logical name can be up to 6
alphanumeric characters. The logical name is optional.
Disk volume sets do not require a logical name, but you
can assign one. Tape volume sets must have a logical
name. If you do not assign a logical name to a tape
volume set, the default logical name will be derived
from the volume set name, using the first six
characters, or up to the first non-alphanumeric
character.
If you assigned a logical name to the resource by using the
ALLOCATE command, you can mount the device by typing:
MOUNT log-name/switch/switch...
Any switches that you specified in a previous ALLOCATE command,
using the same resource name, become effective when you MOUNT the
resource. However, you cannot specify any switches with MOUNT to
change the switches you specified in the ALLOCATE command. Also,
you cannot specify any further switches with the MOUNT command,
except for non-status-setting switches such as /REMARK. This is
because defaults are assumed when the request is ALLOCATEd.
NOTE
To MOUNT more than one device at a time, separate
the volume set identifications with a comma (,).
You can obtain a list of all the requests in the mount queue by
typing MOUNT with no arguments or switches.
The following is a list of the switches you can use with MOUNT.
Some switches apply to both tape and disk volume sets, other
switches apply to one or the other. The center column indicates
the kind of volume set the switch applies to.
2-201
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
Switch Device Function
/ACTIVE Disk Requests that the volume set be placed
in your job's active search list. (See
the SETSRC program description in the
TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.) The
structure will become part of the list
that the system automatically uses to
search for a file. This is the default
function. This switch is the complement
to /PASSIVE.
/CHECK Tape Prints on your terminal a list of the
Disk mount requests made by your job.
/CREATE Disk Allows files to be created on the
structure. This switch is the
complement /NOCREATE. This switch
implies the /ACTIVE switch.
/DENSITY:n-BPI Tape Specifies the recording density
(bits-per-inch) of the volume set. The
argument (n) can be: 200, 556, 800,
1600, or 6250. The -BPI portion of the
value is optional.
/DISK Disk Identifies the volume set as a disk
volume set.
/EXCLUSIVE Disk Ensures that you will have exclusive
access to the volume set. No other
users will be allowed to access the
resource. You must have the same
project number as the owner of the
volume set.
/HELP Tape Prints a brief description of the
Disk MOUNT command.
2-202
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
/LABEL-TYPE: Tape Specifies the kind of label processing
arg to be used and indicates the label
status of the tape. The label type is
used to ensure that the correct tape has
been mounted. The arguments and their
meanings are:
ANSI The label is formatted
according to ANSI standards.
BLP The tape may or may not have
BYPASS labels, but it is treated as
if it were unlabeled. This
argument can only be used by
privileged users.
EBCDIC The label is formatted
IBM in EBCDIC
NOLABELS The tape does not have a
NONE standard label. You will not
UNLABELED be informed when the
end-of-tape is reached.
USER-EOT The tape does not have
standard labels. However, it
may have user labels. When
the end-of-tape is reached,
the user is notified. This is
useful for programs such as
BACKUP.
/NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape Specifies that a new volume set is going
to be created. The operator will choose
a new tape or tapes for you. This
switch implies /WRITE-ENABLE.
/NOCREATE Disk Prevents the creation of files on this
volume set unless you specify the volume
set when you write the files. This
switch is the complement to /CREATE and
it implies /ACTIVE.
/NONOTIFY Tape Does not notify you when your request is
Disk finished. This is the default function.
2-203
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
/NOTIFY Tape Sets the system to inform you when the
Disk resource is mounted or dismounted. The
system sends a message to your terminal
when any of the following occurs:
o The resource is physically mounted.
o The resource is dismounted by the
operator without a request by your
job.
o Another volume in a tape volume set
is mounted.
o The disk structure is locked or
unlocked by the operator.
/NOWAIT Tape Allows you to continue working on the
Disk system before the resource is mounted.
This switch implies /NOTIFY and it is
the complement to /WAIT.
/PASSIVE Disk Requests that the structure be placed in
your job's passive search list. (See
the SETSRC program.) The system will not
search for files on this structure
unless you specify the structure name in
the file specification. This switch is
the complement to /ACTIVE.
/QUOTA Disk Recomputes the usage quota on the
specified structure.
/READ-ONLY Tape Specifies that you will not write on the
Disk volume set. Tape volume sets will be
checked as they are mounted, to ensure
that they are not write-enabled. This
is the default for tape volume sets.
On disk volume sets, the monitor will
not update access dates. If you specify
/EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY, the operator
may write-protect the volume set.
This switch supersedes /RONLY, /WLOCK,
and /WRITE:NO.
2-204
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
/REMARK:"text" Tape Allows you to send a message to the
Disk operator identifying the volume to be
mounted. The argument (text) can be up
to 50 characters long. Use quotation
marks if the text contains spaces or
punctuation.
/SCRATCH Tape Instructs the operator to mount a
scratch tape. The operator will select
a tape that is blank, with the intention
of keeping the tape when you are
finished with it. This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.
/SHARABLE Disk Allows other users to access the
resource. This is the default function.
This switch is the complement to
/EXCLUSIVE.
/TAPE Tape Specifies that the volume set is a tape
volume set. This switch is required
when the volume set has the same name as
a cataloged disk volume set.
/TRACKS:n Tape Specifies the number of tracks on the
tape. The value of n can be 7 or 9.
/USER:[ppn] Tape Prints on your terminal a list of all
Disk requests for a particular user.
/VOLID:volid Tape Identifies the volumes in a tape volume
set. This switch can be used only if
the volid-list was not specified
previously. If the volume set is
comprised of more than one volume, the
volids should be separated by commas,
and the volid-list should be enclosed in
parentheses. This switch supersedes
/REELID.
/WAIT Tape Ensures that the volume set will be
Disk mounted before you continue working on
the system. This is the default
function. This switch is the complement
to /NOWAIT.
/WRITE-ENABLE Tape Ensures that you can write on the
Disk volume set. For tape, the monitor
checks each volume as it is mounted, to
be sure that it is write-enabled. This
is the default function for disk volume
sets.
2-205
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
Associated Commands
ALLOCATE Informs the system of your future need for a
resource.
DISMOUNT Removes the specified volume set from your job
search list. If no other users are accessing
the resource, and it is not a system structure,
the volume set will be dismounted from the unit.
DEALLOCATE Removes the resource from your job's list of
allocated resources.
SHOW ALLOCATION Prints a list of the resources allocated and
mounted for your job.
SHOW QUEUE Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Example
The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE, DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands. The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command. The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes. The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.
.ALLOCATE
TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
2-206
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 1
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure, the structure is dismounted. Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.
.DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
2-207
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
The job's resources are displayed:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it can be
dismounted and released from your job. The tape set is
deallocated:
.DEALLOCATED TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
.
2-208
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
NETWORK Command
Function
The NETWORK command prints information about the nodes in an
ANF-10 and/or DECnet-10 network environment. Your terminal must
be attached to one of the nodes in the network to use this
command. You can use the NETWORK command to obtain information
about the other nodes in either type of network, and about the
device configuration of each node in the ANF-10 network.
You can specify the node-name or node-number in the ANF-10
network, or just node-name in the DECnet-10 network, to limit the
output to specific nodes. You can use switches to change the
output format.
NETWORK reads your SWITCH.INI file and accepts indirect commands.
The indirect command files should be formatted as follows:
node-list/switch/switch...
Indirect command files are discussed in Appendix C.
Formats
NETWORK node-list/switch
Where: node-list is the node-names or node-numbers (ANF-10),
or just node-names (DECnet-10), of nodes for which you
want information. If you do not specify the node-list,
information is output for every node in the network.
The node-names or node-numbers (ANF-10), or just
node-names (DECnet-10) are separated by commas.
You can use the wildcard construction in the command string. The
node name, or any part of the node name, can be replaced by * or
? to represent groups of nodes. Wildcards are discussed in
Section 1.11.
The switches to NETWORK allow you to specify:
o The format of the output.
o The configurations that you want to examine.
2-209
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
NOTE
You use switches to select a node with or without a
specific attribute. Use the proper switch, or prefix
the switch with NO. If you do not use the switch, the
selection of a node does not depend upon that
attribute. If you do not specify a node, the default
output is /BRIEF.
The command line takes the format specified below:
NETWORK node-name,
node-number,.../switch/switch...
You can repeat node names, but not switches.
The switches to the NETWORK command follow.
Output Control Switches
Switch Function
/ANF10 Forces output of ANF-10 information.
/BRIEF Suppresses the output of a list of devices for
each node. This is the default if you do not
specify a node-list in the command string.
/COST Controls the listing of the physical link "cost"
associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.
/DECNET Forces output of DECnet-10 information.
/ERROR Prints all error messages. This is the default.
/FAST Prints only the name and number of the nodes. If
you also specify /NOBRIEF, the configuration
information is printed.
/HEADER Prints header information. This is the default
action.
/HELP Prints a description of the NETWORK command.
/LAT Prints LAT terminal server information.
/NOANF10 Suppresses output of ANF-10 information.
/NOBRIEF Prints a list of the devices on each node. This
is the default if you specify a node-list.
2-210
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
/NOCOST Suppresses the listing of the physical link "cost"
associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.
/NODECNET Suppresses output of DECnet-10 information.
/NOERROR Suppresses the output of error messages.
/NOFAST Suppresses printing the name and number of the
nodes. If you also specify /NOBRIEF, the
configuration information is suppressed.
/NOHEADER Suppresses output of header information.
/NOLAT Suppresses LAT terminal server information.
/NOSILENCE Prints all information. This is the default.
/NOSORT Suppresses sorting of the nodes according to node
number.
/NOTOPOLOGY Suppresses printing of the topology of the
network.
/SILENCE Prints only error messages.
/SORT Sorts the nodes according to node number.
/TOPOLOGY Prints the topology of the network as a node name
and number followed by its neighbors' numbers.
Each neighbor has a physical link "cost" following
it in parentheses unless you also include the
/NOCOST switch.
ANF-10 Node Selection Switches
Switch Function
/CDP Prints only nodes that have card-punch devices.
/CDR Prints only nodes that have card readers.
/DTA Prints only nodes that have DECtape units.
/LPT Prints only nodes that have line printers.
/MCR Prints only nodes that have command interpreters
(monitors). MCR signifies that the node is a host
system.
/MTA Prints only nodes that have magnetic tape units.
2-211
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
/NOCDP Prints only nodes that do not have card-punch
devices.
/NOCDR Prints only nodes that do not have card readers.
/NODTA Prints only nodes that do not have DECtape units.
/NOLPT Prints only nodes that do not have line printers.
/NOMCR Prints only nodes that do not have command
interpreters.
/NOMTA Prints only nodes that do not have magnetic tape
units.
/NOPLT Prints only nodes that do not have plotters.
/NOPTP Prints only nodes that do not have paper tape
punch units.
/NOPTR Prints only nodes that do not have paper tape
readers.
/NORDA Prints only nodes that do not have RDX devices.
RDX devices control lines from high-speed input
(block-mode) terminals.
/NOTSK Prints only nodes that do not have TSK: devices.
/NOTTY Prints only nodes that do not support terminals.
/TYPE:DNxxx Prints only nodes of the specified type. This
does not output host nodes. However, if you use
/TYPE: with no value, the host nodes are printed.
/PLT Prints only nodes that have plotters.
/PTP Prints only nodes that have paper tape punch
units.
/PTR Prints only nodes that have paper-tape readers.
/RDA Prints only nodes that have RDX devices. RDX
devices control lines from high-speed input
(block-mode) terminals.
/TSK Prints only nodes that have TSK: devices.
/TTY Prints only nodes that support terminals.
2-212
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
DECnet-10 Node Selection Switches
Switch Function
/LINKS Prints only nodes that have one or more open
logical links.
/NOLINKS Prints only nodes that do not have one or more
open logical links.
/NOUNREACHABLE Suppresses listing of all known DECnet nodes.
/UNREACHABLE Lists all known DECnet nodes.
Network Topology
The topology of a network is determined by the interconnection of
nodes in a network. Nodes can be adjacent to each other
connected by a physical link. They can also be connected with
intermediate nodes. These connections, with associated costs,
determine the routes (paths) a message takes from one node to
another. The costs are arbitrary values given to each physical
connection of the network. The cost of a given route is
determined by the sum of the costs of the physical connections
along that route. In cases where multiple routes exist between
nodes, the route with the lowest cost is taken. In the ANF-10
network, this information is available when you use the /TOPOLOGY
switch.
In the DECnet network, the /TOPOLOGY switch displays the
information available for DECnet nodes. The first two items of
information are the node name and number, followed by DECnet
routing information for that node. If the node is unreachable,
then this information is placed in the output line:
"Unreachable." The remaining information columns are left blank
to indicate that information is not available. If the node is
reachable, then the column shows the circuit name for the initial
routing of a message to that node.
The following columns show cost and number of hops, analogous to
the ANF-10 network topology. The cost for DECnet is set through
network management functions on a per physical-connection basis.
If you ever form a logical link between your node and the
destination node, information is available for the count of open
logical links and the round-trip delay time in milli-seconds.
Otherwise, this information is not available, and the information
fields are left blank. Example 4 shows the output from the use
of the /TOPOLOGY switch for both ANF-10 and DECnet-10 network
environments.
2-213
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
Associated Messages
The output from the NETWORK command is in one of the following
formats.
When you do not specify a node-list:
For ANF-10:
node-name (node-number) system-name system-generation-date
For DECnet-10:
Node list (node-name)
When you specify a node-list:
For ANF-10:
node-name (node-number) system-name system-generation-date
device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]
device[number-of-devices]...
For DECnet-10:
same as when you don't specify node names.
Characteristics
Runs the NETWORK program.
Does not require that you be logged in.
Examples
1. The following example shows the NETWORK command and output
when you omit the node-list. There are 17 nodes in the
ANF-10 network; five are shown in this example. There are
183 reachable nodes in the DECnet network; 14 are shown in
this example.
.NETWORK<RET>
[ANF10 network: connected to SPIRIT (30), located at
KL1026(26), 17 nodes]
Node CTCH22 (22) DN82 V23(174) dd-mmm-yy
Node KL1026 (26) RC117B KL #1026/1042 dd-mmm-yy
Node NEXT (27) DN87 V23(173) dd-mmm-yy
Node SPIRIT (30) DN87 V23(174) dd-mmm-yy
Node NOVA (31) DN87S V23(174) dd-mmm-yy
[DECnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
area 7]
ABLE ADAM AJAX ALGOL ALIEN ALPHA ALPINE
BLUE CACHE CADVAX CAR CASTOR CDR CHAOS
2-214
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
2. The following example shows the NETWORK command when the
node-list is specified. Node-number 33 is valid; node 76 is
invalid.
.NETWORK 33,76<RET>
[ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26),
15 nodes]
Node DWARF (33) DN87S V23(174) 28-Sep-82
TSK[2] TTY[64]
%NWKNNN Node 76 not in Network
.
3. The following example shows the use of NETWORK with the
/NOTSK switch.
.NETWORK/NOTSK<RET>
[ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26),
15 nodes]
Node SOFDCP (75) DN82 V22E/52A
Node WOBBLE (143) DN81 V22E/52A
[DECnet network: local node KL1026, 182 reachable nodes in
area 7]
ABACUS ABLE ADAM AJAX ALGOL ALIEN ALPHA ALPINE
ANIMAL ARK BAXTER BERGIL BISON BLUE CACHE CADVAX
CAR CASTOR CDR CHAOS
4. The following example shows the use of the NETWORK command
with the /TOPOLOGY switch for both ANF-10 and DECnet
networks. The connected node (the node running your job) is
KL1026. KL1026 has a direct line to node ENCORE(32), node
NOVA(31), node JINX(34), node DWARF(33), and node NEXT(27).
Each of these lines costs 10. Therefore, they are equally
acceptable links. Note that node NEXT(27) has a direct line
to node KL1026(26), but this line costs 62, and is therefore
less acceptable than the line which connects node KL1026 to
node NEXT.
2-215
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
.NETWORK/TOPOLOGY<RET>
[ANF10 network: local node KL1026(26), 17 nodes]
Node KL1026 (26) 32(10) 34(10) 33(10) 27(10)
Node CTCH22 (22) 76(8)
Node KS4101 (76) 22(10) 27(10)
Node SOFDCP (75) 71(8) 6(8)
Node TWINKY (71) 75(10) 123(10)
Node WIZARD (123) 71(8) 27(8)
Node NEXT (27) 26(62) 123(16) 76(16)
Node DWARF (33) 26(62)
Node ENCORE (32) 26(62)
Node JINX (34) 26(62)
Node NOVA (31) 26(62) 20(8)
The DECnet network /TOPOLOGY switch displays cost and number
of hops between nodes.
[Decnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
area 7]
Name Number Line Cost Hops L.Links Delay
LARRY (7.221) DTE-0-3 7 3
LYRA (7.236) ETH-0 1 1
.
5. The following example shows the use of the NETWORK command
for a DECnet Ethernet endnode. An Ethernet endnode does not
know DECnet topology information, so the system prints a
summary line containing DECnet information.
.NETWORK/DECNET<RET>
[DECnet network:local node KL1026,
running as an Ethernet endnode]
2-216
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Command
NODE Command
Function
The NODE command prints ANF-10 and DECnet network configuration
information. If you do not specify a node-id, the system
displays information about the node to which your terminal is
connected. If you specify a node-id, the system displays system
configuration information for the node(s) you specified.
To use some commands (for example, SET HOST), you must know if a
node has a command interpreter. The NODE command displays the
symbol MCR as a device on each ANF-10 node that has a command
interpreter.
Format
NODE node-id
Where: node-id is a node identifier of a node in the network.
If you specify 0 as the node-id, the host to which your
terminal is connected is printed. That is, the system
prints the command interpreter of your job. If you do
not specify a node-id, the subject of the output is the
node to which your terminal is connected.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Associated Messages
When you specify a node-id, the information for ANF-10 nodes is
displayed in the following format:
node type node-name (node-num) software-id creation-date
device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]...
Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is the node's
number, software-id is the name and version of the monitor on
that node, and creation-date is the date of the monitor
generation.
The second line of output lists each kind of device on the node,
and the number of devices.
2-217
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Command
Information for DECnet nodes is displayed in one of the following
formats:
o DECnet node-name (node-address) HOPS:m COST:n VIA circuit
name
o DECnet node-name (node-address) may be reachable via the area
router
o DECnet node-name (node-address) may be reachable via the
designated router
o DECnet node-name (node-address) unreachable
Where node-name is the name of the DECnet node, node-address is
the DECnet area and node number, HOPS and COST refer to the
length of the path to that node, circuit is DTE-cpu-lineno or
ETH-0 (on a KL) or KDP-0-lineno (on a KS), and cpu and lineno are
the numbers of the CPU and line through which the node is
reachable. If the node is in a different DECnet area, or the
system is running as an Ethernet endnode, you will get either the
second or the third message. The node is classified as
unreachable only if it is in the same area, but not currently
running.
Examples
1. The following example shows the command interpreter to which
your terminal is connected.
.NODE 0<RET>
Local KL1026(26) RZ357A KL 1024/1042 mm-dd-yy
MCR[1] TTY[137] CDR[2] LPT[5] PTR[2] PTP[2] PLT[1]
.
2. Print the information associated with various DECnet and
ANF-10 nodes:
.NODE KL2116<RET>
DECnet KL2116(7.116) Hops:6 Cost:11 via DTE-0-3
.
The message indicates KL2116 is available, via DTE.
2-218
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Command
.NODE ELROND<RET>
DECnet ELROND(4.19) May be reachable via the area router
.
The message indicates ELROND may or may not be reachable, and
is in a different area. You can only tell if ELROND is
running by attempting a connection.
.NODE NOVA<RET>
ANF NOVA(31) DN87S V24(226) dd-mmm-yy
TTY[63] LPT[1] TSK[2]
.
The message indicates NOVA is an ANF-10 node, and tells you
what devices it has.
.NODE VLNVAX<RET>
DECnet VLNVAX(7.132) Hops:1 Cost:1 via ETH-0
.
The message indicates VLNVAX is available, via Ethernet.
3. Print information about a node named BLAND. The message
indicates the node does not exist.
NODE BLAND<RET>
?Undefined Network Node
2-219
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PASSWORD Command
PASSWORD Command
Function
The PASSWORD command allows you to change your current password.
Your password may be a maximum of 39 characters. Your system
administrator may set a minimum password length.
It asks you to confirm the change by typing your new password
again. If the two (new password and verification) do not match,
the password is unaltered. Neither old password, new password,
nor the verification echoes on the terminal. The command prompts
you for all input.
Format
PASSWORD
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level when all required
information is supplied.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.
Example
This is an example of a successful password change.
.PASSWORD<RET>
You will then be prompted as follows: (Remember, what you type
is not echoed on the terminal.)
Password: <RET>
New password: <RET>
Verification: <RET>
.
2-220
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PJOB Command
PJOB Command
Function
The PJOB command prints job information on your terminal. If you
do not specify a job number, the information printed is about the
job to which you are attached. You can specify the job number
about which you need information. The PJOB command prints the
following information:
o The job number
o The user name
o The project-programmer number
o The terminal number
You receive an error message if no job is attached to the default
or specified job number. If the job is currently detached, the
letters DET and the terminal number are printed.
Format
PJOB job
Where: job is the number of the job, which is assigned when
you log in. If you do not specify the job number, the
information printed is about the job you are currently
logged in to.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
Show information about your job.
.PJOB<RET>
JOB 42 USER MANJUSREE [10,6000] TTY101
.
2-221
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PJOB Command
Function
The PLEASE command allows you to communicate with the operator.
You can send a message to the operator, leaving your job at
monitor level, or you can enter a dialogue that allows two-way
communication with the operator.
Formats
PLEASE text<ESC>
This format sends a message to the operator and leaves your job
at monitor level.
PLEASE<RET>
This format enters into a dialog with the operator. This format
is also useful for a message that is more than one line long.
See Example 1.
When you enter dialog mode, you can enter your text either of two
ways:
o If you type your message and end it with <CTRL/Z>
(control-Z), your job will wait for a reply from the
operator.
o If you type your message and end it by pressing ESCape, the
message will go to the operator and your job will be returned
to monitor level. You may press <ESC> without typing a
message. Your job will exit to monitor level immediately.
The PLEASE command has two switches:
Switch Function
/HELP Prints information on your terminal about the
PLEASE program.
/NODE:id:: Specifies the node of the operator you wish to
communicate with. Use the node name or the node
number for id. Terminate the node identification
with two colons (::).
2-222
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PJOB Command
Associated Messages
[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT node-id HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT time]
This message is printed on your terminal when the operator
receives a message from your terminal. The node-id is the node
where the operator is. The time is when the operator's terminal
received the message.
Examples
1. To enter a dialog with the operator, type PLEASE and press
RETURN.
.PLEASE<RET>
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z
PLEASE responds with the instruction message. In this case,
you press <CTRL/Z> after the text because you want to wait
for a response from the operator.
DO YOU HAVE THE NEW SOS ON LINE YET?<RET>
I CAN'T FIND IT ON SYS<CTRL/Z>
[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT K1514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:03:10]
The operator responds by saying that your request is
finished. PLEASE prompts you with the instruction message.
You thank the operator, press <ESC>, and your job returns to
monitor level.
THE NEWEST VERSION OF SOS IS IN NEW
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z
THANKS<ESC>
.
2. In this example, you send a one-line message to the operator,
and you wait for a reply.
.PLEASE WHAT TIME IS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN?<RET>
[PLOPSN OPERATOR AT KI514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:00:03]
THE SYSTEM WILL GO DOWN AT 6 PM
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z
THANK YOU<ESC>
.
The message from the operator said that the system would shut
down at 6:00. You end the dialog by pressing <ESC>.
2-223
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PJOB Command
3. This example shows the use of PLEASE to send a one-line
message to the operator at node 26.
.PLEASE/NODE:26::ANSWER MY MOUNT REQUEST FOR DSKR:<ESC>
[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT KL1026(26) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:30:35]
.
2-224
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
PLOT Command
Function
The PLOT command places entries in the plotter output queue. See
the QUEUE command for further information and examples.
Format
PLOT dev:jobname=file-spec
Where: dev is the name of the specific device on which your
files should be plotted. (For example, PLT2: is
plotter number 2.) You can have your files plotted on a
device connected to another node by using the format
PLTSxx: where xx is the node number. (For example,
PLTS31 is a plotter on node 31.) The device name is
optional.
jobname is the name of the job being entered into the
queue. The job name is optional. The default is the
name of the first file in the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify either the
device name, the job name, or both.
file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas. A file
specification is in the form dev:file.ext[directory].
If you specify neither a job name nor a file specification, the
system prints a list of the jobs in the plotter queue on your
terminal.
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two categories
are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request, and you can place them
anywhere in the command string. If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a /NO construction,
which has a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command string with the
positive construction.
2-225
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the command
string. You can also use the /NO construction of a switch in
the same command string with the positive construction. To
achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, see Section 1.8.4.
Switch Category Function
/ABEFORE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is before the specified date
and time.
/ACCOUNT: Queue Specifies the account to which the
"string" operation job should be charged. If the
account string contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, you
must enclose the string in
quotation marks.
/AFTER: Queue Processes the request after the
date-time operation specified date and time.
/ALLFILES: Queue Accepts a request only if all of
YES or NO operation the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately. This switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist, no files should be
processed. The value of YES or NO
is optional. If you specify YES,
all the files you specified must
exist or none of the files will be
plotted.
/ASINCE: File Queues only the files that have
date-time control been accessed since the specified
date and time.
/BEFORE: File Queues only the files that were
date-time control created before the specified date
and time.
/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue Specifies an output characteristic.
arg operation You can find a list of the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.
2-226
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/CHECK Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation the queue entries made by your job.
/COPIES:n File Repeats the output the specified
control number of times (n must be less
than 64). The default is 1 (one
copy).
/CREATE Queue Makes a new entry in the plotter
operation queue. This switch is the default,
except when you are listing queue
entries.
/DEFERRED Queue Causes deferred output to be
operation released to the queue. You must
use one of the following switches
with /DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes all released
output requests.
/KILL eliminates the released
output requests.
See the SET DEFER command for more
information and examples.
/DELETE File Deletes the file after processing
control it. This is the same as
/DISPOSE:DELETE.
/DESTINATION: Queue Specifies the node that will
node operation process the output. Use this
switch to specify that the file
should be plotted on a plotter that
is connected to the specified node.
Use the node name or the node
number to specify the node. If a
request is made to a node that does
not exist, the request will wait in
the queue indefinitely.
/DISPOSE:arg File Controls the disposition of the
control file after it is queued. The
arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after plotting it.
PRESERVE preserves the file after
plotting it. This is the default
function.
2-227
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
RENAME renames the file into the
queuing area, deleting it from your
directory immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue Specifies text to place in the
"text" operation distribution field, on the banner
page of output. You can use this
field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the operator should leave the
listing. The text field may be up
to 39 alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File Prints an error message if a binary
control file is included in the request.
This is the default function.
/ERNONE Queue Prints an error message if no files
operation match the file specification. This
is the default function.
/ERPROTECTION Queue Prints an error message if
operation processing the request would
require a violation of protection
codes. This is the default
function.
/FAST Queue Prints the entries in the queue on
operation your terminal using a fast format.
/FORMS:arg Queue Specifies any special paper to be
operation used. Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.
/GENERIC File Sends output to the first
control available plotter. This is the
default function. This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.
/HEADER: File Makes header units before each file
YES or NO control if you specify YES. Does not make
headers if you specify NO. 1 may
be used for YES; 0 may be used for
NO. /HEADER:NO is the same as
/NOHEADER. /HEADER is the default
function.
2-228
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/HELP:arg Queue Prints information on your terminal
operation about the QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used alone or
with one of the following
arguments:
TEXT prints a message about the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command. This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name Queue Specifies the name of the job. The
operation job name can be up to six
alphanumeric characters.
/KILL Queue Removes the specified entry from
operation the queue. You must specify the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
to the left of the equal sign.
/LENGTH:n:m File Processes only files whose length
control is between n and m blocks.
/LIMIT:n Queue Limits the output to the specified
operation number of minutes.
/LIST:arg Queue Prints a list of the jobs in the
operation queue. If you use /LIST alone, it
shows the jobs in the queue. This
is equivalent to using the QUEUE
command with no arguments and no
switches. /LIST can be abbreviated
to /L. The switch can also take
one of the following arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests. (This is the same as
/FAST.)
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue. (This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
2-229
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.
/MESSAGE: Queue Specifies the amount of information
arg operation to be printed when an error occurs
from the request. You can specify
one or more of the following
arguments:
ADDRESS prints the location in
memory where the error occurred.
CONTINUATION prints information
about the error.
FIRST prints the one-line error
message.
PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix.
/MODIFY Queue Alters the specified parameter in
operation the specified job. This switch
requires that you have access
rights to the job. You must
specify a job name, /REQUESTID or
/SEQUENCE, to the left of the equal
sign in the command line.
/NEW: File Accepts the request even if the
YES or NO control file does not yet exist.
/NOHEADER File Suppresses header units for each
control file. /HEADER is the default
function.
/NONEW File Does not accept file specifications
control of files that do not exist. This
is the default function.
/NONOTIFY Queue Suppresses notification of your job
operation when your request is finished.
This is the default function. See
/NOTIFY.
/NONULL Queue Prints a fatal error message on a
operation null request. This is the default
function.
/NOOPTION Queue Suppresses the option file
operation SWITCH.INI.
2-230
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/NOPHYSICAL File Recognizes logical names in the
control command string. This is the
default function.
/NOSTRS File When searching structures for file,
control uses only the first occurrence.
This is the default function.
/NOTES:text Queue Plots the text in the header
operation columns. The text can be up to 12
characters, and it must be enclosed
in quotes if it contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, such as
spaces.
/NOTIFY:arg Queue Notifies you on your terminal when
operation your request is completed. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument. To suppress
notification, use /NOTIFY:0,
/NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY. By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished. In special
cases, such as output of deferred
requests, you will never be
notified.
/NULL: Queue Does not print a fatal error
YES or NO operation message if the specified files do
not exist. /NULL:NO is the same as
/NONULL.
/OKBINARY File Accepts files whose extensions
control indicate that they include binary
information. Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.
/OKNONE Queue Does not produce an error message
operation if no files match the file
specification.
/OKPROTECTION Queue Does not produce an error message
operation if a file protection code is
violated.
/OPTION:option Queue Uses the option line QUEUE:option
operation in the SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.
2-231
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/PHYSICAL File Does not recognize logical names in
control the command line.
/PLOT:arg File Plots the file in the specified
control mode. If you omit /PLOT, the file
is plotted according to the data
mode specified in the file. The
argument can be any one of the
following:
ASCII plots the file in ASCII mode.
BINARY plots the file in binary
mode.
IMAGE plots the file in image mode.
This is the default function.
/PRESERVE File Saves the file after plotting
control it. This is the same as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE and it is the
default function.
/PRIORITY:n Queue Gives the specified priority number
operation (n is 1 to 63) to the request. A
larger number has greater priority.
/PROTECTION: Queue Specifies a protection code for the
nnn operation queue request. Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected. See Section
1.9.4.
/REMOTE Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
/REQUESTID:n Queue Specifies the request
operation identification number of a request
you wish to modify or terminate.
The request identification number
is assigned when the request is
queued.
/RUN:file Queue Executes the specified file after
operation the request is made.
/RUNCORE:n Queue Executes the file specified /RUN in
operation nK of core after the request is
made.
2-232
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue Executes the file specified in /RUN
operation offset n after the request is made.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue Specifies a sequence number to aid
operation in identifying a request to be
modified or deleted.
/SINCE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates after the specified date and
time.
/STRS: File Searches for the file on all
YES or NO control structures in the search list and
takes every occurrence. The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.
/TMPFIL: Queue Creates a temporary file TMP:file
file:text operation and enters the text into the
temporary file.
/UNIT:n Queue Specifies the unit number of the
operation device that you want the output
sent to.
/USERNAME: Queue Specifies the user name field for
"name" operation the banner page of output. This
field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters, and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.
Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints a
message on the user's terminal. The message is in the form:
[PLOTTER JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where: name is the name of the job in the queue. This can be
specified by the user in the PLOT command string.
Otherwise, it defaults to the name of the first file in
the request.
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
xxx is the maximum number of minutes that the job will
use.
2-233
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN when you desire a list of the queue
entries.
Runs the QUEUE program.
Example
Plot all files with the extension .PLT. The operator is asked to
put PLAIN paper on the plotter.
.PLOT *.PLT/FORMS:PLAIN<RET>
[PLOTTER JOB MLB QUEUED, REQUEST #172, LIMIT 30]
.
2-234
SYSTEM COMMANDS
POP Command
POP Command
Function
The POP command returns your job to a superior job context. It
reverses the action of a PUSH command, destroying the inferior
context and restoring the superior one as the current context.
(Section 1.5 contains a discussion of contexts.)
Format
POP
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys the core image of the inferior context and returns you
to the preserved context.
Associated Commands
CONTEXT Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.
PUSH Creates an inferior context.
Example
The following CONTEXT command shows that three of the four
available contexts are in use at this time, as well as 121 of
1,000 available saved-pages. Use the POP command, and then issue
another CONTEXT command, and you can see that one context is
freed, some pages are freed, and the current context (indicated
by an asterisk (*)) changes from context 3 (BOTLVL) to context 2
(LVLTWO). Context 3 no longer exists.
2-235
SYSTEM COMMANDS
POP Command
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 3/4, pages used/quota = 121/1000
Context Superior Prog Idle time
TOPLVL 1 MS :01:36
LVLTWO 2 TOPLVL 1 PATH 12.46
* BOTLVL 3 LVLTWO 2
.POP
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 100/1000
Contexts Superior Prog Idle time
TOPLVL 1 MS :01:49
* LVLTWO 2 TOPLVL 1 PATH
2-236
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRESERVE Command
PRESERVE Command
Function
The PRESERVE command changes the protection code in the owner
field of the specified file to 1. If the system default is
<055>, PRESERVE changes the code to <155>. If the system default
is <057>, PRESERVE changes the code to <157>. Protection codes
are described in Section 1.9.4.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
NOTE
The actions performed by the PRESERVE command are
meaningful only to the KJOB and LOGIN CUSPs.
Format
PRESERVE file.ext,file.ext,...
Where: file.ext is the file name and extension of the file or
files to be PRESERVED.
You can use the full wildcard construction for either
the file name or the extension, or both.
Associated Command
PROTECT - Allows you to specify the protection code for each file
or all files. The function of PRESERVE is identical to
the function of PROTECT.
Restrictions
The PRESERVE command has no effect on sub-file directories (that
is, files with the extension .SFD).
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
2-237
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRESERVE Command
Example
A DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL is protected with <055>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
TEST SFD 1 <755> dd-mmm-yy
TEST REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TEST MAC 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Use PRESERVE to change the protection code of TEST.REL.
.PRESERVE TEST.REL<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:TEST.REL
Show that the protection of TEST.REL is now <155>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
TEST SFD 1 <775> dd-mmm-yy
TEST REL 1 <155> dd-mmm-yy
TEST MAC 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
2-238
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
PRINT Command
Function
The PRINT command queues files to be printed on the line printer.
See the QUEUE command for further information and examples.
Format
PRINT dev:jobname=file-spec
Where: dev: is the device name of the specific line printer
on which your files are to be printed. (For example,
LPT2: is line printer number 2.) You can specify that
your files be printed on a printer on another node by
using the format LPTSxx, where xx is the node number.
(For example, LPTS31 is a printer on node 31.) The
device name is optional.
jobname is the name of the job being entered into the
queue. The job name is optional. The default is the
name of the first file in the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify the device,
job name, or both.
file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications separated by commas, for the files
being processed. A file specification is in the form
dev:file.ext[directory].
If you specify neither the job name nor the input specification,
the system prints a list of all the jobs in the lineprinter queue
on your terminal.
You can use the asterisk wildcard construction for the input
specification. Switches that aid in constructing the queue entry
can appear as part of the input specifications.
2-239
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two categories
are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request, and you can place them
anywhere in the command string. If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a /NO construction,
which has a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command string with the
positive construction.
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the
command string. You can also use the /NO construction of a
switch in the same command string with the positive
construction. To achieve a temporary or permanent effect by
the placement of the switch, see Section 1.8.4.
Switch Category Function
/ABEFORE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is before the specified date
and time.
/ACCOUNT: Queue Specifies the account to which the
"string" operation job should be charged. If the
account string contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, you
must enclose the string in
quotation marks.
/AFTER: Queue Processes the request after the
date-time operation specified date and time.
/ALLFILES: Queue Accepts a request only if all of
YES or NO operation the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately. This switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist, no files should be
processed. The value of YES or NO
is optional. If you specify YES,
all of the specified files must
exist.
2-240
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/ASINCE: File Queues only the files that have
date-time control been accessed since the specified
date and time.
/BEFORE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates before the specified date and
time.
/BEGIN:n File Starts the output on the specified
control page.
/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue Specifies an output characteristic.
arg operation You can find a list of the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.
/CHECK Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation the queue entries made by your job.
/COPIES:n File Repeats the output the specified
control number of times (n must be less
than 64).
/CREATE Queue Makes a new entry in the queue.
operation This is the default except when you
are listing queue entries.
/DEFERRED Queue Causes all deferred output to be
operation released to the system queues. You
must use one of the following
switches with /DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes all released
output requests.
/KILL eliminates the released
output requests.
See the SET DEFER command for more
information and examples.
/DELETE File Deletes the file after printing
control it. This is the same as
/DISPOSE:DELETE
2-241
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/DESTINATION: Queue Specifies the node that will
node operation process the request. Use this
switch to specify that the files
are to be printed on a line printer
connected to the specified node.
Use the node name or node number to
specify the node.
/DISPOSE:arg File Controls the disposition of the
control file after it is queued. The
arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after printing it.
PRESERVE preserves the file after
printing it. This is the default
function.
RENAME renames the file into the
queuing area, deleting it from your
directory immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue Specifies text to place in the
"text" operation distribution field, on the banner
page of output listings. You can
use this field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the operator should leave the
listing. The text field may be up
to 39 alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File Prints an error message if a binary
control file is included in the queue.
This is the default function.
/ERNONE Queue Prints an error message if no files
operation match the file specification. This
is the default function.
/ERPROTECTION Queue Prints an error message if
operation processing the request would
require a violation of file
protection code. This is the
default function.
/FAST Queue Prints the entries in the queue on
operation your terminal in a fast format.
2-242
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/FILE: File Specifies the way the file is to be
arg control interpreted. The following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as ASCII
text.
COBOL interprets the file as COBOL
SIXBIT text.
FORTRAN interprets the file as a
Fortran data file. This is the
default for files with the
extension .DAT.
/FONT: Queue Prints the file using the font
fontname operation designated in fontname. Fontnames
vary from installation to
installation. See your system
administrator for a list of valid
font names. (Section 1.16
describes how to print a file using
multiple fonts.)
/FORMS:name Queue Prints the file on the named forms.
operation The argument to the switch can be
up to six alphanumeric characters.
Available forms are listed in
SYS:FORMST.DAT.
/GENERIC Queue Sends output to the next available
operation line printer. This switch is the
complement to /UNIT.
/HEADER: File Prints block headers at the
YES or NO control beginning of the file. This is the
default function.
/HELP: Queue Prints information on your terminal
arg operation about the QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used alone
(/HELP) or with one of the
following arguments:
TEXT prints a message with the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command. This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
2-243
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME: Queue Specifies the name of the job. The
name operation job name can be up to six
alphanumeric characters.
/KILL Queue Removes the specified entry from
operation the queue. You must include the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE
to the left of the equal sign in
the command line. (See the
examples.)
/LENGTH:n:m File Prints only files whose length
control is between n and m blocks.
/LIMIT:n Queue Limits the output to the specified
operation number of pages.
/LIST:arg Queue Prints information about the jobs
operation in the queue. If you use /LIST
alone, it shows the jobs in the
queue. This is equivalent to using
the PRINT command with no arguments
and no switches. /LIST and /LIST:
can be abbreviated to /L and /L:.
The switch can also take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue. (This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.
/LOWERCASE Queue Forces the output to be printed on
operation a line printer with lowercase
ability.
2-244
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/MESSAGE:arg Queue Specifies the amount of information
operation to be printed when an error occurs
from the request. You can specify
one or more of the following
arguments:
ADDRESS prints the location in
memory where the error occurred.
CONTINUATION prints information
about the error.
FIRST prints the one-line error
message.
PREFIX prints the six-character
error prefix.
/MODIFY Queue Alters the specified parameter in
operation the specified job. This switch
requires that you have access
rights to the job. You must
include the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE, to the left of the
equal sign in the command line.
(See the examples.) You can modify
a request as long as the request
has not been started.
/NEW: File Accepts the request even if the
YES or NO control file does not yet exist.
/NOHEADER Queue Suppresses the block headers at the
operation beginning of the file.
/NONEW File Does not accept file specifications
control of files that do not exist. This
is the default function.
/NONOTIFY Queue Suppresses notification when your
operation request is finished. See /NOTIFY.
/NONULL Queue Prints a fatal error message if
operation none of the specified files exist.
This is a default function.
/NOOPTION Queue Suppresses the option file
operation SWITCH.INI.
2-245
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/NOPHYSICAL File Recognizes logical names for
control devices in the command string.
This is a default function.
/NOSTRS File When searching for the file on all
control structures, takes only the first
occurrence. This is the default
function.
/NOTES:"text" Queue Prints the specified text on the
operation header pages of the output. The
text can be 12 characters, and if
it contains any nonalphanumeric
characters, it must be enclosed in
quotation marks.
/NOTIFY: Queue Notifies you on your terminal when
YES or NO operation your request is completed. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument. To suppress
notification, use /NOTIFY:0,
/NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY. By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished. In special
cases, such as the printing of log
files and the output of deferred
requests, you will never be
notified.
/NULL: Queue Does not print a fatal error
YES or NO operation message if the specified files do
not exist. /NULL:NO is the same as
/NONULL.
/OKBINARY Queue Accepts files whose extensions
Operation indicate that they include binary
information. Normally files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be
accepted.
/OKNONE Queue Does not produce a warning message
operation if no files match the file
specification.
/OKPROTECTION Queue Does not produce an error message
operation if a file protection code is
violated.
2-246
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/OPTION:option Queue Uses the option line QUEUE:option
operation in the SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.
/PHYSICAL File Does not recognize logical names
control in the command line.
/PRESERVE File Saves the file after printing
control it. This switch is the same as
DISPOSE:PRESERVE. This is the
default function.
/PRINT:arg File Prints the file with the specified
control characteristics. The default
printing mode is ASCII. The
argument can be any one of the
following:
ARROW prints the file literally,
denoting each control character by
a ^ and the character, except for
the following which are printed
literally: carriage return,
linefeed, horizontal tab, vertical
tab, and formfeed.
ASCII prints the file with no
changes.
GRAPHICS causes the LN01 laser
printer to recognize escape
sequences. These embedded
sequences allow font changes within
the file. Unless you specify this
switch, escape sequences will be
ignored and printed as part of the
file. (See Section 1.16 for a
discussion of LN01 escape
sequences.)
OCTAL prints the octal values
instead of the characters in the
file.
SUPPRESS converts all control
characters to line feeds except for
ASCII code characters CR and DC3.
/PRIORITY:n Queue Gives the specified priority number
operation (n is 1 to 63) to the request. A
larger number has greater priority.
2-247
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/PROTECTION: Queue Specifies a protection code for the
nnn operation queue request. Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected. See Section
1.9.4.
/QUEUE:queue Queue Specifies the remote VAX queue to
operation receive the output from the
request.
/REMOTE Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
/REPORT:code File Processes COBOL report files by
control printing every line in the file
that begins with the specified
code.
/REQUESTID:n Queue Specifies the request
operation identification number of the job
you wish to modify or terminate
(/KILL). The request
identification number is assigned
by the system when the request is
made. Place this switch to the
left of the equal sign in the
command line. (See the examples.)
/RUN:file Queue Executes the specified file after
operation the request is accepted.
/RUNCORE:n Queue Executes the file specified in /RUN
operation in nK of core after the request is
accepted.
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue Executes the file specified in /RUN
operation with offset n after the request is
accepted.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue Specifies a sequence number to aid
operation in identifying a request to be
modified or deleted. This switch
must be used to the left of the
equal sign in the command line.
(See the examples.)
2-248
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/SINCE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates after the specified date and
time.
/SPACING: File Prints the files with the specified
arg control spacing parameters. The default
function is to make no spacing
changes to the file, which is the
same as /SPACING:SINGLE. You can
use the following arguments with
this switch:
SINGLE prints the file with no
spacing changes.
DOUBLE prints a blank line between
every line of the file.
TRIPLE prints two blank lines
between every line of the file.
/STRS: File Searches for the file on all
YES or NO control structures in the search list and
takes every occurrence. The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.
/TMPFIL: Queue Creates a temporary file TMP:file
file:text operation and enters the text into the file.
/UNIT:n Queue Specifies a decimal unit number
operation or SIXBIT name of the device you
want the output sent to.
/UPPERCASE Queue Forces the output to be printed on
operation an uppercase-only line printer.
This switch is the complement to
/LOWERCASE.
/USERNAME: Queue Specifies the user name for the
"name" operation banner page of output listings.
This field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters, and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.
2-249
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints a
message on the user's terminal. The message is in the form:
[PRINTER JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where: name is the name of the job in the queue. This can be
specified by the user. Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request.
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
xxx is the maximum number of pages that the job will
use.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if you want only a list of jobs in the
queue to be printed on your terminal.
Examples
1. Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT.
.PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]
.
2. Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT after 5:00 P.M.
.PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT /AFTER:17:00<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]
.
3. Change the job with request identifcation number 109 to print
after 4:30 P.M.
.PRINT /REQUESTID:109= /MODIFY /AFTER:16:30<RET>
4. Cancel the job with sequence number 22.
.PRINT /SEQUENCE:22= /KILL<RET>
2-250
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PROTECT Command
PROTECT Command
Function
The PROTECT command changes the access protection codes
associated with the specified files or directories. The change
is made by renaming the file.
You specify the access protection of a file with three octal
digits. Each digit represents a particular class of user. The
first digit represents the owner of the file, the second
represents users with the same project number as the owner, and
the third represents all other users. See Section 1.9.4 for a
description of protection codes.
The standard protection is either <057> or <055>. However, the
system default can be changed by individual installations. The
owner of a file can alter the protection code of that file
regardless of the existing protection code.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
Format
PROTECT file-spec<nnn>,file-spec<nnn>,...
Where: file-spec is a file specification. File specifications
are described in Section 1.9.
<nnn> is an octal code.
You can specify the protection code before the file
name, in which case it applies for all following files.
You can use the full wildcard construction for the file
specification.
If you have the required privileges, you can change the
protection of files not in your directory by specifying
the desired directory name. If you specify the
directory name before the file name, it applies to all
succeeding files specified in the command line.
Associated Commands
PRESERVE Changes the protection codes of the specified files to
<1nn>.
2-251
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PROTECT Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL has the protection <155>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
TEST SFD 1 <775> dd-mmm-yy
TEST REL 1 <155> dd-mmm-yy
TEST MAC 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Use PROTECT to change the protection code of TEST.REL to <555>:
.PROTECT TEST.REL<555><RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:TEST.REL
Show the new protection of TEST.REL with DIRECTORY.
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
TEST SFD 1 <775> dd-mmm-yy
TEST REL 1 <555> dd-mmm-yy
TEST MAC 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
2-252
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUNCH Command
PUNCH Command
Function
The PUNCH command is defined by the system administrator to be
equivalent to either the TPUNCH or CPUNCH command. TOPS-10 is
shipped with PUNCH defined as TPUNCH, but this may be changed at
your site.
See the TPUNCH and CPUNCH command descriptions for more
information.
2-253
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
PUSH Command
Function
The PUSH command creates an inferior context; the new context
becomes your current one. The core image of the superior context
is preserved. (See Section 1.5 for a discussion of contexts.)
Format
PUSH
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Preserves your core image.
Associated Commands
CONTEXT Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.
POP Allows you to return to a superior context.
Example
Run a program, for example, MS. Then exit and issue a CONTEXT
command to see the status of your current context.
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 4/1000
Context Superior Prog Idle time
* 1 MS
Now issue a PUSH command, and try another CONTEXT command to see
the new status of your contexts.
.PUSH
.CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 6/1000
Context Superior Prog Idle Time
1 MS 19.78
* 2 1
There are now two contexts in use. The current, unnamed context
2-254
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
2 is not running a program. MS, which is running in the unnamed
superior context, has been idle for 19.78 seconds since the last
CONTEXT command was issued.
2-255
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
Function
The QUEUE command makes entries in any of several system queues,
or in the case of the Event Queue, displays information only.
The system queues are:
o Event Queue - Contains information about scheduled system
events. This information may include such things as the time
the system will go down (KSYS) and when certain files will be
closed. This queue is a display queue only.
o Input Queue - Contains the batch jobs that have been
submitted to the system.
o Mount Queue - Contains the requests for resources to be
mounted. These are: tape, disk, and DECtape mount requests.
o Output Queues:
- Card Punch Queue - Contains the requests that have been
made for files to be punched on cards.
- Paper Tape Punch Queue - Contains the requests that have
been made for files to be punched on paper tape.
- Plotter Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
for files to be plotted.
- Printer Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
for files to be printed on a line printer.
When queueing a request, you can specify an individual device.
If you do not specify a device, the first available appropriate
device is used.
All requests are placed in a queue (a list of the requests,
arranged according to priority). The requests are processed in
this order. Priority is established by the limit that is set on
each request (see /LIMIT and /TIME below) and according to the
specified priority number (see /PRIORITY below). In general,
requests with smaller limits and higher priorities are processed
first.
The QUEUE command also creates lists of the requests in the
queues. This list can be printed on the terminal or entered into
a file. The list includes the mount queue as well as input and
output queues.
2-256
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
The QUEUE command is duplicated by the CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT,
PUNCH, SUBMIT, and TPUNCH commands. Each of these commands
performs a function with a specific system queue.
Formats
1. To process a batch job, use the following format:
QUEUE INP:jobname=control-file,log-file
Where: jobname is the name of the job. This name must be
one to six alphanumeric characters. The job name
is optional. If you do not specify the job name,
the default is the name of the log file.
The equal sign is required.
control-file is the file specification of the batch
control file. The file name is required. If you
do not specify the file extension, the default is
.CTL.
log-file is the file specification that you want
assigned to the log file, which contains a record
of the processing of the batch job. The log file
specification is optional. If you omit the file
name, the default is the name of the control file.
If you omit the file extension, the default is
.LOG.
2. To make an entry in one of the output queues, use the
following format:
QUEUE dev:jobname=file-spec,file-spec
Where: dev: is the name of the device on which the output
is to be processed. The device name may be a
generic device name, in which case the first
available device is used, or it may be a specific
device name. (For example, LPT: is the first
available line printer. LPT2: is line printer
number 2.) To use a device on another node, use the
format devSxx:, where dev is a generic device name,
and xx is a node number. (For example, LPTS34: is
a line printer on node 34.) If you do not specify a
device name, the default is LPT:. The generic
device names are:
LPT: for line printer requests.
CDP: for card punch requests.
2-257
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
PLT: for plotter requests.
PTP: for paper tape punch requests
jobname is the name of the job. The job name is
one to six alphanumeric characters. The job name
is optional. If you omit the job name, the name of
the first file in the request is used as the job
name. However, if the first file does not exist
(see /NEW), the name of the second file is used.
file-spec is the file specification of the file to
be processed. The file name and extension are
required.
3. To obtain a file containing a list of all the entries in all
the queues, use the following format:
QUEUE file-spec=/LIST
Where: file-spec is the file specification of the output
file. If you omit the file extension, the default
is .LSQ.
4. To display the entries in any or all system queues on your
terminal, use the following format:
QUEUE dev:
Where: dev is any of the system queue names. These are:
INP: for the batch input queue.
CDP: for the card punch queue.
PLT: for the plotter queue.
LPT: for the line printer queue.
PTP: for the paper tape punch queue.
The device name is optional. If you do not specify
the device name, all the entries in all the system
queues are printed on your terminal. This list
includes the mount queue.
2-258
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
Switches
The switches for the QUEUE, CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT, PUNCH, SUBMIT,
and TPUNCH commands can be placed anywhere in the command line.
The switches can be divided into two categories, depending on
whether the switch can be used only once, or can be used more
times, in the command line. The two categories are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request, and you can place them
anywhere in the command string. If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a /NO construction,
which takes a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the
/NO construction of one of these switches in the same
command string with the positive construction of the switch.
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the
command string. You can use the /NO construction of one of
these switches in the same command string with the positive
construction of the switch. For information about how to
achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, see Section 1.8.4.
In the following table of switches, the switches are defined
according to the queues that they affect. The following labels
signify the queue(s) that each switch affects. The switches are
defined as follows:
ALL - Switches that affect both the batch input queue
and the output queues.
INPUT - Switches that affect only the batch input queue.
OUTPUT - Switches that affect only the output queues.
OUTPUT is followed by (queue) in cases where a
switch is useful for that specific output queue.
LIST - Switches that affect the listing of the jobs in
the queue. Listings can be printed on the
terminal, or they can be written into files on
disk or tape. LIST is followed by (queue) when
the listing function is useful for that queue.
2-259
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
Switch Category Queues Meaning
/ABEFORE: File ALL Queues the file only if
date-time control the access date is before
the specified date and
time.
/ACCOUNT: Queue ALL Specifies the account to
"string" operation which the job should be
charged. If the account
string contains any
nonalphanumeric
characters, you must
enclose the string in
quotation marks.
/AFTER: Queue ALL Processes the request
date-time operation after the specified date
and time.
/ALLFILES: Queue OUTPUT Accepts a request only if
YES or NO operation all of the files in the
request exist. By
default, if any of the
files do not exist, the
others will be processed
appropriately. This
switch specifies that if
any file does not exist,
no files should be
processed. The value of
YES or NO is optional.
If you use YES, all of
the specified files must
exist. If NO, existing
files are processed and
warning messages are
printed for files that do
not exist.
/ASINCE: File ALL Queues only the files
date-time control that have been accessed
since the specified date
and time.
2-260
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/ASSISTANCE: Queue INPUT Specifies whether the job
YES or NO operation needs or does not need
operator intervention.
Arguments are YES or 1
and NO or 0. If you
specify NO, and then
request assistance, your
job is cancelled.
Assistance is any request
that the operator must
answer before the batch
job can continue,
including PLEASE and
MOUNT requests.
/BATLOG:arg Queue INPUT Controls the way the log
operation file is output to disk.
Arguments are:
APPEND appends the log
file to an existing file
of the same name. This
is the default function.
SUPERSEDE replaces any
file of the same name
with the new log file.
SPOOL spools the log file
for output. Does not
store the file in your
directory.
/BATOPT: Queue INPUT Specifies a LOGIN option
option-name operation line to read for LOGIN
switches to apply to the
batch job. The option
name that you specify
with the /BATOPT switch
must match a line in the
SWITCH.INI file that
appears as:
LOGIN:option-name/switches
/BEFORE: File ALL Queues only the files
date-time control with creation dates
before the specified date
and time.
2-261
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/BEGIN:n File OUTPUT (LPT) Starts the output on the
control INPUT nth page for line printer
requests or on the nth
line of the control file
for batch requests. The
default is to begin
output on the first unit.
/CARDS:n Queue INPUT Uses n as the maximum
operation number of cards that can
be punched by your batch
job (up to 10,000).
/CHARAC:arg Queue OUTPUT Specifies an output char-
operation acteristic. The argument
can be up to six
alphanumeric characters.
Characteristics arguments
defined for your system
are listed in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.
/CHECK Queue LIST Prints on your terminal a
operation list of the queue entries
made by your job.
/COPIES:n File OUTPUT Repeats the output the
control specified number of times
(n must be less than 64).
/CORE:n Queue INPUT Uses n (in decimal K) as
operation the maximum amount of
memory that your job can
use.
/CREATE Queue ALL Makes a new entry in the
operation queue. This switch is
the default except when
you are listing queue
entries.
2-262
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/DEFERRED Queue OUTPUT Causes all deferred
operation output to be released to
the system queues. You
must use one of the
following switches with
/DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes all
released output requests.
/KILL eliminates the
released output requests.
See the SET DEFER command
description for more
information and examples.
/DELETE File ALL Deletes the file after
control processing it. (This is
the same as
/DISPOSE:DELETE.)
/DENSITY:n Queue LIST Specifies the density of
operation magnetic tape when
writing listing files
directly on tape. The
values for n are: 200,
800, 1600, 6250, and
INSTALLATION (to take the
installation default).
/DEPENDENCY:n Queue INPUT Specifies the initial
operation value of the dependency
count in decimal. When
used with /MODIFY, this
switch changes the
dependency count of
another job. If n is a
signed number (+ or -),
that number is added to
or subtracted from the
dependent job's count.
If n is not a signed
number, the dependent
job's count is changed to
n.
2-263
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/DESTINATION: Queue ALL Specifies the node to
node operation which all output is to be
sent. When used with an
output request, the file
will be output on a
device attached to the
specified node. When
used with an input
request, any output
generated by the request
(including the log file,
if it is to be printed)
is sent to the specified
node. The node can be
specified by either the
node name or the node
number. If a request is
made to a node that does
not exist, the request
will wait in the queue
indefinitely.
/DISPOSE: File ALL Controls the disposition
arg control of the file after it is
queued. The arguments to
this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file
from your directory after
processing it.
PRESERVE preserves the
file after processing it.
This is the default
function.
RENAME renames the file
from your area into the
spooling area, deleting
it from your area
immediately.
2-264
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue ALL Specifies text to place
"text" operation in the distribution
field, on the banner page
of output listings. For
batch input requests, the
distribution text is
printed on the banner
page of the log file
listing. You can use
this field to include
mailing information, or
the location where the
operator should leave the
listing. The text field
may be up to 39
alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and
spaces if the text is
placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File ALL Prints an error message
control if a binary file is
included in the request.
This is the default
function.
/ERNONE Queue ALL Prints an error message
operation if no files match the
file specification. This
is the default function.
/ERPROTECTION Queue ALL Prints an error message
operation if processing the request
involves a violation of
file protection. This is
the default function.
/ERSUPERSEDE Queue LIST Prints an error message
operation if a listing file by the
same name already exists.
Without this switch, the
old listing file is
automatically superseded
by the new listing file.
/ESTIMATE:x Queue LIST Specifies an estimated
operation number of blocks for the
listing file.
2-265
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/FAST Queue LIST Prints the entries in the
operation queue on your terminal in
a fast format. Same as
/LIST:FAST.
/FEET:n Queue INPUT Uses n as the maximum
operation number of feet of paper
tape that your batch job
can punch.
/FILE:arg File OUTPUT Specifies how the file
control format is to be
interpreted. The
following arguments can
be used with this switch:
ASCII interprets the file
as ASCII text.
COBOL interprets the file
as COBOL SIXBIT text.
ELEVEN interprets the
file as four 8-bit bytes
in each 36-bit word. The
bits are arranged as
follows:
Byte 1: bits 10-17
Byte 2: bits 2-9
Byte 3: bits 28-35
Byte 4: bits 20-27
FORTRAN interprets the
file as a FORTRAN data
file. This is the
default for files with
the extension .DAT.
/FONT:name Queue OUTPUT Specifies that the file
operation should be printed
entirely in the font
designated in name. As
fontnames vary from
installation to
installation, see your
system administrator for
a list of valid
fontnames.
2-266
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/FORMS:arg Queue OUTPUT Processes the output on
operation the specified type of
form. The argument to
the switch can be up to
six alphanumeric
characters. Available
forms are listed in
SYS:FORMST.DAT.
/GENERIC Queue OUTPUT Sends output to any unit
operation of the type specified or
implied. For instance,
if no device is
specified, output goes to
the next available line
printer. This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.
/HEADER: Queue OUTPUT Prints block headers
YES or NO operation between copies of the
file. This is the
default function.
/HELP: Queue Prints information on
arg operation your terminal about the
QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any
files. This switch can
be used alone or with one
of the following
arguments:
TEXT prints a message
about the format and
switches of the QUEUE
command. This is the
same as /HELP with no
arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of
all the switches
available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name Queue ALL Specifies the name of the
operation job. The job name can be
up to six alphanumeric
characters.
2-267
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/KILL Queue ALL Removes the specified
operation entry from the specified
queue. You must include
the job name, /SEQUENCE,
or /REQUESTID to the left
of the equal sign in the
command line. See the
examples.
/LENGTH:n:m File ALL Processes only files
control whose length is between n
and m blocks.
/LIMIT:n Queue OUTPUT Limits the output to the
operation specified number of
pages, cards, feet, or
minutes.
/LIST: Queue LIST Prints information about
arg operation the jobs in the queue.
If you use /LIST alone,
it shows the jobs in the
queue. This is
equivalent to using the
QUEUE command with no
arguments or switches.
/LIST can be abbreviated
to /L. The switch can
also take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about
each queue request.
FAST shows a fast list of
the queue requests.
JOBS shows a list of the
jobs in the queue. (This
is the same as /LIST with
no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the
summary line of the queue
display.
/LOWERCASE Queue OUTPUT (LPT) Forces the output to be
operation printed on a line printer
with lowercase ability.
2-268
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/MESSAGE: Queue ALL Specifies the amount of
arg operation information to be printed
when an error occurs from
the request. You can
specify one or more of
the following arguments:
ADDRESS prints the
location in memory where
the error occurred.
CONTINUATION prints
information about the
error.
FIRST prints the one-line
error message.
PREFIX prints a
six-character error
prefix.
/METERS:n Queue INPUT Uses n as the maximum
operation number of meters of paper
tape that can be punched
by the batch job.
/MODIFY Queue ALL Alters the specified
operation parameter in the
specified job. This
switch requires that you
have access rights to the
job. You must include
the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE, to the left
of the equal sign in the
command line. (See the
examples.) This switch
can be used to modify a
previously submitted
request as long as the
request has not been
started.
/NEW: File ALL Accepts the request even
YES or NO control if the file does not yet
exist.
/NOHEADER Queue OUTPUT Suppresses the block
operation headers at the beginning
of the file.
2-269
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/NONEW File ALL Does not accept file
control specifications of files
that do not exist. This
is the default function.
/NONOTIFY Queue ALL Does not notify you when
operation when your request is
finished. This is the
default function. See
/NOTIFY.
/NONULL Queue OUTPUT Prints a fatal message on
operation a null request. This is
the default function.
/NOOPTION Queue ALL Does not use the
operation parameters specified in
the SWITCH.INI file.
/NOPHYSICAL File ALL Recognized logical names
control for devices in the
command string. This is
the default function.
/NORESTART Queue INPUT Prevents your job from
operation being restarted when it
was stopped because of an
error.
/NOSTRS File OUTPUT When searching structures
control for the specified file,
uses only the first file
found. This is the
default function.
/NOTES:"text" Queue OUTPUT Includes the text in the
operation header units of output.
you should include
quotation marks if the
text contains spaces or
punctuation.
2-270
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/NOTIFY:arg Queue ALL Tells the system whether
operation to send a message to your
terminal when your
request is completed. By
default, you are not
notified when a request
is finished. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY
with no argument, or with
YES or 1 as an argument.
To suppress notification,
use /NOTIFY:0,
/NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY.
In special cases, such as
the printing of log files
and the output of
deferred requests, you
will never be notified.
/NULL: Queue OUTPUT Does not print a fatal
YES or NO operation error message if the
files you specified do
not exist. /NULL:NO is
the same as /NONULL.
/OKBINARY File ALL Accepts files whose
control extensions indicate that
they include binary
information. Normally
files with extensions
.SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE and .HGH will not be
accepted.
/OKNONE Queue ALL Does not produce a
operation warning message if none
of the specified files
exist.
/OKPROTECTION Queue ALL Does not generate an
operation error message if a file
protection code is
violated.
/OKSUPERSEDE Queue LIST Does not generate an
operation error if the listing file
already exists. This is
the default function.
2-271
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/OPTION:option Queue ALL Uses the line QUEUE:
operation option in the SWITCH.INI
file. SWITCH.INI files
are discussed in Appendix
B.
/OUTPUT:arg Queue INPUT Determines whether or not
operation the log file will be
printed. The arguments
are LOG, NOLOG, and
ERROR.
LOG prints the log file.
NOLOG suppresses printing
of the log file.
ERROR prints the log file
only if an error occurs.
/PAGES:n Queue INPUT Uses n as the maximum
operation number of pages of output
that your job can print.
/PARITY: Queue LIST Uses the specified
ODD or EVEN operation parity, when writing the
listing file directly
onto magnetic tape. The
default is ODD.
/PATH:[dir] Queue INPUT Specifies the directory
operation to be accessed by the
job. The directory can
be UFD or an SFD.
/PHYSICAL File ALL Does not recognize
control logical names for devices
in the command line.
2-272
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/PLOT:arg File OUTPUT (PLT) Plots the file in the
control specified mode. If you
omit /PLOT, the file is
plotted according to the
data mode specified in
the file. The argument
can be any one of the
following:
ASCII plots the file in
ASCII mode.
BINARY plots the file in
binary mode.
IMAGE plots the file in
image mode.
/PRESERVE File ALL Saves the file after
control processing it. (This is
the same as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE). This
is the default function.
/PRINT:arg File OUTPUT (LPT) Prints the file using
control the argument to determine
the printing mode. The
default printing mode is
ASCII. The argument can
be any one of the
following:
ARROW converts all
control characters except
011-015 and 020-024 to
up-arrow format.
ASCII prints the file
with no changes. This is
the default.
2-273
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
GRAPHICS causes the LN01
laser printer to
recognize escape
sequences. These
embedded sequences allow
font changes within a
file. Unless this switch
is specified, escape
sequences are ignored and
printed as part of the
file. (See Section 1.16
for a discussion of LN01
escape sequences.)
OCTAL prints the octal
values instead of the
characters in the file.
SUPPRESS converts all
control characters to
line feeds except for
ASCII code characters CR
and DC3.
/PRIORITY:n Queue ALL Assigns the specified
operation priority (n is 1 to 63)
to the request. A larger
number has greater
priority.
/PROCESSING: Queue INPUT Specifies the node that
node operation will process the job.
You must specify the node
by the node name or node
number. Batch jobs can
be submitted only to IBM
host nodes. Jobs that
are submitted to nodes
other than IBM host nodes
will wait in the queue
indefinitely.
2-274
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/PROTECTION: Queue LIST Specifies a protection
nnn operation code for the listing
file.
OUTPUT Specifies a protection
INPUT for the queue request.
Queue requests are
protected in the same way
that files are protected.
See Section 1.9.4.
/PUNCH:arg File OUTPUT (CDP) Punches the files in the
control specified mode. If you
omit this switch, the
files are punched
according to the data
mode specified in the
file. The following
arguments can be used
with this switch:
026 punches the files in
026 Hollerith code.
ASCII punches the files
in ASCII card code.
BCD punches the files in
026 Hollerith code.
BINARY punches the files
in checksummed binary
card code.
IMAGE punches the files
in image card format.
/QUEUE:queue Queue OUTPUT Specifies the remote VAX
operation queue to receive the
output from the request.
/READER Queue INPUT Causes a disk-resident
operation card job to be read as if
it were on punched cards
and had been submitted
through the card reader.
/REMOTE Queue ALL Prints on your terminal a
operation list of remote queues.
Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
2-275
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/REPORT:code File OUTPUT (LPT) Prints COBOL reports by
control printing every line in
the file that has the
specified code at the
beginning of the line.
/REQUESTID:n Queue ALL Specifies the request
operation identification number of
a job you wish to modify
(/MODIFY) or terminate
(/KILL). The request
identification number is
assigned by the system
when you queue the
request. This switch
must be used to the left
of the equal sign in the
command line. (See the
examples.)
/RESTARTABLE: Queue INPUT Specifies whether the job
YES or NO operation should be restarted after
the system has crashed
and been restored.
Arguments are: YES or 1,
and NO or 0. The default
is NO.
/RUN:file Queue ALL Executes the specified
operation file after the request is
queued.
/RUNCORE:nx Queue ALL Executes the program
operation specified in /RUN in nK
of core after the request
is accepted. The value
can also be expressed in
terms of nP (pages).
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue ALL Executes the file
operation specified in /RUN with
offset n after the
request is queued.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue ALL Specifies the sequence
operation number of a request to be
modified or deleted.
This switch must be used
to the left of the equal
sign in the command line.
2-276
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/SINCE: File ALL Queues only the files
date-time control with creation dates after
the specified date and
time.
/SITGO Queue INPUT Specifies that the batch
operation job be processed by the
SITGO processor.
/SPACING:arg File OUTPUT (LPT) Prints the files with the
control specified spacing
parameters. The default
function is to make no
spacing changes to the
file, this is the same as
/SPACING:SINGLE. You can
use the following
arguments with this
switch:
SINGLE prints the file
with no spacing changes.
DOUBLE prints a blank
line between every line
of the file.
TRIPLE prints two blank
lines between every line
of the file.
/STREAM:n Queue LIST (INP) Prints a list of the jobs
operation that are running or
destined to run in the
specified batch stream.
/STRS: File OUTPUT Searches for the file on
YES or NO control all structures in the
search list and takes
every occurrence. The
default is to take just
the first occurrence of
the file.
/TAG:xxx File INPUT Starts at the statement
control labeled xxx in the
control file. Equivalent
to GOTO xxx at the
beginning of the control
file.
2-277
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/TAPE:arg File OUTPUT (PTP) Punches paper tape in the
control specified code. If you
do not use this switch,
the tape is punched
according to the data
mode specified in the
file. You can use any
one of the following
arguments with this
switch:
ASCII punches the tape in
ASCII code.
BINARY punches the tape
in binary code.
IBINARY punches the tape
in image binary code.
IMAGE punches the tape in
image mode.
/TIME: Queue INPUT Specifies the CPU time
hh:mm:ss operation limit for the job. The
form /TIME:n can be used
to specify a limit of n
seconds.
/TMPFIL: Queue ALL Creates a temporary file
file:"text" operation TMP:file.TMP and enters
the text into the file.
/TPLOT:n Queue INPUT Uses n minutes as the
operation maximum amount of
plotting time allowed for
your job.
/UNIQUE: Queue INPUT Specifies whether more
YES or NO operation than one batch job can
run from your PPN at one
time. If the value is
YES (or 1), only one job
will run at a time. Any
other batch jobs will
wait until the previous
job is finished. If the
value is NO (or 0), any
number of batch jobs can
run at the same time.
2-278
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
/UNIT:n Queue OUTPUT Specifies the unit number
operation or SIXBIT name of the
device that you want the
output sent to.
/UPPERCASE Queue OUTPUT (LPT) Forces the output to be
operation printed on an
uppercase-only line
printer. This switch is
the complement to
/LOWERCASE.
/USERNAME: Queue ALL Specifies the user name
"name" operation field for the banner page
of output listings. For
batch input requests, the
user name is printed on
the banner page for the
log file listing. This
field can contain up to
39 alphanumeric
characters, and may
include punctuation and
spaces if the name is
placed in quotation
marks. To avoid conflict
with the MOUNT/USER
switch, do not shorten
this switch to less than
/USERN.
/VERSION:n Queue LIST Specifies a version
operation number in standard
DECsystem-10 format for
listing files.
Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints a
message on the user's terminal. The message is in the form:
[device JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where: device is the name of one of the output devices, or
BATCH.
name is the name of the job in the queue. This can be
specified by the user. Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request. In the case of
batch requests, the name of the log file is used as the
job name.
2-279
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
xxx is the maximum number of pages that the job will
use.
When the entry has been made to the batch queue, the LIMIT is
changed to RUN TIME. In this case, the time limit of the job is
displayed.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if you desire only a list of queue
entries.
Examples
1. Enter file FILEA.LST and FILEB.LST in the line printer queue
under the job name of FILEA.
.QUEUE FILEA,FILEB<RET>
[PRINTER JOB FILEA QUEUED, REQUEST #4, LIMIT 20]
.
2. Enter file TEST.CTL in the batch input queue under job name
TEST and log file with name TEST.LOG.
.QUEUE INP:=TEST<RET>
[BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST #33, LIMIT 00:05:00]
.
3. Submit the control file TEST.CTL to the batch input queue for
processing after 5:00 P.M.:
.QUEUE INP: =TEST /AFTER:17:00
[BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST 231, LIMIT 0:05:00]
4. Modify the processing time of job TEST, identifying the job
by its request number:
.QUEUE INP: /REQUESTID:231= /AFTER:16:30 /MODIFY
[1 JOB MODIFIED]
2-280
SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
5. Cancel the batch job TEST:
.QUEUE INP: TEST= /KILL
[1 JOB CANCELED]
.
6. Display a list of all the entries in all the queues:
.QUEUE<RET>
Event Queue:
Type Req# Expiration Description
-------- ------- ------------------ ----------------------
*BILCLS 9 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss Prime time rates end
USGFIL 6 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss Usage file closure
OPRFIL 7 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss ORION log file closure
BILCLS 8 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss Discount rates end
There are 4 events in the queue (1 in progress)
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time Core User
-------- ----- -------- ----- ------------------------
MCOFIL 12 00:05:00 512 SPIDER [30,5653]
/After: dd-mmm-yy hh:mm
SJH 10 00:04:00 512 SPIDER [30,5653]
/After: dd-mmm-yy hh:mm
CHKUSR 22 00:05:00 512 LEO [10,6056]
/After: dd-mmm-yy hh:mm
MAIL 24 00:15:00 512 NED [30,5674]
/After: dd-mmm-yy hh:mm
There are 4 jobs in the queue (none in progress);
00:29:00 runtime
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ----- ------- -----------------------
* LLINKS 588 1798 DAVENPORT [10,6026] On Unit:0
/Dest:JUNIPR
Started at 16:31:09
RSX20F 221 924 M.J.MAROTTA [27,5434] /Lower
There is 2 jobs in the queue (1 in progress); 2722 pages
2-281
SYSTEM COMMANDS
R Command
R Command
Function
The R command loads a core image from the system device (SYS:)
and starts it at the location specified within the file (.JBSA in
the Job Data Area. See the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) This
command is the same as RUN SYS:file.ext. The R command is used
to run a system program that does not have an operating system
command to run it.
This command clears all user core. However, programs should not
count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas of
core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, programs should
be self-initializing). This action allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without another R command.
Format
R file.EXE[directory] core/switch
Where: file.EXE is the file name of a file stored on the SYS:
file structure.
NOTE
Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH, .SHR) can be
run by the R command. However, .EXE files are
recommended over SAVE files.
[directory] is a directory specification. If a
directory specification is present in the command
string, it overrides the assumed SYS: device.
Directory paths are described in Section 1.14.
core is the amount of core needed to run the program.
If you do not specify core, the default is the minimum
amount of core needed to load the program into memory.
If you do not specify an argument, the program
currently in memory is run.
2-282
SYSTEM COMMANDS
R Command
/switch is one of the following options:
/START:n,,addr Specifies the octal section number (n)
and address (addr) at which the core
image starts. Valid section numbers
are 0-37, octal.
/USE:n Specifies the octal section number (n)
in which the core image runs.
Characteristics
Destroys your core image.
Example
Run the SYS:SETSRC.EXE program
.R SETSRC<RET>
SETSRC prompt.
*^C
Use CTRL/C to exit.
.
2-283
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REASSIGN Command
REASSIGN Command
Function
The REASSIGN command passes a device assignment from one job to
another job. Both restricted and unrestricted devices can be
reassigned. When you specify a DECtape in this command, the
system clears the copy of the directory currently in memory. The
next time you refer to the directory, a new copy is read from
tape into memory. However, the logical name that has been
assigned is not reassigned unless you reassign the device to your
own job.
Format
REASSIGN dev:job
Where: dev: is the physical or logical name of the device to
be reassigned. This argument is required. See Section
1.9.1 for a description of device names.
job is the number of the job to which the device is to
be reassigned. If no job is specified, the device is
reassigned to your job. This is useful when you want
to force the next DECtape directory reference to come
from the tape instead of core.
You can reassign a device using the logical name only if your job
and the job to which the device is to be reassigned have the same
project-programmer number, or you have operator privileges
(logged in under [1,2] or logged in as OPR).
Associated Messages
If the job number you specify is out of the range of legal job
numbers, the monitor prints:
?NOT A JOB
If no arguments are included in the REASSIGN command, the monitor
prints:
?NOT ENOUGH ARGS
If the device specified is not assigned to your job, the monitor
prints:
?CAN'T BE REASSIGNED
2-284
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REASSIGN Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Will not function during device I/O.
Restrictions
Your job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.
Disk and spooled devices cannot be reassigned.
Example
Assign a device to a job.
.ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
CDR261 ASSIGNED
A SYSTAT of your PPN shows you are running two jobs.
.SYS [,]<RET>
13 31 SYSTAT 19+SPY RN 12$
19 DET SETSRC 30+4 ^C SW
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
CDR261 13 AS
The card reader is assigned to job 13.
Reassign the device to job 19.
.REASSIGN CDR:19<RET>
SYSTAT shows that the reassignment was successful.
.SYS [,]<RET>
13 31 SYSTAT 24+SPY RN 12$
19 DET SETSRC 30+4 ^C SW 1
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB WHY LOGICAL
CDR261 19 AS
.
2-285
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REATTACH Command
REATTACH Command
Function
The REATTACH command transfers your job from one terminal to
another. Unlike the ATTACH command, REATTACH does not require a
password or that the terminal be of the same type that LOGIN
recognizes to allow access to the system.
Formats
REATTACH
REATTACH terminal-name/switch
REATTACH line-number/switch
Where: terminal-name is a device name of the form TTYnnn[:].
line-number is the nnn portion of the terminal-name.
/switch is optional. The only switch for REATTACH is:
/HELP:keyword Prints the HELP file. Valid keywords
are ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT. The
ARGUMENTS keyword displays a list of
valid switches and arguments. The
SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
switches without detailed information.
The TEXT keyword displays the full HELP
text. TEXT is the default keyword.
/HELP may be abbreviated to /H.
Characteristics
Does not destroy the core image of either job.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions
Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.
Batch programs cannot use this command.
2-286
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REATTACH Command
Example
Enter the command REATTACH.
.REATTACH TTY56<RET> .
If you do not enter the terminal-name or line-number, the system
will prompt you.
2-287
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REENTER Command
REENTER Command
Function
The REENTER command restarts a program at an alternate entry
point. You must write the alternate entry point into your
program. The REENTER command is used for a partial
reinitialization of the program.
The REENTER command copies the saved program counter (PC) value
into .JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry point
specified in .JBREN (you must set it or have it set in your
program). All Job Data Area locations are described in the
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
If the job was executing a monitor call when it was interrupted
(that is, at monitor level but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP
mode), the monitor continues the job until the monitor call is
completed and then traps to the REENTER address in .JBREN. If
the job is in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode, the trap to the
REENTER address occurs immediately and .JBOPC contains the
address of the monitor call.
If the job is at user level, the trap occurs immediately.
Therefore, it is always possible to continue the interrupted
program after trapping by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.
Format
REENTER
Associated Commands
The START command is used for complete reinitialization of a
program.
The CONTINUE command is used when you want to continue the
program without reinitialization.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
2-288
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REENTER Command
Example
Run the SYSTAT program for job 35:
.SYS 35<RET>
35 20,641 TTY45 SOS 12+24 T1 7#
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
Reenter the program:
.REENTER<RET>
35 20,641 TTY45 SOS 12+24 T1 0 2#
TOTAL KCS USED = 2 AVERAGE KCS=2
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
.
2-289
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RENAME Command
RENAME Command
Function
The RENAME command changes one or more attributes of the file
specification of files on disk or DECtape. See Section 1.9 for a
description of file specifications.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
Format
RENAME file-spec=file-spec,file-spec=file-spec,...
Where: the new file-spec is placed first, to the left of the
equal sign (=).
the old file-spec is placed at the right of the equal
sign (=).
Device and file-structure names cannot be different for old and
new file-specs. If you specify the device name in the new
file-spec, that device is the default for the old file-spec. You
can use RENAME to change the protection code of a file by
specifying the protection codes in the file-specs.
The directory name remains effective throughout the command line,
but you can specify a different directory name to change the
directory of a file. RENAME accepts wildcard constructions.
If the new file name is specified without an extension, the file
will not have an extension.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
2-290
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RENAME Command
Example
Show the file named PROG.
.DIR PROG.*<RET>
PROG EXE 68 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:[27,5434]
Rename PROG to be PRGRM.
.RENAME PRGRM.EXE=PROG.EXE<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:PROG.EXE
Show the file named PRGRM.
.DIR PRGRM.*<RET>
PRGRM EXE 68 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:[27,5434]
.
2-291
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RESOURCES Command
RESOURCES Command
Function
The RESOURCES command prints the names of all available devices
(except terminals and pseudo-terminals), all file structures, all
physical units not in file structures, and all running CPUs.
Format
RESOURCES
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
.RESOURCES<RET>
BLKX,RENG,DSKA,BLKB,DSKP,AP10,DSKC,BLKK,DSKR,DSKZ,LOKI,DSKT,
SLAT,SIXT,DSKB,BLKY,RPA2,RPA4,RPB3,RPB6,RPP2,RPP3,RPG1,LPT261,
DTA0,1,2,3,MTA0,1,2,4,5,MTE1,MTF0,1,2,MTC0,MTD0,1,CPU0,1
.
2-292
SYSTEM COMMANDS
REWIND Command
REWIND Command
Function
The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape.
Format
REWIND dev:
Where: dev: is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).
See Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Runs the PIP program.
Examples
1. Rewind DECtape unit 4:
.REWIND DTA4:<RET>
.
2. Rewind magnetic tape unit 1:
.REWIND MTA1:<RET>
.
2-293
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RUN Command
RUN Command
Function
The RUN command starts execution of a program. It loads a core
image from a retrievable storage device and starts the program at
the location specified within the file (.JBSA).
RUN looks for programs stored in files with the extension .EXE.
Use SAVE or SSAVE to create the executable file.
The RUN command clears all your core. However, programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, the programs
should be self-initializing). This allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without having to issue
another RUN command.
Format
RUN dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch
Where: dev: is the logical or physical name of the device
containing the core image. The default device name is
DSK:.
file.EXE is the name of the file that contains the
program you want to run.
NOTE
Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH., .SHR) can be
run with the RUN command. However, the .EXE
format is recommended over the .SAV format.
[directory] is the directory name, which is required
only if the core image file is located in a disk area
other than yours. If a directory specification is
issued in the command string and the device is SYS:,
the specified directory overrides the assumed device
(SYS:).
core is the amount of core memory if this amount is
different from either the minimum core needed to load
the program, or the core argument of the SAVE command
that saved the file.
2-294
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RUN Command
If core is greater than the minimum low segment size
and is less than the sum of the high segment and the
minimum low segment size, then the core assignment is
the low segment size.
If core is greater than the sum of the minimum low
segment and the high segment size, then the core
assignment is the size of both the low and high
segments.
Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words
or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
P, respectively. For example, 2P represents 2 pages or
1024 words. If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words)
is assumed.
/switch is one of the following options:
/START:n,,addr Specifies the octal section number (n)
and address (addr) at which the core
image starts. Valid section numbers
are 0-37, octal.
/USE:n Specifies the octal section number (n)
in which a core image executes.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Example
Type a test program.
.TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 69
69 FORMAT ('TESTING EXECUTION')
END
Load the program.
.LOAD PROG<RET>
LINK: LOADING
[LNKCXT PROG EXECUTION]
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.12
EXIT
2-295
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RUN Command
Save the program, creating an executable file.
.SAVE<RET>
PROG SAVED
Run the program.
.RUN PROG<RET>
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.07
EXIT
.
2-296
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SAVE Command
SAVE Command
Function
The SAVE and SSAVE commands create executable image files from
programs that are loaded in core memory. SAVE creates
non-sharable files with the extension .EXE. SSAVE creates
sharable files with the extension .EXE.
After you use SAVE or SSAVE to create an .EXE file, you can run
the program with the RUN command.
Format
SAVE dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch
Where: dev: is the device on which the core image file is to
be written. The default device name is DSK:. The
colon following the device name is required if a device
is specified.
file is the name to be assigned to the core image file.
The default file name is your job's current name as set
by your last R, RUN, or GET command; the last command
that ran a program (for example, DIRECT); or the last
SETNAM monitor call.
.EXE is the default file extension. This argument is
optional.
[directory] is the location on the disk area where the
core image file is to be written.
core is the amount of core in which the program is to
be run. This value is stored in JOBDAT as the job's
core area, (.JBCOR) and is used by subsequent RUN and
GET commands. This argument is optional.
You can specify core arguments in units of 1024 words
or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
P respectively. For example, 2P represents 2 pages or
1024 words. If you do not specify K or P, K (1024
words) is assumed.
If core is omitted, only the number of blocks required
by the core image area (as explained in the RUN command
description) is assumed.
2-297
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SAVE Command
/switch is the following option:
/START:n,,addr Allows you to save a multi-section
program with a starting address in
section n, address addr.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not operate while I/O is in progress.
Requires memory.
Can save multiple high segments. (SSAVE cannot.)
Example
Load a program.
.LOAD PROG<RET>
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
Save the file with SAVE.
.SAVE PROG<RET>
PROG SAVED
Use DIRECTORY to see the new .EXE file.
.DIR PROG<RET>
PROG FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
PROG REL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
PROG EXE 68 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 131 BLOCKS IN 5 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Run the program.
.RUN PROG<RET>
THIS IS PROGRAM OUTPUT
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.07
EXIT
.
2-298
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SCHED Command
SCHED Command
Function
The SCHED command prints the schedule bits set by the operator.
You can obtain this information before you log in to determine
the use of the system (for example, regular timesharing or batch
jobs only). The schedule bits are as follows:
Bits Meaning
0000 Regular timesharing.
0001 No further LOGINS allowed except from CTY.
0002 No further LOGINS from remote terminals,
and no answering of data sets.
0004 Batch jobs only.
0010 No remote terminals.
0100 Device mounts can be done without operator
intervention.
0200 Unspooling allowed.
0400 No operator coverage.
1000 No automatic downline loading of nodes.
Format
SCHED
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require that you be logged in.
2-299
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SCHED Command
Examples
1. Regular timesharing.
.SCHED<RET>
000000
.
2. No operator coverage.
.SCHED<RET>
000400
.
3. No LOGINs allowed from local or remote terminals and data
sets are not answered.
.SCHED<RET>
000002
.
4. Regular timesharing, but no operator coverage. Device mounts
can be accomplished without operator intervention.
.SCHED<RET>
000500
.
2-300
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SEND Command
SEND Command
Function
The SEND command provides one-way interterminal communication. A
single line of information is transmitted from the initiating
terminal to the terminal specified in the SEND command string.
The recipient of the SEND receives the terminal line number of
the sender as well as the message.
A busy test is made on a single-destination message before the
message is sent, unless the sender or receiver of the message is
OPR or a job logged in as [1,2]. The receiver of the message is
considered busy if the terminal is not at monitor command level.
If the receiving terminal is busy, the sender receives the
message BUSY and the information is not sent. However, the
receiving terminal always receives the message if it has the TTY
NO GAG bit set (see the SET TTY NO GAG command).
If the receiving terminal is hardwired and turned off, the
information appears to have been sent because the software cannot
detect an OFF condition on hardwired terminals. Terminals in
IMAGE and Packed Image Mode (PIM) mode do not receive messages.
Formats
SEND TTYn: text
SEND JOB n text
Where: TTYn: is any physical terminal name, including CTY:
(console terminal) and OPR:. If you specify OPR:, the
system sends the message to the operator's terminal at
the node to which your terminal is connected.
n is the job-number to which the message is to be sent.
text is the message to be transmitted.
The message is printed on the receiving terminal in the following
format:
;;TTYn: - text
Where: n is the sender's terminal number.
text is the message.
A bell sounds on the receiving terminal when the
2-301
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SEND Command
message is printed.
2-302
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SEND Command
You can specify an operator on a particular node by entering the
terminal identifier in the form:
OPRxx:
Where: xx is the number of the operator's node.
See Example 4 below.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Restrictions
The SEND command is not available to batch jobs.
Examples
1. Send a message to TTY62:
.SEND TTY62: YOU HAVE THE SYSTEM STAND-ALONE<RET>
.
2. Ask your operator to write-enable a DECtape drive:
.SEND OPR: PLEASE WRITE-ENABLE DTA3:<RET>
.
3. Send a message to job 69:
.SEND JOB 69 THE TAPE IS WRITE ENABLED<RET>
.
4. Send a message to the operator on node 17:
.SEND OPR17: LPT171 UPPER CASE ONLY?<RET>
.
2-303
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SESSION Command
SESSION Command
Function
The SESSION command allows you to change the account and remark
strings of your job. If your system is not running with account
validation, the SESSION command has no effect. If your system is
running with account validation, you can use the SESSION command
to change the billing profile of your job.
For example, you may have several projects, each of which is
charged to a separate account. Therefore, several account
strings are valid for your PPN. The SESSION command allows you
to change the account string for your job without logging out and
logging in again. Thus, all subsequent charges will be made to
the new account.
If account validation is enabled, the string you type must match
one of the accounts assigned to your PPN. The string must match
in case (lower or uppercase), although this feature can be
changed by the system administrator.
Formats
SESSION<RET>
ACCOUNT:string<RET>
REMARK:text
This format prompts you for the required information. If either
string is not required, you are not prompted for it.
Where: string is the account string for the account to which
you want any subsequent charges to be made.
text is the remark string. You can type anything here
to identify your work. The remark string is limited to
39 characters.
2-304
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SESSION Command
SESSION/switches
This format allows you to specify one or both strings in the
command line. The valid switches are:
/ACCOUNT:"string" Specifies the account string for the
account to which all subsequent charges
should be made. The account string must
be enclosed in quotation marks if it
contains any nonalphanumeric characters.
The account string is case sensitive.
/HELP Prints the HELP text, listing available
switches and how to use them.
/REMARK:"text" Specifies the remark string for
subsequent charges. You can type
anything for the string ("text") up to
39 characters. The remark string must
be enclosed in quotation marks if it
contains any nonalphanumeric characters.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level when all required
information is supplied.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1. The following example shows the procedure for changing the
account string to DATA-AQ. In this case, the account string
is required for the job, but the remark string is not
required.
.SESSION<RET>
ACCOUNT:DATA-AQ<RET>
.
2. The following example shows the procedure for supplying both
the account and remark strings in the command line:
.SESSION/ACCOUNT:"DATA-AQ"/REMARK:"SALES RESEARCH"<RET>
.
2-305
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BLOCKSIZE Command
SET BLOCKSIZE Command
Function
The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize (in words) for
the specified magnetic tape.
Format
SET BLOCKSIZE dev:nnnn
Where: dev: is either the physical device name, written in
the format MTxn:, or the logical name previously
associated with the device. The device must be
assigned to your job. This argument is necessary. See
Section 1.9.1 for information about device names.
nnnn is a decimal number between 3 and 4094 designating
the block size for this magnetic tape. No additional
checking is done for the legality of the specified
number in addition to the check for the maximum 4094
and a minimum of 3. This argument is required.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Assign the logical name WEEK2 to magnetic tape unit 4.
.ASSIGN MTA4:WEEK2<RET>
MTA4 ASSIGNED
Set the block size of magnetic tape unit 4 to 2000.
.SET BLOCKSIZE WEEK2: 2000<RET>
.
2-306
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command
SET BREAK Command
Function
The SET BREAK command is used during the debugging process on a
KL10 processor only. It is useful when the program that is being
debugged:
o Will not fail when DDT has been loaded.
o Destroys DDT when DDT is loaded.
o Destroys the contents of a memory location at an
unpredictable point during program execution.
It is possible to break when the specified location is read from,
written into, and/or fetched. It is also possible to break on
monitor references to items in your address space. This is
useful when the monitor stores or retrieves arguments to/from
unexpected locations in your address space because of erroneous
monitor call argument lists.
If you are breaking on a WRITE condition, the WRITE condition
causing the break will not have been executed. Therefore, the
instruction located at PC and all operands should be examined
before continuing program execution.
Formats
SET BREAK
SET BREAK AT addr ON condition AFTER x,...
SET BREAK AT n,,addr ON condition AFTER x,...
SET BREAK NO condition
SET BREAK NONE
Where: AT, ON, and AFTER are optional portions of the command
line.
addr is an octal number in the range 0-777777,
representing a user virtual address. The address is
not necessary.
condition is one or more reasons for allowing the break
to occur. The condition is not necessary. The
condition arguments are listed below.
2-307
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command
x is the number of times the sequence should run before
the break occurs. The variable is any decimal number
from 1 to 511.
n is a section number ranging from 0-37 octal. The
commas separating n and addr are optional.
Multiple conditions can be specified within one command; these
conditions are separated from one another by commas. The
possible conditions that can be specified are:
READ Breaks if the contents of addr are read by the program.
This condition causes a break to occur on a
read-modify-write as well as on a read.
WRITE Breaks if the location specified by addr is written
into.
EXECUTE Breaks if an instruction is fetched from the location
specified in the command string.
ALL Breaks if the location specified in the command string
is read from (READ), written into (WRITE), or fetched
from (EXECUTE).
MUUO Breaks on monitor references as qualified by READ,
WRITE, and/or EXECUTE.
If all three break conditions are to be specified, you can
include the word ALL in the command line, replacing the command
argument string: WRITE,READ,EXECUTE. When you want breaks on
monitor references for all three break conditions, you can
include one of the following command argument strings in the
command line: either MUUO,ALL or MUUO,READ,WRITE,EXECUTE.
If you use SET BREAK with no conditions, the previously specified
conditions are used. If there was no previous SET BREAK command,
ALL is assumed. When issuing a SET BREAK command without
specifying any address, the conditions included in the command
line are ORed with existing break conditions and the previously
specified address is used. If there are no existing break
conditions, 0 is the default address.
In summary, break addresses remain in effect until changed; and
break conditions remain in effect until removed.
If you want to remove a break condition, the condition to be
removed can be specified in the following command:
SET BREAK NO condition
2-308
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command
If all existing break conditions are to be removed, the following
command line can be issued:
SET BREAK NONE
This command will remove all existent break conditions, but will
not remove a previously specified address. An example of setting
a default break location is:
SET BREAK 1000 ON READ,WRITE,EXECUTE
SET BREAK NO READ
SET BREAK NONE
SET BREAK EXECUTE ;1000 IS DEFAULT BREAK LOCATION
When a break occurs, one of the messages:
%ADDRESS BREAK AT USER PC xxxxxx
%ADDRESS BREAK AT EXEC xxxxxx UUO AT USER xxxxxx
will be printed, and your terminal will be left at monitor level.
The second message is produced when MUUO was included in the SET
BREAK command line. If you type:
.CONTINUE
the program will continue execution at the instruction that
caused the break.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Can be used on KL10 processors only.
Does not destroy your job's core image.
Examples
1. Break if the contents of 1000 are read or written by the
program.
.SET BREAK AT 1000 ON READ,WRITE<RET>
.
2. Break if the instruction is fetched from the default
location, in this case 1000.
.SET BREAK EXECUTE<RET>
.
2-309
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command
3. Remove existing break conditions.
.SET BREAK NONE<RET>
.
4. Break at any EXECUTE or WRITE monitor references.
.SET BREAK 1000 MUUO,EXECUTE,WRITE<RET>
.
2-310
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET CDR Command
SET CDR Command
Function
The SET CDR command sets the file name of the next file to be
read by the card reader. The card file must be in your UFD.
This command is usually unnecessary, but allows you to change the
order of jobs being spooled. The batch controller uses this
command to read card decks.
Format
SET CDR file-name
Where: file-name must be one to three characters; the
extension is assumed to be .CDR.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Create a file for output.
.TYPE FOO.CDR<RET>
THIS IS THE OUTPUT
It may be necessary to spool the card reader.
.SET SPOOL CDR<RET>
The file FOO will be the next to be read by the card reader.
.SET CDR FOO<RET>
Type the output from the card reader on your terminal.
.TYPE CDR:<RET>
THIS IS THE OUTPUT
.
2-311
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET CPU Command
SET CPU Command
Function
The SET CPU command allows privileged users to change the
processors where jobs can run. It is used in a multiprocessing
system to specify whether the programs that run under the job can
be processed on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or either
CPU. The job remains with the specified CPU until:
o another SET CPU command with a different specification is
given,
o a KJOB command is issued,
o a privileged user's program overrides the SET CPU command by
issuing the SETUUO with a different specification.
If the SETUUO overrides the command, the specification given in
the monitor call remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT monitor
call or another SETUUO with a different specification is
executed. When an EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
job reverts to the specification given in the last SET CPU
command. When you log in, the CPU specification is usually set
to ALL. The schedulers for each CPU compete for jobs with the
ALL specification so that the load is dynamically balanced
between CPUs. Therefore, this command is generally not needed
but is provided in case you want to change the CPU specification.
Formats
SET CPU CPxn
Adds the specified CPU to your job's CPU specification.
SET CPU NO CPxn
Removes the specified CPU from your job's CPU specification.
SET CPU ALL
Adds all of the CPUs to your job's CPU specification.
2-312
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET CPU Command
SET CPU ONLY CPxn
Changes the CPU specification so that it includes only the
specified CPU.
Where: x is:
U designating a logical name,
L designating a KL10 processor,
n is a decimal number from 0 to the number of
processors in the system.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your job's core image.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bit 5 (JP.CCC) of the privilege word, .GTPRV.
Examples
1. Your job can run only on CPU1.
.SET CPU ONLY CPU1<RET>
.
2. Your job can run on CPU1.
.SET CPU CPU1<RET>
.
2-313
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command
Function
The SET DDT BREAKPOINT command enables the DDT breakpoint
facility. If the breakpoint facility is on and if DDT is loaded
with the program, you can type CTRL/D to interrupt program
execution and use DDT to examine the state of the program. When
the facility is turned off, CTRL/D is passed to the program.
Format
SET DDT BREAKPOINT argument
Where: the word BREAKPOINT may be omitted.
argument may be ON, OFF, or omitted. If the argument is
omitted, SET DDT reports the breakpoint status without
changing it.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at user level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Restriction
Note that CTRL/D is meaningful only to DDT and VMDDT. It will
not have this effect on programs loaded with a compiler-specific
debugger like FORDDT.
2-314
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command
Example
Enable the DDT breakpoint facility.
.SET DDT ON<RET>
[Control-D breakpoint facility is turned on]
Debug a MACRO program that increments and prints a number, once
per second. Use the DDT command $G to start program execution.
Then type CTRL/D to stop the program and examine the current
location with DDT. Then type $P to continue execution. Use
CTRL/Z to exit to monitor level. Note that CTRL/D is shown here,
although it does not echo on your terminal.
.DEBUG BPT.MAC<RET>
MACRO: BPT
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB DDT execution]
DDT
$G
This program will increment a count, once per second.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
<CTRL/D>
$0B>>LOOP#+12/ JRST LOOP# $P
11
12
13
14
<CTRL/D>
$0B>LOOP#+1/ SLEEP 1, ^Z
.
2-315
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command
Function
The SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the disk buffer size for the
job. Disk I/O can be improved by increasing the disk buffer
size, but buffers increase the size of the job.
With the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command, each added block gives you
200 octal words of disk buffer. For example, SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
5 sets the buffer size to 5 blocks (1200 octal words). SET
DEFAULT BIGBUF 0 defaults the buffer size to one block. The
maximum value for SET DEFAULT BIGBUF is 31. When big buffers are
in use, TOPS-10 defaults to a value of four blocks (1000 octal
words).
Because the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the buffer size for
the job, the buffer size will remain the same until the user logs
out, or changes it by using the command again.
NOTE
In order to use big buffers, the program that is
doing disk I/O must be written to utilize the
buffer size. Otherwise, this command has no
effect on your job except to increase job size.
Format
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF n
Where: n is 0 through 31 decimal. This value indicates the
number of blocks (200 octal words) per buffer.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
Set the disk buffer size to 5 blocks.
.SET DEFAULT BIGBUF 5<RET>
.
2-316
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command
Function
The SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command changes the number of buffers in
your memory area. The default number of buffers for disk is 6;
for all other devices, the default number is 2. Use this command
to increase or decrease the number of memory buffers that your
program will use.
A larger number of buffers will usually allow your program to run
faster. A smaller number of buffers will allow you to run larger
programs.
NOTE
If you increase the number of buffers, it may
interfere with the operation of overlay programs
and other large programs.
Format
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS n
Where: n is the number of disk buffers you want your program
to use. The argument is a decimal number between 0 and
511. When n is 0, the number of buffers is set to the
system default, which is 6 for disk, and 2 for all
other devices.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Set the number of buffers to 4.
.SET DEFAULT BUFFERS 4<RET>
.
2-317
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command
Function
The SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command sets a default protection code
for files you create during the job. Any value you set with this
command overrides the system's standard protection code. Your
system administrator sets the system's standard protection code,
which is usually <055> or <057>. The default protection code set
by using this command will be in effect for any of your programs.
Formats
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn>
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION ON
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF
Where: <nnn> is the value that you can specify as the
protection code for any files you might create.
ON tells the system to use the protection code you
specified previously, even though you may have since
used the SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF command.
OFF tells the system to use the system's standard
protection code when you create files, even if you have
issued a SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn> command.
Associated Commands
PRESERVE - This command can be used to assign a protection code
of <157> or <155> to any or all of existing files.
PROTECT - This command can be used to assign any protection code
to any or all of existing files.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
2-318
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command
Example
Create a file with TECO.
.MAKE PROTEC.TST<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Use DIRECTORY to see the protection of the file.
.DIR PROTEC.TST<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
Change the default protection code.
.SET DEFAULT PROTECT <175><RET>
Create another file with TECO.
.MAKE PROTEC.TS1<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
DIRECTORY shows both files.
.DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy
Note the old protection and the new protection.
Turn the specified protection off.
.SET DEFAULT PROTECT OFF<RET>
Create a third file.
.MAKE PROTEC.TS2<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
A DIRECTORY shows the 3 files.
.DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS2 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy
Note the protection codes.
2-319
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command
Turn the protection code on.
.SET DEFAULT PROTECT ON<RET>
Create a fourth file.
.MAKE PROTECT.TS3<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
DIRECTORY shows the 4 files.
.DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
PROTEC TS1 <175> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS2 <055> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS3 <175> dd-mmm-yy
.
Note the protection codes.
2-320
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFER Command
SET DEFER Command
Function
The SET DEFER command causes all output requests (except disk and
tape output) generated by programs run by your job to be
deferred. These requests will be processed when you log out.
Any files that are generated implicitly by a system program
(DIRECT, CREF) and automatically output to the line printer, card
punch, plotter, or paper tape punch will be held by QUEUE until
you log out. When you log out, the files are output to the
appropriate devices, or spooled for output, if spooling is set.
Deferred queuing can also be set by logging in with the /DEFER
switch. This function is the default for batch jobs.
To prevent all future requests from being deferred, use SET
NODEFER.
To queue any deferred requests that are being held for your job,
use the appropriate queue command (CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT, QUEUE, or
TPUNCH) followed by two switches: /DEFERRED and /CREATE. To
delete the deferred requests without output, use /DEFERRED and
/KILL. /DEFERRED releases any requests that are being held for
your job, and processes them according to the other switch that
you specify.
Format
SET DEFER
Causes all following output requests from programs to be held
until you log out.
SET NODEFER
Causes all following output requests to be handled immediately.
This is the default function for timesharing jobs.
Characteristics
Does not destroy your job's core image.
2-321
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFER Command
Example
The following example illustrates the use of the SET DEFER
command.
Set output requests to be deferred (held) until you log out.
Also, if the appropriate devices for your job are not yet
spooled, use the SET SPOOL command to spool them. (See the SET
SPOOL command.)
.SET DEFER<RET>
.SET SPOOL ALL<RET>
Compile a FORTRAN program, using the /CREF switch to obtain
cross-referenced listing files that can be processed by the CREF
program.
.COMPILE NUMBER.FOR/CREF<RET>
FORTRAN: NUMBER
MAIN.
When compilation is complete, use the CREF command to run CREF.
When deferred spooling is not set, the CREF listing is sent
directly to the line printer.
.CREF<RET>
CREF: NUMBER
After CREF is finished, check your entries in the line printer
queue. The files produced by CREF are deferred, so there are no
entries in the queue from your job.
.PRINT/CHECK<RET>
[THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]
Use the PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE command to print the CREF listings.
The files are released and then spooled.
.PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NUMBER QUEUED, REQUEST #448, LIMIT 6]
2-322
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFER Command
Check the printer queue again. The CREF listings are queued.
.PRINT/CHECK<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
JOB NAME REQ# LIMIT USER
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
NUMBER 448 6 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)
Using SET NODEFER, stop having requests deferred.
.SET NODEFER<RET>
Using the DIRECTORY command, obtain a file that contains a list
of the files in the directory. Using the .LST extension ensures
that the file will be deleted from your directory after it is
printed.
.DIRECT FILES.LST=/L<RET>
TOTAL OF 42 FILES
Check the printer queue. Your job now has two printer requests
in the queue.
.PRINT/CHECK<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
JOB NAME REQ# LIMIT USER
-------- ---- ----- ---------------------------
NUMBER 448 6 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
FILES 449 6 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
THERE ARE 2 JOBS IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)
.
2-323
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DENSITY Command
SET DENSITY Command
Function
The SET DENSITY command sets a default density (bits/inch) for
the specified magnetic tape. You must have the device assigned
to your job to use SET DENSITY.
Format
SET DENSITY dev:density
Where: dev: is the physical or logical name of the magnetic
tape device for which the density is to be set. See
Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.
density is one of the following:
200 bits/inch (8.1 rows/mm)
556 bits/inch (22.5 rows/mm)
800 bits/inch (32.2 rows/mm)
1600 bits/inch (65.3 rows/mm)
6250 bits/inch (255.5 rows/mm)
Both arguments are required.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Associated Messages
If the density argument is not compatible with the list above, an
error message is printed:
?ILLEGAL DENSITY FOR DRIVE
Example
Set the density of magnetic-tape unit 5 to 556.
.SET DENSITY MTA5:556<RET>
.
2-324
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DSKFUL Command
SET DSKFUL Command
Function
The SET DSKFUL command controls the treatment of your job when it
is attempting output and there is either not enough space
available on the file structure being referenced or your quota
for that structure is exceeded.
Formats
SET DSKFUL ERROR
Stops output and an error condition is passed to the
program. Most programs respond to the error condition by
issuing an error message and returning your job to monitor
level without any opportunity for you to continue.
SET DSKFUL PAUSE
Stops output and suspends execution of the program. An
error message is printed on your terminal and control of the
job is returned to the monitor. Generally, you should use
the SEND command at this point to request assistance from
the operator.
Execution of the program can be resumed with the CONTINUE
command as long as you do not issue a command that destroys
the core image of the interrupted program. However, the
program will again be stopped if the problem of insufficient
disk space or insufficient quota has not been corrected in
the interim.
The default setting is ERROR unless you specify otherwise as a
switch to LOGIN.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
.SET DSKFUL PAUSE<RET>
.
2-325
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DSKPRI Command
SET DSKPRI Command
Function
The SET DSKPRI command allows privileged users to set the
priority for their job's disk operations (data transfers and head
positionings). The standard priority is 0, and the range of
permissible values is -3 to +3. This means that a priority lower
than the standard can be specified as well as one higher than the
standard. The priority specified applies to all disk I/O
channels currently open or subsequently opened whose priority has
not been explicitly set with a DISK. monitor call. (See the
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) The priority specified in the SET
DSKPRI command remains in effect until one of the following
occurs:
o Another SET DSKPRI command is given with a different
priority.
o A KJOB command is issued.
o Your program overrides the SET DSKPRI command by issuing a
DISK. monitor call with a different priority.
Format
SET DSKPRI n
Where: n is a decimal number from -3 to +3 indicating the
priority to be associated with your job's disk
operations. When n is 0, the priority is the normal
timesharing priority.
Characteristics
The SET DSKPRI command:
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 1 and 2 of the privilege word, .GTPRV. These two bits
specify an octal number from 0-3. You are always allowed a 0
priority.
2-326
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DSKPRI Command
Example
Set your priority to 2.
.SET DSKPRI 2<RET>
.
2-327
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET FORMAT Command
SET FORMAT Command
Function
The SET FORMAT command sets the mode of a tape.
Format
SET FORMAT MTxn:mode
Where: MTxn: is the physical or logical name of the magnetic
tape device for which the mode is to be set. See Section
1.9.1 for a description of device names.
mode is one of the following:
ANSI (for ANSI-ASCII)
BYTE
DUMP (for COREDUMP)
INDUST (for industry compatible)
SIXBIT
SYSTEM (for system default)
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy core image.
Example
Set the format of MTA1 to ANSI mode.
.ASSIGN MTA1<RET>
MTA1 assigned
.SET FORMAT MTA1:ANSI<RET>
.
2-328
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HOST Command
SET HOST Command
Function
The SET HOST command connects you to another host computer on the
same DECnet or ANF-10 network.
Using the SET HOST command, you can remain at one terminal and
switch the terminal connection from one system to a different
system.
For ANF-10 networks, the node you specify must be a network node
where you can run LOGIN or an equivalent program. The SET HOST
command cannot be used to connect to a node that does not have a
command interpreter. Use the NETWORK command with the /MCR
switch to determine the nodes in the network that have command
interpreters. MCR is a name that is used by the NETWORK program
to signify a command interpreter.
Once a terminal has been connected to a particular ANF-10 system
through SET HOST, it remains connected to that system until
another SET HOST command is issued from that terminal. For
example: you log in to a system, issue a SET HOST command to
KS4101 (another host system), do your work, and then log off the
system. Then, when another user uses your terminal, he too will
be running on the KS4101 host system until he issues another SET
HOST command or until the system is reloaded.
On DECnet, when you SET HOST to another system and then log off,
you do not remain connected, as you would with ANF-10, but would
drop back to your original system.
Format
SET HOST node-id
Where: node-id is an identifier of the node to which you want
to connect. It can be a node-name or a node-number.
2-329
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HOST Command
Characteristics
1. If you SET HOST to ANF-10 nodes, the SET HOST command:
o Does not require LOGIN. However, if you are logged in,
your job is detached when your terminal is connected to
another system.
o Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
o Does not destroy your core image.
2. If you SET HOST to DECnet nodes, the SET HOST command:
o Requires LOGIN
o Places your terminal at user level.
o Destroys your core image.
o Runs CTHNRT.
Restriction
You cannot SET HOST from the TOPS-10 system through DECnet if you
used SET HOST to get to the TOPS-10 system over a DECnet link.
Associated Messages
If the specified node does not have a command interpreter, your
job remains at your current node and the system prints the
following message:
?NODE DOES NOT SUPPORT REMOTE TERMINALS
If the node you specified is not a recognizable node in the
network, your job remains at your current node and the system
prints the following message. This message would occur if the
specified node was not on line, the link between the systems is
down, or you misspelled the node name.
?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
If you omit the node-id argument, the system prints the following
error message:
?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
2-330
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HOST Command
Examples
1. You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10 node, identifying the
node by number:
.SET HOST 26 <RET>
[BC173B KL #1026/1042] hh:mm:ss TTY72 system 1026/1042
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 0
Please LOGIN or ATTACH
.
2. You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10 node, identifying the
node by name:
.SET HOST TWINKY<RET>
[Twinky KL702/21A] dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss TTY111 System 2197
Connected to Host TWINKY(77) via node KL1026(26) Line # 55
Please LOGIN or ATTACH
.
3. You SET HOST to a DECnet node, log in, and log out again.
Notice that after logging out you are returned automatically
to your original node.
.SET HOST QARRY<RET>
[Connected to VMS system QARRY::, using CTERM protocol]
[Type ^\,<RET> to return]
Username: FRANCINI<RET>
Password: <RET>
This is MicroVMS Version V_._ on node QARRY
Last interactive login on Thursday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:04
Last non-interactive login on Wednesday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:29
$
$ LOGOUT<RET>
FRANCINI logged out at DD-MMM-YYYY 15:31:07.28
[Connection closed by remote: User unbind request]
.
2-331
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HPQ Command
SET HPQ Command
Function
The SET HPQ command allows privileged users to place their jobs
in a high-priority run queue. When your job is in a
high-priority run queue, you can obtain a faster response than in
the normal timesharing queues. The job remains in the specified
high-priority queue until one of the following occurs:
o You issue another SET HPQ command specifying a different
high-priority queue.
o You log out.
o Your program overrides the SET HPQ command by issuing an HPQ
monitor call with a different value.
If an HPQ monitor call overrides the command, the level specified
in the monitor call remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT
monitor call or another HPQ monitor call with a different value
is executed. When an EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
job is returned to the high-priority queue specified in the last
SET HPQ command.
Format
SET HPQ n
Where: n is a decimal number from 0 to 15 indicating the
high-priority queue to be entered. When n is 0, the
queue is the normal timesharing queue. Queue numbers
from 1 to 15 are high-priority queues. The number of
high-priority queues is an installation parameter and
can be less than 15.
Associated Messages
If you are not privileged, the system responds with an error
message:
?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH
2-332
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HPQ Command
Characteristics
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 6 through 9 of the privilege word, .GTPRV. These four bits
specify an octal number from 0-17, which is the highest
high-priority queue you can attain.
Example
You try to set your run queue to 4.
.SET HPQ 4<RET>
?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH
Your job is placed in high-priority queue number 2.
.SET HPQ 2<RET>
.
2-333
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET PHYSICAL Command
SET PHYSICAL Command
Function
The SET PHYSICAL command sets the maximum current physical page
limit (CPPL) that your job can use, if the word LIMIT is included
in the command line. (CPPL is described in the TOPS-10 Monitor
Calls Manual.)
By including the word GUIDELINE in the command line, the SET
PHYSICAL command is used to establish a guideline for the
page-fault handler. The page-fault handler will then use the
specified figure as a guideline in determining when a program
will go virtual.
Format
SET PHYSICAL LIMIT nP or nK
GUIDELINE nP or nK
Where: LIMIT or GUIDELINE can be used in the command line.
The default is GUIDELINE.
K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
specified within the range 1 to 512P.
If the command SET PHYSICAL LIMIT is given with a 0
argument, the job will never go virtual.
NOTE
The monitor regards a limit as a set maximum
number. When the monitor reaches the specified
limit, it begins virtual handling. However,
the GUIDELINE argument allows the monitor to
use discretion in determining the page size.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
2-334
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET PHYSICAL Command
Examples
1. Check your core memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 512P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3669P
Change the physical guideline to 100 pages:
.SET PHYSICAL 100P<RET>
Show core assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 100P MAX LIMIT:510P)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3671P
2. Show core memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 512P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P
Set your physical limit to 100 pages:
.SET PHYSICAL LIMIT 100P<RET>
Show your memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 100P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P
2-335
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET RETRY Command
SET RETRY Command
Function
The SET RETRY command controls the function of the DX10 tape
drive controller. When retry is set, the controller recovers
from soft errors, and it reports both soft and hard errors in
SYS:ERROR.SYS. When retry is off, the controller does not
recover from soft errors and all errors are reported as hard
errors in ERROR.SYS.
Format
SET RETRY MTxn: ON
This format of the SET RETRY command sets the recovery
function. This is the default function of the controller.
SET RETRY MTxn: OFF
This format of the command turns off the recovery function.
Where: MTxn: is the individual device name of the magnetic
tape drive. If you have assigned a logical name to the
drive, you may substitute the logical name for the
device name.
Characteristics
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Does not affect your job's core image.
Example
The following example shows how the recovery function is set:
.SET RETRY MTA5: ON<RET>
.
2-336
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET SPOOL Command
SET SPOOL Command
Function
The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the
current list of devices being spooled for your job. Spooling is
the mechanism by which I/O to or from slow-speed devices is
simulated on disk. Devices capable of being spooled are the line
printer, the card punch, the card reader, the paper tape punch,
and the plotter.
Formats
SET SPOOL dev1:,dev2:,...,devn:
Adds the specified devices to your job's spool list.
SET SPOOL ALL
Places all spooling devices into the spool list.
SET SPOOL NONE
Clears the entire spool list.
SET SPOOL NO dev1,dev2,...,devn
Removes the specified devices from your job's spool list.
Where: dev1:,dev2:,...,devn: are the physical device names of
one or more devices to be added to or deleted from the
current spool list. These names can be taken from the
following list: CDP:, CDR:, LPT:, PLT:, PTP:. See
Section 1.9.1 for device name formats.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
2-337
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET SPOOL Command
Restrictions
To remove devices from your list of spooled devices, your job
must have one of the following:
o The privilege bit set in .GTPRV.
o Bit 28 (200 octal) set in the STATUS word by the operator SET
SCHED command.
o Logged in under [1,2].
Examples
1. Add the card punch to your list of spooled devices.
.SET SPOOL CDP:<RET>
.
2. Delete the line printer from your list of spooled devices.
.SET SPOOL NO LPT:<RET>
.
3. Clear your list of spooled devices.
.SET SPOOL NONE<RET>
.
2-338
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command
SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command
Function
The SET TERMINAL command (or TERMINAL command) is equivalent to
the SET TTY command. See the SET TTY command description for
more information.
2-339
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TIME Command
SET TIME Command
Function
The SET TIME command sets a CPU time limit for your job. When
your job reaches the time limit, the job stops, and a message is
printed on your terminal. You can continue your job by typing
CONTINUE, but no time limit is in effect unless it is reset.
Format
SET TIME n
Where: n is the number of seconds of CPU time that the job is
limited to. An argument of 0 turns the time limit off.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions
The SET TIME command is illegal in a batch job. A batch job has
its time limit set by the /TIME switch in the QUEUE or SUBMIT
command string or on the $JOB card.
Example
Create a program with an infinite loop.
.MAKE LOOP.FOR<RET>
*I10 CONTINUE<RET>
GO TO 10<RET>
END<RET>
<ESC><ESC>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Compile and load the program.
.LOAD LOOP<RET>
FORTRAN: LOOP
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
2-340
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TIME Command
Set the time limit to 5 seconds.
.SET TIME 5<RET>
Clear the incremental run time, so that the SET TIME command can
be checked.
.TIME<RET>
11.08
11.28
KILO-CORE-SEC=95
Start the program.
.START<RET>
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED<RET>
As expected, the time limit was exceeded.
.TIME<RET>
5.00
16.08
KILO-CORE-SEC=134
.
2-341
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
SET TTY or TTY Command
Function
The SET TTY command (or TTY command) declares properties of the
terminal on which the command is typed. The word TERMINAL can be
used instead of the word TTY in the SET TTY command.
Defaults
The system has a terminal default for any terminal that has not
been declared to be of a particular type. This default is
generic TTY. Before you specify the characteristics of your
terminal, the TTY defaults are in effect. The exceptions to this
are terminal input and output speeds.
To discover the characteristics that the system has assigned to
your terminal, use the INITIA TTY command. This is illustrated
in the example.
If you use the SET TTY TYPE command, the system assumes defaults
according to the terminal type you declared. These defaults, and
the defaults for TTY, are listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1: Terminal Hardware Characteristics
______________________________________________________________________
T L T F W D F L A
Y O A O I I I E L
P W B R D S L N T
E E S M T P L G M
R H L T O
C A H D
A Y E
S
E
______________________________________________________________________
GIGI Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
LA30 N N N 72 N 1 N/A N
LA34 Y Y N 132 N 0 N/A N
LA36 Y N N 132 N 0 N/A N
LA38 Y Y N 132 N 0 N/A N
LA120 N Y Y 132 N 0 N/A N
LA180 N Y Y 132 N 0 N/A N
LN01S Y Y Y 80 N 0 66 N
2-342
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
LN03 Y Y Y 80 N 0 66 N
LT33 N N N 72 N 1 N/A Y
LT35 N Y Y 72 N 1 N/A Y
TTY N N N 72 N 1 N/A Y
TTY33 N N N 72 N 1 N/A Y
TTY35 N Y Y 72 N 1 N/A Y
VK100 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT05 N Y N 72 Y 2 20 N
VT06 N N N 72 Y 1 25 N
VT50 Y Y N 80 Y 0 12 N
VT52 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT61 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT100 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT101 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT102 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT103 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT125 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT131 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT180 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT185 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT200 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT220 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT240 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT300 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT320 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT330 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
VT340 Y Y N 80 Y 0 24 N
______________________________________________________________________
NOTE
The page length is set by default for video
terminals only. Therefore, the notation N/A (not
applicable) appears in the table under LENGTH for
hard-copy terminals.
2-343
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
Formats
SET TTY arg
Sets a characteristic for your terminal.
SET TTY NO arg
Deletes a characteristic for your terminal.
Where: arg is the characteristic that can be set by this
command. The arguments to SET TTY are listed below.
NO turns off the bits set by the argument it
accompanies. For example, SET TTY LC sets lowercase
capability. SET TTY NO LC turns off lowercase
ability.
The word SET is an optional portion of the command
line.
Argument Function
ALTMODE Converts the ALTmode codes of 175 and 176
to the ASCII standard ESCape character 033.
NO ALTMODE restores the individual
identities of the codes 175 (right
brace: }) and 176 (tilde: ~).
BLANKS Controls the output of blank lines. NO
BLANKS suppresses the output of consecutive
RETURNS. This is useful for display
terminals, because NO BLANKS will conserve
space on the screen, allowing more output
to be displayed at one time.
COPY Controls the output of the ESCape character
to a VT5x terminal. See the VT52 Owner's
Manual.
CRLF Controls the automatic carriage return and
line feed at the end of the line. Used
with the WIDTH argument, CRLF gives an
automatic carriage return/line feed at the
edge of the terminal screen. NO CRLF will
cause lines wider than the set WIDTH to be
truncated. The default setting varies
according to the terminal type.
2-344
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
DEBREAK No longer supported.
DEFER Suppresses echoing to a video terminal
until output to the terminal is finished.
This is used when you type characters
before the output is finished. DEFER hold
the characters until the program requests
input; NO DEFER allows them to be echoed on
your terminal as soon as normal output is
complete.
DISPLAY Notifies the system that the terminal you
are using is a display terminal. Programs
use this information to control output to
the terminal.
ECHO Controls echoing on the terminal. NO ECHO
suppresses echoing of all characters you
type.
EIGHTBIT Enables the terminal to accept and generate
eight bit characters. A terminal set with
the EIGHTBIT switch will be able to
communicate with a program that uses seven
bit characters.
ELEMENT nnn No longer supported.
FILL n Assigns filler class n to the terminal.
Some terminals require one or more filler
characters to be sent following certain
control characters such as line feed (LF)
and horizontal tab (HT). With the DN87S
front-end, there will be a short time lapse
before each character is sent.
Table 2-2 illustrates the number of fillers
sent for each character and filler class.
The filler characters are CR
(carriage-return), and DEL (DELETE or
RUBOUT) for all other characters.
No fillers are supplied for image mode
output. The default is determined by the
declared terminal type.
2-345
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
Table 2-2: Fill Characters
______________________________________________________________________
Character Octal Number of Fillers for Filler Class
Name 0 1 2 3
______________________________________________________________________
BS 010 0 2 6 6
HT 011 0 1 OR 2 0 1 OR 2 (1)
LF 012 0 2 6 6
VT 013 0 2 6 6
FF 014 0 12 21 21
CR on output 015 0 1 3 3 (2)
automatic CR (3) 0 2 4 4
CRLF on output 015-012 0 3 9 9 (4)
XON 021 1 1 1 1
TAPE 022 1 1 1 1
XOFF 023 1 1 1 1
NTAP 024 1 1 1 1
______________________________________________________________________
(1) 1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
(2) Output only; no fillers on input.
(3) See the SET TTY CRLF command description.
(4) Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.
Argument Function
FORM Controls the output of line-feeds for the
formfeed and vertical tab characters. NO
FORM instructs the system to output the
line-feeds. FORM is a declaration that the
terminal has the capability of generating the
line-feeds. The default is determined by the
declared terminal type.
GAG Controls the reception of messages that were
sent with the SEND command. GAG instructs
the system to prevent messages from reaching
the terminal when the job is at user level.
NO GAG allows messages to reach the terminal
at any time. The default setting is GAG.
HOLD Controls the use of the SCROLL key on VT5x
terminals. See the VT52 Owner's Manual for
instructions on the use of this key.
2-346
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
IGNORE Sets input speed to 0, making terminal
useless.
ISO Controls compatibility with ISO
(International Standards Organization)
Latin-1 supplemental graphic character set.
NO ISO means DEC Multinational Character Set.
To display the current setting, you must use
the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.
LC Controls the translation of lowercase letters
to uppercase letters. NO LC allows all
characters to be translated to uppercase by
the monitor.
Frequently, it is convenient to have a
terminal with both uppercase and lowercase
simulate the behavior of one with uppercase
only. TTY NO LC causes the monitor to
perform this simulation. The echo sent back
by the monitor always matches the case of the
characters after translation. By looking at
the output, you can determine whether
translation was performed by the monitor.
The default condition is determined by the
declared terminal type.
LENGTH n Defines the number of lines of your terminal
page. To stop output on your terminal after
a page of length n, use the arguments STOP or
PAGE.
SBELL, SSTOP, STOP, XONXOF will use this
value as the page length.
LOCALCOPY Controls echoing to the terminal. Local-copy
terminals (terminals that automatically print
each character as you type it) do not require
that the system echo characters to the
terminal. NO LOCALCOPY is the default
setting. Use LOCALCOPY for a local-copy
terminal.
OVERSTRIKE Indicates the terminal allows a
three-character sequence to create one
composite output character by printing one
character, backspacing, and then printing
another character over the first. To display
the current setting of this attribute, you
must use the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.
2-347
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
PAGE n Defines the number of lines on your terminal
page, enables recognition of CTRL/Q and
CTRL/S (XON/XOFF; see Section 1.6.) and stops
output to your terminal after n lines. That
is, TTY PAGE n is the same as TTY LENGTH n
XONXOF STOP. The default value of n is
determined by the declared terminal type.
TTY PAGE and TTY PAGE 0 have the same effect
as TTY XONXOF.
This argument is useful for display terminals
because it prevents output from scrolling off
the screen. When output is stopped by the
system after n lines, the terminal bell
rings. Use CTRL/Q to continue output to your
terminal.
QUOTE Causes a ^V (control-V) and character to
behave as a single super-quote character.
They will not echo separately, and a single
delete erases them both. NO QUOTE is the
default argument.
REMOTE Clears the "local" access characteristic for
your job. REMOTE is not recommended for use
by non-privileged users because the action
can be reversed only by an operator [1,2].
The monitor does not allow CTY: to be set
REMOTE. NO REMOTE sets your terminal so that
you can log into an account that requires
local access. For specific information on
account characteristics, including local and
remote access types, see the description of
REACT in the TOPS-10 Software Installation
Guide.
RTCOMPATIBILITY Disables the CTRL/R and CTRL/T features.
(See Section 1.6 for a description of CTRL/R
and CTRL/T.) NO RTCOMPATIBILITY is the
default argument.
SBELL Sets the terminal to ring the bell when
output is automatically stopped (this is the
default action). NO SBELL suppresses the
bell.
2-348
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
SLAVE Specifies that the terminal becomes slaved,
so that no commands can be typed on the
terminal. This is useful for terminals that
are ASSIGNed by another job. This command is
not recommended for use by non-privileged
users because the actions can be reversed
only by an operator [1,2], using NO SLAVE.
SPEED m n Sets the terminal transmitting speed to m and
the receiving speed to n. To set the same
transmitting and receiving speed, use the m
argument alone. You must adjust the speed of
your terminal to match m and n using switches
on your terminal.
NO SPEED is an invalid argument.
NOTE
Certain hardware configurations do
not allow transmit and receive speeds
to be different (also called "split
speed").
SSTOP n Ignores CTRL/Q until output is stopped either
automatically by the system, or by CTRL/S
from user. The page length n is optional.
STOP n Stops output to the terminal automatically
after n lines. The page length n is
optional. When you type CTRL/Q, the page
length counter is reset to 0.
TAB Specifies that this terminal has hardware TAB
stops every eight columns. The default is
set according to the declared terminal type.
When you use NO TAB, the monitor simulates
tabs by sending the necessary number of SPACE
characters.
TAPE Causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to stop and start
the paper tape reader on a Teletype. See the
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual. NO TAPE, the
default, causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to stop and
resume output from the system to the
terminal. See Sections 1.6.7 and 1.6.8.
TIDY No longer supported.
2-349
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
TYPE nnnn Sets terminal characteristics defined by the
declared terminal type (nnnn).
For a list of the terminal types recognized
by the system, type:
HELP *
The output from HELP * includes a list of
supported terminal types.
TTY is a generic terminal and is the default
for terminals whose types have not been
declared. The characteristics set for these
types are described in Table 2-2.
The characteristics that are set by declaring
the terminal type are:
LOWERCASE
TABS
FORM
WIDTH
DISPLAY
FILL
PAGE
ALTMODE
TYPE is not a necessary portion of the
command string. For example, you can set
your terminal type to that of an LA120 by
typing SET TTY LA120.
UC Equivalent to SET TTY NO LC. Translates all
lowercase letters to uppercase. NO UC is
equivalent to SET TTY LC.
WIDTH n Sets the terminal width (the length of the
line) to n characters. This command combined
with the SET TTY CRLF command enables you to
specify the widest possible margin for your
terminal. The default setting is determined
by the declared terminal type.
XONXOF Allows you to use CTRL/S (XOFF) and CTRL/Q
(XON) to stop and resume system output to the
terminal. This is the default. NO XONXOF
prevents the system from recognizing CTRL/S
and CTRL/Q.
2-350
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Restrictions
The SET TTY (or TTY) command is not available to batch jobs.
Associated Commands
INITIA displays the TTY parameters
Example
Tell the system that your terminal is a VT340.
.SET TTY VT340 <RET>
Issue the INITIA TTY command. The system responds with the
terminal characteristics of a VT340 terminal.
.I TTY <RET>
RL353A DEC10 Development 16:02:49 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
TYPE:VT340 MODEL:VT340 CLASS:VT300 APC:HARDWIRED
ECHO WIDTH:80 LENGTH:24 NOSTOP
FILL:0 LC TABS NOFORM
CRLF NOGAG SBELL DISPLA
NOTAPE BLANKS NOALTMOD NORTCOMP
NOREMOTE XONXOF NOUNPAUS NOESCAPE
NOEIGHTB NOQUOTE IDLEDI:0 EDITOR
NOSLAVE
.
2-351
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
Function
The SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command sets the current virtual page limit
(CVPL). CVPL is described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
Format
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT nK
nP
Where: K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
specified within the range 1 to 512p.
1K equals 1024 words and 1P equals a page of 512 words.
If K and P are omitted, K is assumed.
If you use 0 for the argument, the value of CVPL is
assumed. CVPL is set by the system administrator and
is the default virtual page limit.
LIMIT is an optional portion of the command line.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Set your page limit to 32 pages.
.SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 32P<RET>
Run the SORT program:
.R SORT<RET>
*TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
/COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>
System message says that you set your page limit too low.
?SRTNEC NOT ENOUGH CORE FOR SORT/MERGE
*^C
2-352
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
Reset page limit.
.SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 132P<RET>
.R SORT<RET>
*TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
/COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>
Program ran successfully in the 132 pages that you specified.
[SRTXPN EXPANDING TO 130P]
SORTED 14 RECORDS
34 KEY COMPARISONS,
2.43 PER RECORD
16 RECORD LEAVES IN MEMORY
0 RUNS
0:00:00 CPU TIME, 16.71 MS PER RECORD
0:00:00 ELAPSED TIME
*^C
.
2-353
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command
SET WATCH Command
Function
The SET WATCH command provides a means with which to measure the
performance status of your program. This command tells the
system to print (or suppress) job statistics.
Formats
SET WATCH arg,arg,...
Prints the specified WATCH statistics. You specify the
statistics using the arguments.
SET WATCH ALL
Prints all the WATCH statistics.
SET WATCH NONE
Stops printing all WATCH statistics.
SET WATCH NO arg,arg,...
Stops printing the specified WATCH statistics.
Where: arg can be one of the following arguments:
DAY WRITE
VERSION MTA
READ CONTEXTS
RUN FILES
WAIT
The following arguments enable printing whenever a monitor
command passes the job from monitor level to user level.
DAY Prints the time of day, as [hh:mm:ss]
VERSION Prints the version of the program in standard format
(see the VERSION command). The version is printed when
your job issues a GET or RUN command; a SETNAM, GETSEG,
or SEGOP. monitor call; or if a DAEMON wait occurs.
The following arguments print a message whenever the terminal is
2-354
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command
returned to monitor level through the CTRL/C, EXIT, HALT, ERROR
IN JOBn, or DEVICE xxx OPR zz ACTION REQUESTED messages.
READ Prints the incremental number of disk blocks read
modulo 4096.
RUN Prints the incremental runtime.
WAIT Prints the wait time. (That is, the time elapsed since
you started or continued your program.)
WRITE Prints the incremental number of disk blocks written
modulo 4096.
When an UNLOAD command, the unload function of a UUO, or a
DEASSIGN command is executed,
MTA Prints magnetic tape statistics in the form:
[MTxn:reelid READ (C/H/S) = a/b/c WRITE (C/H/S) = d/e/f]
Where: x represents the tape controller
n represents the drive unit number
reelid is the reel identification
a is the number of characters read
b is the number of hard-read errors
c is the number of soft-read errors
d is the number of characters written
e is the number of hard-write errors
f is the number of soft-write errors
When a, b, and c are 0, the information pertaining to
READ will not be printed.
When d, e, and f are 0, the information pertaining to
WRITE will not be printed.
2-355
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command
When any files are accessed,
FILES Prints a message for each file accessed. The message
takes the form:
|
| [Fxn: dev:file.ext[ppn,sfd,...] PC:nnnnnn, error z]
Where: F (where it appears) signifies a FILOP
x = L for Lookup
E for Enter
R for Rename
n is the channel number
z is the error if the LOOKUP, ENTER, or RENAME fail.
Error codes can be found in the TOPS-10 Monitor
Calls Manual.
Note that, in the case of execute-only jobs, this message is
suppressed.
Whenever the current context changes, (by the use of the CONTEXT,
PUSH, or POP commands),
CONTEXTS Prints information about the current context. The
message is in the form:
[CONTEXT contextname (n) prog]
Where: contextname is the name (if any) of the current context
N is the current context number
prog is the name of the program (if any) that the
current context has stored in core.
Any combination of the arguments can be specified in any order.
Statistics are not printed for commands that do not run programs,
such as ASSIGN or PJOB. When you log in, your job is set to
WATCH the statistics for which you notified the system manager.
The information on what statistics to WATCH is kept in ACCT.SYS.
The default is MTA.
Associated Messages
If you type SET WATCH with no arguments, or with an invalid
argument, the following error message occurs:
?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
FILES,ALL,NONE
2-356
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command
NOTE
Enabling WATCH output interacts with the
incremental data printed by the TIME and DSK
commands.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
List the arguments:
.SET WATCH<RET>
?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
FILES,ALL,NONE
Set the statistics for time, run time, wait time, version number:
.SET WATCH DAY<RET>
.SET WATCH RUN<RET>
.SET WATCH WAIT<RET>
.SET WATCH VERSION<RET>
Run a program:
.RUN LOOP<RET>
[hh:mm:ss]
?LOOP.SAV NOT FOUND
[0.06 0.91 ]
.R PIP<RET>
[hh:mm:ss]
[S:PIP 33B(260) + ]
*C
[0.08 6.08 ]
.R TECO<RET>
[hh:mm:ss]
[S: TECO 230(162) + ]
*C
[2.05 6.10 ]
.
2-357
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
Function
The SHOW ALLOCATION command prints information on your terminal
about the resources that are allocated to your job. SHOW
ALLOCATION prints the names of the tape and disk volumes and
volume sets that are allocated and mounted for your job, and the
drives on which they are mounted.
The information is printed on your terminal in the following
form:
ALLOCATION FOR JOB x user-name [ppn]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
name volume description no. no.
Where:
x is the number of your job.
user-name is your user name.
[ppn] is your project-programmer number.
name is the name of the volume set, if it applies. For
example, if the resource is a drive, "---" is printed in
this column.
volume is the name of the volume that is allocated or
mounted for your job. If the resource is a tape volume set,
the name shows the volume that is currently mounted. Disk
structure names, disk drives, and tape drives are also
shown.
description is the description of the type of volume. This
identifies whether the resource is a structure, disk drive,
magtape drive, or magtape volume. The description is useful
when resources have identical names.
no. is the number of disk packs, drives, or tapes that are
allocated to your job and that are mounted for your job for
each resource.
Format
SHOW ALLOCATION
2-358
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.
Example
The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE, DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands. The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command. The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes. The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.
.ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
2-359
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 1
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 2 2
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKR DSKR STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure, the structure is dismounted. Because the structure
was no explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.
.DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[VOLUME SET DSKR HAS BEEN DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- 9 TK 800/1600 MAGTAPE UNIT 1 0
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
TAPE-SET VOL1 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL2 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
TAPE-SET VOL3 MAGTAPE VOL. 1 0
2-360
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it can be
deallocated. The tape set is deallocated:
.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET RESOURCES TYPE ALL OWN
--------------------- ----------------- ------------ --- ---
--- RP06 DISK UNIT 1 1
--- RP20 DISK UNIT 1 1
DSKB DSKB STRUCTURE 1 1
DSKC DSKC STRUCTURE 1 1
2-361
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW QUEUES Command
SHOW QUEUES Command
Function
The SHOW QUEUES command displays a list of the entries in the
system queues on your terminal. You can specify the system
queues that you want displayed, or you can see all of the system
queues. SHOW QUEUES lists the mount queue, batch queue, event
queue, and output queues.
Format
SHOW QUEUES argument/switches
Where:
argument specifies the queue or queues to be displayed. The
argument is optional. If you do not specify an argument,
all of the system queues are displayed.
The following arguments are valid:
ALL-REQUESTS Shows queue requests in all system
queues. This is the default
function.
BATCH-REQUESTS Shows batch requests.
CARD-PUNCH-REQUESTS Shows card punch requests.
EVENTS-REQUESTS Shows scheduled system events.
MOUNT-REQUESTS Shows mount requests.
OUTPUT-REQUESTS Shows requests in all output
queues.
PAPER-TAPE-REQUESTS Shows paper tape punch requests.
PLOTTER-REQUESTS Shows plotter requests.
PRINTER-REQUESTS Shows line printer requests.
/switches is one or more of the following switches. The
switches define the amount of information to be displayed
about each queue request and which queue requests to
display. By default, SHOW QUEUE displays all the system
queues for all jobs.
2-362
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW QUEUES Command
Switch Function
/ALL Displays a list of all the queue requests.
This is the default function. When showing
the mount requests, /ALL prints a list of all
the structures that are mounted and, for each
structure, a list of every job that has the
structure in its search list.
/BRIEF Displays a short description of each request.
/FULL Displays all available information about each
request.
/HELP Prints information about SHOW ALLOCATION and
SHOW QUEUES. To use this switch, type:
SHOW/HELP.
/USER:[ppn] Displays the queue requests for the specified
user. The project-programmer number must be
typed in brackets.
Associated Messages
[THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]
This message occurs when there are no queue requests that match
the specification.
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Example
1. The following example illustrates the output from the SHOW
QUEUES command, used with the MOUNT-REQUESTS argument:
.SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS TYPE WRITE REQ# JOB# USER
------ ------ ---- ----- ---- ---- ------------
MTB2 WAITING TAPE LOCKED 614 52 MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME-SET: MTB2
LABEL-TYPE: BYPASS, TRACKS: 9, DENSITY: 1600 BPI
THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE
2-363
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SKIP Command
SKIP Command
Function
The SKIP command moves a magnetic tape forward a specified number
of files or records or to the logical end of tape.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running the PIP program.
Formats
SKIP MTxn: x FILES
Advances forward x files.
SKIP MTxn: x RECORDS
Advances forward x records.
SKIP MTxn: EOT
Advances forward to the logical end of tape.
Where: MTxn: is the physical device name of the magnetic tape
unit. Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.
x is a decimal number representing the number of
records or files to skip over.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Space the tape MTA2: forward 2 files:
.SKIP MTA2: 2 FILES<RET>
.
2-364
SYSTEM COMMANDS
START Command
START Command
Function
The START command begins execution of a program that you loaded
previously with either the LOAD or GET command, or that you
interrupted while running (for example, with a CTRL/C).
You can optionally specify an explicit start address. If
omitted, the address supplied in the file (.JBSA) is used. If
you specify an address argument and the job was executing a
monitor call when interrupted (that is, it was at monitor level
but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the monitor continues
the job at the location at which it was interrupted and
eventually traps to the specified START address.
If you try to START an execute-only program at a specified
address, you receive an error message. If the high segment of
this program is sharable, execution of the START command turns on
the user-mode write protect bit.
Format
START addr
Where: addr is the octal address where execution starts if
other than the location specified within the file
(.JBSA). This argument is optional. If you do not
specify this argument, the address comes from .JBSA.
You can specify a starting address of 0.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Does not function during device I/O.
Requires memory.
Example
Type a program.
.TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 69
69 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
END
2-365
SYSTEM COMMANDS
START Command
Load the program.
.LOAD PROG<RET>
FORTRAN:PROG
MAIN.
LINK:LOADING
EXIT
SAVE the program.
.SAVE PROG<RET>
PROG SAVED
START the program.
.START<RET>
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.01 ELAPSED TIME: 0.03
EXIT
.
2-366
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
SUBMIT Command
Function
The SUBMIT command places entries into the input queue for the
batch system. See the QUEUE command description for further
information and examples.
See the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual for more
information about batch jobs.
Format
SUBMIT jobname=control-file-spec,log-file-spec
Where: jobname is the name of the job to be entered into the
queue. The jobname is optional. If you omit it, the
default job name is the name of the log file.
The equal sign is required only if you specify the job
name.
control-file-spec is the name of the input file. This
file contains all monitor-level and user-level commands
for processing by the batch controller (BATCON). If
you do not include a device in the file specification,
and if the monitor does not find the control file in
your job search list, the monitor will search ersatz
device CTL for the control file.
log-file-spec is the name of the output file. The
batch controller uses this file to record its
processing of the job.
Only the two files mentioned above can be specified in a request
to the batch input queue. The name of the control file is
required; the log file name is optional and, if omitted, is taken
from the control file. If the job name is omitted, it defaults
to the name of the log file, if present, or the name of the
control file if no log file is specified. If an extension is
omitted, the following are assumed:
.CTL for the control file
.LOG for the log file
If you type SUBMIT with no arguments or switches, a list of the
jobs in the batch queue will be printed on your terminal.
2-367
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two categories
are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request, and you can place them
anywhere in the command string. If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a /NO construction,
which has a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command string with the
positive construction.
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the command
string. You can also use the /NO construction of a switch in
the same command string with the positive construction. To
achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, see Section 1.8.4.
Switch Category Function
/ABEFORE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is before the specified date
and time.
/ACCOUNT: Queue Specifies the account to which the
"string" operation job should be charged. If the
account contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, you
must enclose the string in
quotation marks.
/AFTER: Queue Processes the request after the
date-time operation specified date and time.
/ALLFILES: Queue Accepts the request only if all of
YES or NO operation the files in the request exist.
That is, if any specified file is
not present, no files are
processed. /ALLFILES is the same
as /ALLFILES:YES. By default (or
/ALLFILES:NO), if all of the files
do not exist, the existing files
are still processed.
2-368
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/ASINCE: File Queues only the files that have
date-time control been accessed since the specified
date and time.
/ASSISTANCE: Queue Specifies whether the job needs
YES or NO operation or does not need operator
intervention. Arguments are YES or
1 and NO or 0. If you specify NO
and then request assistance, your
job is cancelled. Assistance is
any action the operator must take
before the job can continue,
including PLEASE and MOUNT
requests.
/BATLOG:arg Queue Controls the output of the log file
operation on disk. Arguments are:
APPEND Appends the log file to any
existing file of the same name.
SUPERSEDE Replaces any existing
file of the same name with the new
file.
SPOOL Spools the log file for
output to the printer instead of
writing the file into your
directory. This prevents a large
log file from using up your disk
quota. Will not override
/OUTPUT:NOLOG.
/BATOPT: Queue Specifies a LOGIN option line to
option-name operation read for LOGIN switches to apply to
the batch job. The option name
that you specify with the /BATOPT
switch must match a line in the
SWITCH.INI file that appears as:
LOGIN:option-name/switches
/BEFORE: File Queues the file only if it was
date-time control created before the specified date
and time.
/BEGIN:n File Starts the output on the nth line
control of the control file.
2-369
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/CARDS:n Queue Uses n as the maximum number of
operation cards that can be punched by the
batch job (up to 10,000). If you
omit the switch, no cards will be
punched.
/CHECK Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation the batch queue entries made by
your job.
/CORE:n Queue Uses n (in decimal K) as the
operation maximum amount of memory that your
job can use.
/CREATE Queue Makes a new entry in the batch
operation input queue. This is the default
function except when you are
listing queue entries.
/DELETE File Deletes the control file after
control processing it. (This is the same
as /DISPOSE:DELETE.)
/DEPENDENCY:n Queue Specifies the initial value of the
operation dependency count in decimal. When
used with /MODIFY, this switch
changes the dependency count of a
previously submitted job. If n is
a signed number (+ or -), that
number is added to or subtracted
from the dependent job's count. If
n is not a signed number, the
dependent job's count is changed to
n.
/DESTINATION: Queue Specifies the node that will
node operation process output requests from this
batch job, including the printing
of the log file. Use the node name
or the node number to specify the
node. If you specify another host
or a node that does not exist, the
job will wait in the queue
indefinitely.
2-370
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/DISPOSE: File Controls the disposition of the
arg control control file after it is processed.
The arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after spooling it.
PRESERVE preserves the file after
processing it. This is the default
function.
RENAME is no longer supported.
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue Specifies text to place in the
"text" operation distribution field, on the banner
page of output listings. For batch
input requests, the distribution
text is printed on the banner page
of the log file listing. You can
use this field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the operator should leave the
listing. The text field may be up
to 39 alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File Prints an error message if a binary
control file is included in the request.
This is the default function.
/ERNONE Queue Prints an error message if no files
operation match the file specification. This
is the default function.
/ERPROTECTION Queue Prints an error message if
operation processing the request would
require a violation of file
protection. This is the default
function.
/FAST Queue Prints a list of the entries in the
operation batch queue in a fast format on
your terminal.
/FEET:n Queue Uses n as the maximum number of
operation feet of paper tape that the batch
job can punch. If the switch is
omitted, no paper tape is punched.
2-371
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/HELP: Queue Prints information on your terminal
arg operation about the QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any files.
/HELP can be used alone or with one
of the following arguments:
TEXT prints a message about the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command. This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name Queue Specifies the name of the job. The
operation job name can be up to six
alphanumeric characters.
/KILL Queue Removes the specified entry from
operation the queue. You must give the job
name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
the left of the equal sign in the
command line. See the examples.
/LENGTH:n:m File Processes only files whose length
control is between n and m blocks.
/LIST:arg Queue Prints information about the jobs
operation in the queue. If you use /LIST
alone, it shows the jobs in the
queue. This is equivalent to using
the QUEUE command with no arguments
and no switches. /LIST can be
abbreviated to /L. The switch can
also take one of the following
arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests. (This is the same as
/FAST.)
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue. (This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.
2-372
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/MESSAGE:arg Queue Specifies the amount of information
operation to be printed when an error occurs
from the request. You can specify
one or more of the following
arguments:
ADDRESS prints the location in
memory where the error occurred.
CONTINUATION prints information
about the error.
FIRST prints the one-line error
message.
PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix.
/METERS:n Queue Uses n as the maximum number of
operation meters of paper tape that can be
punched by the job.
/MODIFY Queue Alters the specified parameter in
operation the specified job. This switch
requires that you have access
rights to the job. You must give a
job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
to the left of the equal sign in
the command line. This switch can
be used to modify a previously
submitted request as long as the
request has not been started. See
the examples.
/NEW: File Accepts the request even if the
YES or NO control file does not yet exist. Does not
search for control file on CTL:
/NONEW File Does not accept the file
control specification of a file that does
not exist. This is the default
function.
/NONOTIFY Queue Does not set the system to notify
operation you when a request is completed.
See /NOTIFY.
/NOOPTION Queue Ignores the SWITCH.INI file.
operation SWITCH.INI files are described in
Appendix B.
2-373
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/NOPHYSICAL File Searches for the file by
control recognizing any logical names.
This is the default function.
/NORESTART Queue Prevents the job from being
operation restarted if it was stopped because
of a system crash. This is the
default function.
/NOTIFY: Queue Sets the system to notify you when
YES or NO operation your request is completed. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument. To suppress
notification, use /NOTIFY:0 or
/NOTIFY:NO. By default, you are
not notified when a request is
finished.
/OKBINARY File Accepts files whose extensions
control indicate that they include binary
information. Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.
/OKNONE Queue Does not produce a warning message
operation if no files match the file
specification.
/OKPROTECTION Queue Does not output an error message
operation when a protection code is violated.
/OPTION:option Queue Uses the option line QUEUE:option
operation in the SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.
/OUTPUT:arg Queue Determines whether or not the log
operation file will be printed. This switch
has three arguments only one of
which can be specified at a time.
The arguments are LOG, NOLOG, and
ERROR.
LOG prints the log file.
NOLOG suppresses printing of the
log file.
ERROR prints the log file only if
an error occurs.
2-374
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/PAGES:n Queue Uses n as the maximum number of
operation pages of output that your job can
print.
/PATH:[dir] Queue Specifies the directory to be
operation accessed.
/PHYSICAL File Does not recognize logical names
control for devices in the command line.
/PRESERVE File Saves the control file after
control processing it. This is the default
and it is the same as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE.
/PRIORITY:n Queue Gives the specified priority (n is
operation 1 to 63) to the request. A larger
number has greater priority.
/PROCESSING:node Queue Specifies the node that is to
operation process the batch job. Use the
node name or node number to specify
the node. Batch jobs can be
submitted to IBM host nodes only.
Jobs submitted to nodes other than
IBM host nodes will wait in the
queue indefinitely.
/PROTECTION: Queue Specifies a protection code for the
nnn operation queue request. Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected. See Section
1.9.4.
/READER Queue Causes a disk-resident card job to
operation be read as if it were punched on
cards and had been submitted
through the card reader.
/REMOTE Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
2-375
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/REQUESTID:n Queue Specifies the request
operation identification number of the job
you wish to modify or terminate
(/KILL). The request
identification number is assigned
when the request is queued. This
switch is used to the left of the
equal sign in the command line.
See the examples.
/RESTARTABLE: Queue Specifies whether the job should be
YES or NO operation restarted after the system has
crashed and been restored.
Arguments are: YES (or 1) and NO
(or 0). The default function is
NO.
/RUN:file Queue Executes the specified program
operation (file) after your request is
accepted.
/RUNCORE:nx Queue Executes the program specified in
operation /RUN in nK of core after the
request is accepted. The value can
also be expressed in terms of nP
(pages).
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue Executes the program specified in
operation /RUN with offset n after the
request is accepted.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue Specifies a sequence number to help
operation identify a request to be modified
or deleted. This switch must be
used to the left of the equal sign
in the command line.
/SINCE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates after the specified date and
time.
/SITGO Queue Processes the batch job using the
operation SITGO compiler.
/STREAM:n Queue Prints a list of the jobs that are
operation running or destined to run in the
specified batch stream.
2-376
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
/TAG:xxx File Starts at the statement labeled xxx
control in the control file. Equivalent to
GOTO xxx at the beginning of the
control file.
/TIME:hh-mm-ss Queue Specifies the CPU time limit for
operation the job. The form /TIME:n can be
used to specify a limit of n
seconds.
/TMPFIL: Queue Creates a temporary file TMP:file
file:text operation and enters the text into this file.
/TPLOT:n Queue Uses n minutes as the maximum
operation amount of plotting time allowed for
your job. If you omit the switch,
no plotter time is allowed.
/UNIQUE: Queue Specifies whether more than one
YES or NO operation batch job can run from your PPN at
one time. If the value is YES (or
1), only one job will run at a
time. Any other batch jobs will
wait until the previous job is
finished. If the value is NO (or
0), any number of batch jobs can
run at the same time.
/USERNAME: Queue Specifies the user name field for
"name" operation the banner page of output listings.
For batch input requests, the user
name is printed on the banner page
for the log file listing. This
field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters, and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.
Associated Messages
When you make an entry into the batch queue, the system prints
the following message on your terminal:
[BATCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, RUN TIME:time]
2-377
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
Where: name is the name of the job in the queue. This can be
specified by the user. Otherwise, the name of the log
file is used.
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
time is the amount of time allowed for the batch job to
run.
Characteristics
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require that you be logged in if you only want the list
of batch queue entries.
Examples
1. Create a control file.
.SOS CUE.CTL<RET>
INPUT: CUE.CTL
00100 PRINT SYS: NOTICE.TXT<RET>
00200 <ESC>
E<RET>
[DKSC: CUE.CTL]
Submit the control file.
.SUBMIT CUE.CTL<RET>
[BATCH JOB CUE QUEUED, REQUEST #132, LIMIT 0:05:00]
Use DIRECTORY to see new .LOG file.
.DIR CUE<RET>
CUE CTL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC: [27,5434]
CUE LOG 3 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
.
2-378
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
2. Submit the control file CUE.CTL to the batch queue for
processing at 5:00 p.m.:
.SUBMIT CUE /AFTER:17:00<RET>
[BATCH JOB CUE QUEUED, REQUEST 79, LIMIT 0:05:00]
Change the processing time to 4:30 p.m., identifying the job
by its request identification number:
.SUBMIT /REQUESTID:79= /MODIFY /AFTER:16:30<RET>
[1 JOB MODIFIED]
Cancel the batch job CUE altogether:
.SUBMIT CUE= /KILL<RET>
[1 JOB CANCELED]
.
2-379
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SYSTAT Command
SYSTAT Command
Function
The SYSTAT command prints status information about the system.
To write the information on the disk as a file with the name
SYSTAT.TXT, assign device DSK: with logical name SYSTAT.
SYSTAT prints the status of the system: system name, time of
day, date, system uptime, CPU uptime on an SMP system, percent
null time (idle plus lost time), number of jobs in use.
SYSTAT prints the status of each job logged-in: job-number;
project-programmer number ([OPR] is the operator's job, [SELF] is
your job), terminal line number (CTY is console terminal, DET is
detached, Pn is PTY number); program name being run; program
size; job and swapped state (see the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
Manual), and runtime since the job logged in.
SYSTAT prints the status of high segments being used: name (PRIV
is nonsharable, OBS is superseded); device or file structure name
from which the segment came; the directory name; the size (SW is
swapped out, SWF is swapped out and fragmented, F is in core and
fragmented on disk, SPY signifies using the SPY monitor call);
the number of users in core or on the disk.
SYSTAT prints the amount of swapping space used, the virtual
memory used, swapping ratio, active swapping ratio, virtual
memory saved by sharing, and average job size.
SYSTAT prints status of busy devices: device name, job-number,
how device is assigned (AS is ASSIGN command, INIT is INIT or
OPEN monitor call, AS+INIT is both ways).
SYSTAT prints system file structures: free blocks, mount count,
single-access structures, and private structures.
SYSTAT prints non-network dataset control: number of the
terminal, status of the terminal.
2-380
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SYSTAT Command
Format
SYSTAT arg
Where: arg is one or more single letters (in any order) used
to specify any subset of the SYSTAT output. The
argument is optional. The following is a list of the
arguments:
Argument Function
B Prints busy device status.
C Prints continuous SYSTAT.
D Prints dormant segment status.
E Prints non-disk error report.
F Prints file structure status.
G Prints other system status.
H Prints help text listing the arguments.
J Prints job status.
L Lists the SYSTAT output on LPT.
N Prints non-job status (that is, all information
except J).
P Prints disk performance.
S Prints short job status.
T Prints dataset status.
U Includes user names in output.
V Prints paged output for display terminals.
X Reads the file DSK:CRASH.EXE if found, otherwise
reads specified
crashed monitor written in .EXE format.
Meanings of job state codes:
AU Disk alter UFD wait.
^C Job stopped.
CA Core allocation wait (to be locked).
CB Disk core block scan wait.
CW Command wait.
^D DAEMON wait.
D1 DECtape control wait.
D2 2nd DECtape control wait.
DA Disk storage allocation (SAT block) wait.
DC Data control wait.
DI Disk I/O wait.
DS Disk I/O wait satisfied.
EQ ENQ/DEQ resource wait
EV Exec virtual memory wait.
EW Event wait.
HB Hibernate state.
IO I/O wait.
JD DAEMON wait.
2-381
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SYSTAT Command
MM Memory management resource wait.
NA Nap (short sleep).
NU Null state.
OW Operator wait.
PI Paging I/O wait.
PS Paging I/O wait satisfied.
RN In a run queue.
SL Sleep wait.
ST Stop (^C) state.
SW Swapped out.
SWF Swapped out and fragmented on disk.
TI TTY I/O wait (input).
TO TTY output.
TS TTY I/O wait satisfied.
^W Command wait.
WS I/O wait satisfied.
You can obtain output for individual jobs by specifying one of
the following after the command:
A number n that causes information to be listed only for the
specified job (that is, job n). A period causes information
for your job to be printed.
A project-programmer number specified in square brackets
causes information to be printed only for jobs with the
specified project-programmer number. The project and/or
programmer number can be specified with an asterisk.
A number preceded by a number sign (#n) causes information
to be printed only for jobs from the indicated terminal
(that is, TTYn). In addition, a C following the command
indicates CTY, Pnn indicates PTYnn, Tnn indicates TTYnn, and
a period indicates the terminal on which the SYSTAT command
is issued.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN.
2-382
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SYSTAT Command
Example
If you wanted to use the ASSIGN command to assign LPT 260 to your
job, you could use the B argument to SYSTAT to see if the printer
is busy.
.SYSTAT B<RET>
Busy devices:
Device Job Why Logical
TTY52 1 init
TTY2 21 init
DET60 1 init
MPX1 21 init
LPT260 14 init
TSK26 26 init
TSK26 26 init
TSK26 26 init
TSK26 18 init
SYSTAT B lists LPT260 as a busy device, therefore, you cannot
assign it to your job.
2-383
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TECO Command
TECO Command
Function
The TECO command opens a file for editing using TECO. See the
TECO manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running TECO.
Format
TECO dev:file.ext[directory]
Where: dev: is the device or file structure name containing
the existing file. If omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext is the file name and the file name extension
of the existing file. If omitted, the arguments of the
last MAKE or TECO command are used.
[directory] is the directory name where the file is
stored. If omitted, your default directory is assumed.
You can pass switches to TECO by preceding the switch with a
slash in the TECO command string. When COMPIL interprets the
command string, it passes the switches to TECO.
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Destroys your core image.
Associated Commands
MAKE - Creates a file with TECO.
Example
Edit a file named WONDER.ALG.
.TECO WONDER.ALG<RET>
[5K CORE]
*EX<ESC><ESC>
.
2-384
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TIME Command
TIME Command
Function
The TIME command prints the total run time since the last time
you issued the TIME command, followed by the total run time used
by the job since it was initialized (logged-in), followed by the
integrated product of running time and memory size
(KILO-CORE-SEC=). Time is printed in the following format:
hh:mm:ss.hh
Where: hh is hours
mm is minutes
ss.hh is seconds to nearest hundredth.
Interrupt level and job scheduling times are charged to whichever
user was running the system job when the interrupt or
rescheduling occurred.
NOTE
If automatic run time is enabled with the SET
WATCH RUN command, the incremental run time is
usually 0.
Format
TIME job
Where: job is the job-number of the job whose time is desired.
If job is omitted, the job to which the terminal is
attached is assumed. In this case, the monitor prints
the incremental run time (run time since the last TIME
command) as well as the total run time since the job
was initialized.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN when requesting time for another user's
job.
Does not destroy core image.
2-385
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TIME Command
Example
The command is given for the first time after LOGIN. Therefore,
the incremental time equals the total time since LOGIN.
.TIME<RET>
21.36
21.36
KILO-CORE-SEC=175
Show that the time is reset:
.TI<RET>
0.00
21.36
KILO-CORE-SEC=175
Run the DIRECT program:
.DIR/F<RET>
WONDER.REL DSKC: [27,4072]
WONDER.QOR
PROG2.QLG
PROG2.REL
NEW.
ADD1.BAS
OLD.BAS
FACT.BAS
NAME.BAS
WONDER.ALG
WONDER.FOR
TEST.ALG
PROGL.FOR
TESTER.
016DAE.TMP
002DAE.TMP
LOOP.F4
LOOP.REL
FILEC.DAE DSKB:
The DIRECT command took .70 seconds of run time and 183
kilo-core-seconds.
.TI<RET>
0.70
22.06
KILO-CORE-SEC=183
.
2-386
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
TPUNCH Command
Function
The TPUNCH command places entries into the paper tape punch
output queue. See the QUEUE command description for further
information and examples.
Format
TPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec
Where: dev: is the name of the specific tape punch on which
your files should be processed. (For example, PTP2:
is tape punch number 2.) You can have your files
processed on another node by using the format PTPSxx:,
where xx is the node number. (For example, PTPS25: is
a punch on node 25.) The device name is optional.
jobname is the name of the job to be entered into the
queue. The default is the name of the first file in
the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify the job name,
the device name, or both.
file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas, for the files
to be processed. A file specification is in the form
dev:file.ext[directory].
If you do not enter a job name or an input specification, the
system prints a list of the jobs in the paper tape punch queue on
your terminal.
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two categories
are:
o Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request, and you can place them
anywhere in the command string. If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many commands have a /NO construction,
which takes a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the
/NO construction of a switch in the same command string.
2-387
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
o File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the
command string. You can also use the /NO construction of a
switch in the same command string. To achieve a temporary
or permanent effect by the placement of the switch, see
Section 1.8.4.
Switch Category Function
/ABEFORE: File Queues the file only if the access
date-time control date is before the specified date
and time.
/ACCOUNT: Queue Specifies the account to which the
"string" operation job should be charged. If the
account string contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, you
must enclose the string in
quotation marks.
/AFTER: Queue Processes the request after the
date-time operation specified date and time. See
Section 1.8.3 for a description of
date-time arguments.
/ALLFILES: Queue Accepts the request only if all of
YES or NO operation the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately. This switch
specifies that if any file is not
present, no files should be
processed. The value of YES or NO
is optional. If you specify YES,
all of the files you specified must
exist, or none of the files will be
punched.
/ASINCE: File Queues only the files that have
date-time control been accessed since the specified
date and time.
/BEFORE: File Queues only the files with creation
date-time control dates before the specified date and
time. See Section 1.8.3 for a
description of date-time arguments.
2-388
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue Specifies an output characteristic.
arg operation You can find a list of the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.
/CHECK Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation the queue entries made by your job.
/COPIES:n File Repeats the output the specified
control number of times (n must be less
than 64). The default is one copy.
If you need more than 63 copies,
make two or more entries.
/CREATE Queue Makes a new entry in the tape punch
operation queue. This switch is the default
function, except when you are
listing the entries in the queue.
/DEFERRED Queue Causes deferred output to be
operation released to the paper tape punch
queue. You must use one of the
following switches with /DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes all released
output requests.
/KILL eliminates the released
output requests.
See the SET DEFER command
description for more information
and examples.
/DELETE File Deletes the file after spooling.
control (This is the same as
/DISPOSE:DELETE.)
/DESTINATION: Queue Specifies the node that will
node operation process the request. Use this
switch to specify that the paper
tape punch be connected to the
specified node. Use the node name
or node number to specify the node.
Files cannot be punched at a host
other than the host node to which
your terminal is connected. If the
request is made to punch files at
another host, or at a node that
does not exist, the request will
2-389
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
wait in the queue indefinitely.
2-390
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/DISPOSE:arg File Controls the disposition of the
control file after it is queued. The
arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after punching it.
PRESERVE keeps the file in your
area after punching it. This is
the default function.
RENAME renames the file into the
spooling area. This deletes the
file from your directory area
immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION: Queue Specifies text to place in the
"text" operation distribution field, on the banner
page of output. You can use this
field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the operator should leave the
listing. The text field may be up
to 39 alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.
/ERBINARY File Prints an error message if a binary
control file is included in the request.
This is the default function.
/ERNONE Queue Prints an error message if no files
operation match the wildcard construction.
This is the default function.
/ERPROTECTION Queue Prints an error message if
operation processing the request requires a
violation of file protection. This
is the default function.
/FAST Queue Prints a list of the entries in the
operation paper tape punch queue in a fast
format. This is the same as
/LIST:FAST.
2-391
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/FILE:arg File Specifies how the file format is to
control be interpreted. The following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as ASCII
text.
ELEVEN interprets the file as four
8-bit bytes in each 36-bit word.
The bits are arranged as follows:
Byte 1: bits 10-17
Byte 2: bits 2-9
Byte 3: bits 28-35
Byte 4: bits 20-27
/FORMS:arg Queue Processes the file on the specified
operation kind of paper tape. The default is
NORMAL. Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.
/GENERIC Queue Sends output to the next available
operation paper tape punch. This is the
default function. This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.
/HEADER: File Makes header units before each file
YES or NO control if you type /HEADER or if you
specify YES. Does not make headers
between files if you specify NO. 1
may be used for YES; 0 may be used
for NO. /HEADER:NO is the same as
/NOHEADER. /HEADER is the default
function.
/HELP:arg Queue Prints information on your terminal
operation about the QUEUE command. This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used alone or
with one of the following
arguments:
TEXT prints a message with the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command. This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
2-392
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/JOBNAME:name Queue Specifies the name of the job. The
operation job name can be up to six
alphanumeric characters.
/KILL Queue Removes the specified entry from
operation the queue. You must give a job
name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
the left of the equal sign in the
command line.
/LENGTH:n:m File Processes only files whose length
control is between n and m blocks.
/LIMIT:n Queue Limits the output to the specified
operation number of feet.
/LIST:arg Queue Prints information about the jobs
operation in the queue. If you use /LIST
alone, it shows the jobs in the
queue. This is equivalent to using
the QUEUE command with no arguments
and no switches. /LIST can be
abbreviated to /L . The switch can
take one of the following
arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests. (This is the same as
/FAST.)
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue. (This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.
/MESSAGE: Queue Specifies the amount of information
arg operation to be printed when an error occurs
from the request. You can specify
one or more of the following
arguments:
ADDRESS prints the location in
memory where the error occurred.
CONTINUATION prints information
about the error.
2-393
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
FIRST prints the one-line error
message.
PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix to the error message.
/MODIFY Queue Alters the specified parameter in
operation the specified job. This switch
requires that you have access
rights to the job. You must give a
job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
to the left of the equal sign in
the command line. This switch can
be used to modify a previously
submitted request as long as the
request has not been started.
/NEW:YES or NO File Accepts the request even if the
control file does not yet exist.
/NOHEADER File Suppresses header units before
control file. /HEADER is the default
function.
/NONEW File Forces the system to use an
control existing file. This is the default
function.
/NONOTIFY Queue Does not set the system to notify
operation you when the request is finished.
See /NOTIFY.
/NONULL Queue Prints an error message if none of
operation the files in the request exist.
This is the default function.
/NOOPTION Queue Suppresses the SWITCH.INI file.
operation SWITCH.INI files are described in
Appendix B.
/NOPHYSICAL File Recognizes logical names for
control devices in the command string.
This is the default function.
/NOSTRS File Does not scan each structure for
control files of the same name. This is
the default function.
2-394
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/NOTES:"text" Queue Punches the text in the header
operation units. The text can be up to 12
characters, and it must be enclosed
in quotes if it contains any
nonalphanumeric characters, such as
spaces.
/NOTIFY: Queue Notifies you on your terminal when
YES or NO operation request is completed. To be
notified, use /NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument. To suppress
notification, use /NOTIFY:0,
/NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY. By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished. In special
cases, such as the output of
deferred requests, you will never
be notified.
/NULL:YES or NO Queue Does not print a fatal error
operation message if the specified file does
not exist.
/OKBINARY File Accepts files whose extensions
control indicate that they include binary
information. Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW, .REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.
/OKNONE Queue Does not print a warning message if
operation no files match the wildcard
construction.
/OKPROTECTION Queue Does not print error messages when
operation a protection error occurs.
/OPTION:option Queue Uses the option line QUEUE:option
operation in the SWITCH.INI file. SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.
/PHYSICAL File Does not recognize logical names
control for devices in the command line.
/PRESERVE File Saves the control file after
control processing it. This is the default
and it is the same as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE.
2-395
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/PRIORITY:n Queue Gives the specified priority number
operation (n is 1 to 63) to the request. A
larger number has greater priority.
/PROTECTION: Queue Specifies a protection code for the
nnn operation queue request. Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected. See Section
1.9.4.
/REMOTE Queue Prints on your terminal a list of
operation remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.
/REQUESTID:n Queue Specifies the request
operation identification number of the job
you wish to modify or terminate.
/RUN:file Queue Executes the specified file after
operation the job is done.
/RUNCORE:n Queue Executes the file specified in /RUN
operation in nK of core after the job is
done.
/RUNOFFSET:n Queue Executes the file specified in /RUN
operation with offset n after the job is
done.
/SEQUENCE:n Queue Specifies a sequence number to help
operation identify a request to be modified
or deleted.
/SINCE: File Queues only the files with a
date-time control creation date after the specified
date and time.
/STRS:YES or NO File Searches for the file on all
control structures in the search list and
takes every occurrence. The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.
2-396
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/TAPE:arg File Punches paper tape in the specified
control mode. If you do not use this
switch, the tape is punched
according to the data mode
specified in the file. You can use
any one of the following arguments
with this switch:
ASCII punches the tape in ASCII
mode.
BINARY punches the tape in binary
mode.
IBINARY punches the tape in image
binary mode.
IMAGE punches the tape in image
mode.
/TMPFIL: Queue Creates a temporary file TMP:file
file:text operation and enters the text into the file.
/UNIT:n General Specifies the unit number of the
device to which you want the output
sent.
/USERNAME: Queue Specifies the user name field of
"name" operation the banner page of output. This
field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters, and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.
Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints a
message on the user's terminal. The message is in the form:
[PAPERTAPE JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where: name is the name of the job in the queue. This can be
specified by the user. Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request.
nnn is the number that represents the request
identification of the job in the queue.
xxx is the maximum number of feet that the job will
use.
2-397
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if a list of queue entries is desired.
Example
Punch 3 copies, in binary mode, of the file DSK:SENDMP.REL.
.TPUNCH SENDMP.REL/TAPE:BINARY/COPIES:3<RET>
[PAPERTAPE JOB SENDMP QUEUED, REQUEST #131, LIMIT 10]
.
2-398
SYSTEM COMMANDS
| TRANSLATE Command
| TRANSLATE Command
|
|
|
| Function
|
| The TRANSLATE command translates PPNs to usernames and usernames
| to PPNs. You can use the TRANSLATE command any time after
| logging in.
|
| Format
|
| TRANSLATE [p,pn],username...
|
| Examples
|
| .TRANSLATE<RET>
| #DPM<RET>
|
| 10,56 DPM
| #^Z
| .
|
| .TRANSLATE [10,56],SPIDER,BOB<RET>
|
| 10,56 DPM
|
| 10,115 SPIDER
|
| 10,10013 BOB
|
| A total of 3 translations and one error
| .
2-399
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TYPE Command
TYPE Command
Function
The TYPE command prints the contents of the specified file(s) on
your terminal. If more than one file is requested in the command
string, the files are printed one after another without an
indication of the beginning and ending of a file.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running PIP.
Format
TYPE file-spec
Where: file-spec is one or more file specifications separated
by commas. The file name (including any extension) is
required. File specification is discussed in Section
1.9.
If you omit the device name, the default is DSK:. If you omit
the directory, the default is the directory you are currently
logged in to.
The full wildcard construction can be used for the file name and
the extension.
Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in
the TYPE command string. When COMPIL interprets the command
string, it passes the switches on to PIP.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
2-400
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TYPE Command
Example
.TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
BEGIN INTEGER S, C, B, A;
!THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
!PRINT THE RESULT;
WRITE ("[2 C] WHAT ARE THE NUMBERS TO ADD [1 C] ");
READ (S);
READ (C);
READ (B);
A:=C+S+B;
WRITE ("[2 C] THE SUM OF ");
PRINT (S,3,3);
WRITE (" AND ");
PRINT (C,3,3);
WRITE ("AND ");
PRINT (B,3,3);
WRITE (" IS: ");
PRINT (A,3,3);
WRITE (" [2 C] ");
END
.
2-401
SYSTEM COMMANDS
UNLOAD Command
UNLOAD Command
Function
The UNLOAD command rewinds and unloads a tape, either magnetic
tape or DECtape. When magnetic tape is unloaded, WATCH
statistics are printed on the operator's terminal. These
statistics also print on your terminal by default. To turn off
the printing, use the SET WATCH NO MTA command.
Format
UNLOAD dev:
Where: dev: is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).
Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1. Unload DECtape unit 7.
.UNLOAD DTA7:<RET>
.
2. Unload magnetic tape unit 3.
.UNLOAD MTA3:<RET>
.
2-402
SYSTEM COMMANDS
USESTAT Command
USESTAT Command
Function
The USESTAT command (CTRL/T) returns status information about
your job. If your job is currently doing I/O to a file, then
CTRL/T will disclose that status, unless the job is execute-only.
The information printed includes:
o incremental daytime in seconds
o incremental run time in seconds
o incremental disk reads
o incremental disk writes
o program name
o core size
o job state
o current context
o program counter (PC)
See Section 1.6.9 for a description of the status information
returned as a result of the USESTAT command (or CTRL/T).
The results obtained from the USESTAT command can also be
obtained by typing CTRL/T. CTRL/T can be typed at user level as
well as at monitor level.
Formats
CTRL/T
USESTAT
2-403
SYSTEM COMMANDS
USESTAT Command
Characteristics
CTRL/T:
Leaves your terminal at the same level from which you issued
CTRL/T.
Does not echo on your terminal.
Does not interrupt program execution.
Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.
The USESTAT Command:
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not interrupt program execution.
Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.
Examples
1. Use CTRL/T for a job that is not execute-only. Note that
although it is shown here, CTRL/T does not echo on your
terminal.
.R PIP<RET>
*COP FILES.ALL=*.*<RET>
<CTRL/T>
| Day:13.53 Run: 0.03 Rd:2 Wr:1 PIP 4+10P Ctx:1 RN PC:403171
| CPU0
Input wait for DSKBO:SWITCH.BAK[10,5763] block 1
2. Use USESTAT for an execute-only job:
.USESTAT<RET>
| Day: 29.60 Run: 0.61 Rd:3506 Wr:1 DIR 15+44P Ctx:1 ^C
| PC:423003 CPU0
.
2-404
SYSTEM COMMANDS
VERSION Command
VERSION Command
Function
The VERSION command prints on your terminal the version number of
the program in your core area (that is, the last program you ran
implicitly or explicitly). One use of this command is to
determine the program that printed an error message on your
terminal. If your terminal is still at user level (that is, a
character other than a period was printed) after the message, you
can type the following:
^C (two CTRL/Cs if the program is not waiting for input)
.VERSION
The monitor returns with the name of the program in core (that
is, the one presumed to have printed the message) and the version
number of that program. After receiving the information, you can
type CONTINUE to return your terminal to user mode. If the
message was a fatal message (that is, a period was printed after
the message), you do not have to type CTRL/C because the terminal
is already at monitor level. In most cases, you cannot type
CONTINUE after a fatal error message.
The version number is obtained from .JBVER and .JBHVR in the job
data area and is printed in standard format. Similar output is
automatically generated by the SET WATCH VERSION command. (See
the SET WATCH command description.) The output from these two
commands is in one of the following forms:
[low + high] The low and high segments are different.
[low] There is only a low segment.
[low +] The low and high segments are the same.
[+] A GETSEG monitor call has been performed
to a high segment that matches the low
segment.
[+ high] A GETSEG monitor call has been done to a
high segment that does not match the low
segment.
[+ high + high] A SEGOP. monitor call has been done to
bring a high segment into core without
destroying the existing high segment.
[blank] The high segment has been released.
2-405
SYSTEM COMMANDS
VERSION Command
[+ FROM file-spec] The file has been read into memory.
[+ high NOT SHARABLE FROM file-spec]
The file read into memory is not
sharable.
With the VERSION command, the low and high segments are
represented in the format:
name version
With the SET WATCH VERSION command, the low and high segments are
represented in one of three formats:
name version The program is not from SYS:.
:name version The output is the result of a SETNAM
monitor call (for example, at the end of
loading).
S:name version The program is a program loaded from the
system device (actual SYS:, not logical
device SYS:).
The name is the name of the program and the version is in
standard format. When the version number is output, the standard
format is:
major-version minor-version(edit)-group who modified program
The major version is octal; the minor version is alphabetic; the
edit is octal and enclosed in parentheses and the group who last
modified the program is octal and preceded by a hyphen (0 is DEC
development, 1 is all other DEC personnel, and 2-7 is customer).
There are no spaces separating the items, and if an item is zero,
it does not appear in print. The parentheses and hyphen also do
not appear in print if the corresponding item is zero. The
following are examples of version numbers output in standard
format.
10B(335)-1 major version 10, minor version B, edit
number 335, group that last modified program
1.
7(5) major version 7, minor version 0, edit number
5, group that last modified program 0.
54A major version 54, minor version A, edit
number 0, group that last modified program 0.
Format
2-406
SYSTEM COMMANDS
VERSION Command
VERSION
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your job's core image.
Examples
1. Run the TECO program.
.R TECO<RET>
Halt the program.
*^C
Find version number.
.VERSION<RET>
TECO 23B(162) +
Continue the program and exit.
.CONTINUE<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
.
2. Type a file.
.TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
BEGIN INTEGER S, C, B, A;
! THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
! PRINT THE RESULT; ^C
Find version number of PIP, which executes TYPE.
.VERSION<RET>
PIP 33B(260) +
2-407
SYSTEM COMMANDS
VERSION Command
Run and halt the SYSTAT program.
.R SYSTAT<RET>
STATUS OF R5743A SYS #40/2 AT 14:45:44 ON 22-APR-75
UPTIME 7:36:20+7:34:33, ^C
^C
Find the version number of SYSTAT.
.VERSION<RET>
SYSTAT 472(156)
.
2-408
SYSTEM COMMANDS
WHERE Command
WHERE Command
Function
The WHERE command allows you to determine the system or network
node to which a specified device is physically connected. The
information given includes:
o node name
o node number (ANF-10 and DECnet)
o software-identification (ANF-10 only)
o creation-date of software (ANF-10 only)
o server location string (LAT terminal only)
Format
WHERE devn:
Where: devn: is the physical device name. OPR: allows you
to find the location of the operator's controlling
terminal. The colon (:) in the device name is
optional.
Associated Messages
Output form depends on the type of node. Formats are:
Node type Format
Local name number system ID/creation date device line no.
ANF-10 node name number system ID/creation date device line no.
DECnet name number device (NRT) or (CTERM)
LAT name location-string device
If the system does not recognize the device you specified, it
prints the message:
?NO SUCH DEVICE
2-409
SYSTEM COMMANDS
WHERE Command
Characteristics
Does not require LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Examples
1. To find the location of a specific device LPT262:, type the
command:
.WHERE LPT262:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) R2364A KL # 1026 mm-dd-yy LPT262
.
This example shows that the node name is 1026. System
identification is RZ364A KL # 1026/1042. Creation date of
software is mm-dd-yy. The specified device is LPT262.
2. To find the physical node of your job's terminal, type the
command:
.WHERE TTY:<RET>
Local NOVA(31) DN87S V##(##) mm-dd-yy TTY70 LINE #70
.
This example shows that the terminal is connected to node
NOVA(31). The version number is V##(##). The creation date
was mm-dd-yy. Your terminal number and line number are 70.
3. To find the physical node and terminal line of the operator's
terminal, type:
.WHERE OPR:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy TTY4 LINE #4
.
4. To display the location of the system controlling terminal,
type:
.WHERE CTY:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy CTY LINE #7
.
2-410
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ZERO Command
ZERO Command
Function
The ZERO command clears the directory in the specified file
structure. ZERO deletes all the files in the specified
directory. The files cannot be recovered.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which interprets the
command before running the PIP program.
Format
ZERO dev:[directory]
Where: dev: is a DECtape or a disk. This argument is
required.
[directory] is a directory you have access to, if you
specify a disk structure. If you do not specify a
directory, your directory is assumed.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1. Delete the files on DECtape 4.
.ZERO DTA4:<RET>
.
2. Delete all files in your search list.
.ZERO DSK:<RET>
.
3. Delete all files in your SFD named CBDDT.
.ZERO DSKB:[27,4072,CBDDT]<RET>
.
2-411
A-1
APPENDIX A
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
Table A-1 lists the operating system commands, divided into groups by
function. The commands in each group are arranged in alphabetical
order. Each command is accompanied by a short description of its
function.
For an explanation of each functional group, read Sections 2.1.1
through 2.1.10.
NOTE
Table A-1 lists the commands that are described in
Section 2.2. Do not use the commands and programs
listed in Table A-1 until you are familiar with them.
Table A-1: Functional Groups of Commands
______________________________________________________________________
Command Functional Description
______________________________________________________________________
Job-Control Group
ATTACH Connects your terminal to a previously DETACHed
job.
CONTEXT Allows you to create, delete, and switch between
contexts.
DETACH Releases your terminal from the current job.
DISABLE Disables the privileges that you previously
ENABLEd.
ENABLE Enables privileges that are assigned to your
job.
A-1
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
KJOB Terminates your job.
LOGIN Allows you to access the system.
PASSWORD Allows you to change your password.
POP Destroys an inferior context.
PUSH Creates an inferior context.
REATTACH Transfers your job from one terminal to another.
SESSION Changes the account string of your job.
Information Group
ACCOUNT Prints the account string for your job.
CONTEXT Displays the status of a context.
CORE Prints the amount of core memory assigned to
your job.
CPUNCH Prints a list of the jobs in the card-punch
queue.
DAYTIME Prints the date and time.
DIRECTORY Prints a list of all the files in your
directory.
DSK Prints the disk-usage information for your job.
HELP Prints a message which shows the formats of the
HELP command.
INITIA Prints information about the system, your job,
and your terminal.
LOCATE Prints the node to which your terminal is
logically connected.
NETWORK Prints a list of the nodes in the network to
which your terminal is logically connected.
NODE Prints information about the node to which your
terminal is connected.
PJOB Prints information about the specified job.
PLOT Prints a list of the jobs in the plotter queue.
A-2
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
PRINT Prints a list of the jobs in the line-printer
queue.
PUNCH Prints a list of the jobs in the default punch
queue.
QUEUE Prints a list of all the jobs in all the queues.
RESOURCES Prints a list of all available devices and file
structures.
SCHEDULE Prints the system status for timesharing and
operator coverage.
SET WATCH Sets the system to automatically print
incremental job statistics.
SHOW ALLOCATION Prints the resources that are allocated to your
job, and the structures and tape volumes that
are mounted for your job.
SHOW QUEUES Prints queue requests in each queue.
SYSTAT Prints all available information about the
system; in particular, every job on the system.
TIME Prints the runtime since you logged-in and since
the last TIME command.
TPUNCH Prints a list of all the jobs in the
paper-tape-punch queue.
CTRL/T Prints the status of your job.
(USESTAT)
VERSION Prints the version number of the program
currently in memory.
WHERE Prints the node to which the specified device is
connected.
Terminal-Control Group
SET TERMINAL Sets the specified parameters for your terminal.
TERMINAL
SET TTY
TTY
INITIA
A-3
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
Terminal Communication Group
MAIL Sends, receives, and organizes messages to and
from other users.
PLEASE Allows communication with the computer operator.
SEND Sends a message to a specified terminal.
File-Handling Group
CLOSE Closes the open files on a device.
COPY Copies files on the same device or from device
to device.
CPUNCH Enters files in the card-punch queue.
DELETE Removes the specified file from your directory.
DIRECTORY Prints a list of the files in your directory.
EOF Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.
FILE Transfers files from disk to DECtape and DECtape
to disk.
LIST Prints a file on the line printer.
MAKE Creates a file with the text editor TECO.
PLOT Enters files in the plotter queue.
PRESERVE Changes the protection code of the specified
file.
PRINT Enters files in the line-printer queue.
PROTECT Changes the protection code of the specified
file.
PUNCH Enters files in the default punch queue.
QUEUE Enters files into the specified queue.
RENAME Changes the name of a file.
SET DEFAULT Changes your default protection code.
PROTECTION
SUBMIT Enters files in the batch input queue.
A-4
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
TECO Calls the TECO text editor to edit an existing
file.
TPUNCH Enters files in the paper tape punch queue.
TYPE Prints the contents of the specified file on
your terminal.
ZERO Eliminates the specified directory from the
specified device.
Device-Handling Group
ALLOCATE Allocates resources to your job for future
mounting.
ASSIGN Allocates an I/O device to your job and assigns
logical names to the devices.
BACKSPACE Spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified
number of files or records.
CANCEL Kills queue requests.
CLOSE Closes the open files on a device.
CPUNCH Enters files in the card-punch queue.
DEALLOCATE Removes resources from your job's allocation
list.
DEASSIGN Releases any devices from your job and clears
logical names.
DISMOUNT Releases disks and tapes from your job, and
removes file structures from your search list.
EOF Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.
FINISH Closes any open files and releases a device from
your job, clearing logical names.
LABEL Writes an identifier onto DECtape.
LIST Lists a file on the line-printer.
MOUNT Requests ownership of a device.
PRINT Enters files in the line-printer queue.
PUNCH Enters files in the default punch queue.
A-5
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
QUEUE Enters files in the specified queue.
REASSIGN Passes a device from one job to another.
REWIND Rewinds a magnetic tape or DECtape.
SET BLOCKSIZE Sets the default blocksize for a magnetic tape.
SET CDR Sets the file name of the next file to be read
by the card reader.
SET DEFER Defers queueing of output requests until you log
out.
SET DENSITY Sets the default density of the magnetic tape.
SET RETRY Controls error-reporting from magnetic tapes.
SET SPOOL Changes the list of devices that will be spooled
for your job.
SKIP Moves a magnetic tape forward the specified
number of files or records.
TPUNCH Enters files in the paper tape punch queue.
UNLOAD Rewinds and unloads a magnetic tape, DECtape, or
disk.
Program-Preparation Group
CLOSE Closes the open files on a device.
COMPILE Translates a source program, using the
appropriate compiler.
CREF Generates a cross-reference listing and sends it
to the line printer.
DCORE Writes a core-image file of your program,
including accumulators and job tables.
DDT Loads VMDDT, if necessary, and runs the
debugger.
DEBUG Loads a program and a debugger, then starts the
debugger.
DEPOSIT Puts data into your memory area.
EOF Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.
A-6
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
EXAMINE Displays the contents of the specified core
address.
FUDGE Creates a library .REL file from a temporary
file.
GLOB Produces a cross-referenced listing of global
symbols.
LOAD Compiles a source file, and loads .REL files
into memory.
MAKE Creates a file with the text editor TECO.
MERGE Loads a second program into memory, to be run
with the first.
SET BREAK Establishes an interrupt point at a specified
location in your program.
TECO Calls the TECO text editor to edit an old file.
Program-Control Group
CTRL/C Stops execution of a program, leaving your
(HALT) terminal at monitor level.
CCONTINUE Continues program execution, leaving your
terminal at monitor level.
CONTINUE Continues program execution, leaving your
terminal at user level.
CORE Changes the amount of memory allocated to your
job.
CSTART Starts program execution, leaving your terminal
at monitor level.
EXECUTE Compiles, loads, and runs a program.
GET Loads a program into memory.
JCONTINUE Continues execution of a program after a device
error.
LOAD Runs the loader, and loads the .REL file into
memory.
MERGE Loads a second program into memory, to be run
with the first.
A-7
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
R Runs a system program.
REENTER Restarts program execution at a predefined entry
point.
RUN Begins execution of a program.
SAVE Writes a file of your core image on the
SSAVE specified device.
SET CPU Changes the processor on which your job runs.
SET DDT Enables the DDT breakpoint facility.
BREAKPOINT
SET DEFAULT Allows you to change the number of memory
BUFFERS buffers.
SET DSKFUL Halts your job without destroying your core
image when disk quota is exceeded.
SET DSKPRI Allows you to set the priority of your disk
transfers.
SET FLOATING Sets the system to simulate a floating point.
POINT
SET HPQ Sets the priority of your job in the run queue.
SET PHYSICAL Changes the amount of physical core you can use.
SET TIME Sets a time limit for your job.
SET VIRTUAL Sets the current virtual page limit.
LIMIT
START Begins execution of a loaded program.
Network Group
Command Functional Description
ASSIGN Allows you to access a device on another system
in the network.
LOCATE Changes the default device list of your job.
NETWORK Prints a list of the nodes in the network.
NODE Prints information about the configuration of
the network.
A-8
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
SET HOST Connects your terminal to the specified host
system.
WHERE Prints the node to which the specified device is
connected.
______________________________________________________________________
A-9
B-1
APPENDIX B
SWITCH.INI FILES
You can create a SWITCH.INI file in your UFD into which you can put
switches for certain programs. Some of the programs that read
SWITCH.INI are:
BACKUP CREDIR
DIRECTORY FORTRAN
INITIA LINK
LOGIN MAKLIB
QUEUE RUNOFF
SORT
The SWITCH.INI file allows you to automatically override the system
defaults of these programs. The SWITCH.INI file must reside in your
UFD. A SWITCH.INI file can contain two types of command lines.
The first type of line is written in the following format:
program-name/switch/switch/.../switch
Where: program-name is a program name such as DIRECTORY or LOGIN or
a command name which runs one of the programs, such as
PRINT. You must use the full program name or at least six
characters of any program name that is longer.
/switch is a valid switch for the named program.
B-1
SWITCH.INI FILES
Example
DIRECTORY/DETAIL/NOSUMMARY
When you run the program, the switches in SWITCH.INI will be used as
the defaults instead of any program-defined defaults. When you run a
program, the system searches your directory for a file called
SWITCH.INI. If the file is not found the program uses any program
defaults. If the system finds the file but does not find a line for
the program, it uses any program defaults. When the system finds your
SWITCH.INI file and the line for the program, the program uses the
switch values that you have specified in your SWITCH.INI file instead
of any program default values.
You can override any switch in your SWITCH.INI file by issuing a
command string to the specified program containing a complement of the
switch in your SWITCH.INI file.
For example, you could have a SWITCH.INI file in your area that
contains the following:
DIRECTORY/FAST
Then, when you issue the following command:
.DIR<RET>
The system will print a fast (shortened) listing of your directory.
You could override the SWITCH.INI file by typing other switches after
the command. For example:
.DIR/NORMAL<RET>
The second type of line that can appear in your SWITCH.INI file is
written in the following format:
program-name:option-name/switch/switch.../switch
Where: program-name is a program name such as DIRECTORY, LINK,
LOGIN, INITIA, or QUEUE.
option-name is the same as used for the /OPTION switch.
(Refer to the OPTION switch in the command descriptions in
Chapter 2.)
You use the second type of line to override both program defaults and
any defaults that you might have previously specified in the
SWITCH.INI file. You refer to this type of line in SWITCH.INI by
including the /OPTION: switch in a command string to a program. If
you specify an option name in the command string that does not appear
in your SWITCH.INI file, the program prints a warning message and uses
the program defaults.
B-2
SWITCH.INI FILES
Assume that you create a SWITCH.INI file that contains:
DIRECTORY/FAST/UNITS/SUMMARY
DIRECTORY:THISRUN/WORDS/ACCESS:25
If you then type the DIRECTORY command, the program will print a fast
listing showing both the actual unit names (instead of the structure
names) and the summary line on your terminal. When you want the
program to print a normal directory listing, you must type a command
string to DIRECTORY that includes the /NORMAL switch. Note that disk
unit names, not structure names, and the summary line will still be
printed.
You can type the following command string to automatically list the
length of the files in words, instead of blocks, and to update the
access date of files with 25 blocks or less:
DIRECTORY/OPTION:THISRUN<RET>
Examples
1. This example shows one way to use a SWITCH.INI file to set
your terminal type automatically when you log in.
First, log in to the system:
.LOG 27,10024<RET>
Job 36 RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor TTY410
Password: <RET>
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,10024] succeeded on 6-May-88:14:00:32]
15:09 6-May-88 Friday
.
The following INITIA command shows your terminal
characteristics. Since you haven't used the SET TTY TYPE
command, and you do not have a SWITCH.INI file to set the
terminal type, the system defaults to terminal type TTY.
.I TTY<RET>
RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor 15:05:42 TTY410 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 410
Job 35 User DOTY [27,10024]
TYPE:TTY APC:HARDWIRED ECHO WIDTH:80
LENGTH:0 NOSTOP FILL:0 LC
NOTABS NOFORM CRLF GAG
NOSBELL NODISPLA NOTAPE BLANKS
NOALTMOD NORTCOMP NOREMOTE XONXOF
NOUNPAUS NOESCAPE NOEIGHTB NOQUOTE
IDLEDI:0 NOSLAVE
B-3
SWITCH.INI FILES
Create a file named SWITCH.INI, with a command to LOGIN that
sets your terminal type.
.SOS SWITCH.INI<RET>
Input: SWITCH.INI
00100 LOGIN/TERMINAL:TYPE:VT240<RET>
00200 <ESC>
*ES<RET>
Log out:
.KJOB<RET>
Job 36 User DOTY [27,10024]
Logged-off TTY410 at 15:09:53 on 6-May-88
Runtime: 0:00:00, KCS:12, Connect time: 0:00:51
Disk Reads:11, Writes:23
Then log in once more.
.LOG 27,10024<RET>
Job 36 RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor TTY410
Password:<RET>
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,10024] succeeded on 6-May-88:15:00:42]
15:09 6-May-88 Friday
Type the command INITIA TTY to see your terminal
characteristics.
.I TTY<RET>
RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor 15:10:07 TTY410 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 410
Job 36 User DOTY [27,10024]
TYPE:VT240 APC:HARDWIRED ECHO WIDTH:80
LENGTH:24 NOSTOP FILL:0 LC
TABS NOFORM CRLF GAG
SBELL DISPLA NOTAPE BLANKS
NOALTMOD NORTCOMP NOREMOTE XONXOF
NOUNPAUS NOESCAPE NOEIGHTB NOQUOTE
IDLEDI:0 NOSLAVE
.
B-4
SWITCH.INI FILES
2. This example shows a SWITCH.INI file which contains a variety
of commands and switches.
.TYPE SWITCH.INI<RET>
LOGIN /TERMINAL:(TYPE:VT240,NOGAG,DEFER,XONXOFF,NOSBELL,-
PAGE:0)/NOTICE:SOMETIMES/MAILCHECK-
/RUNOFFSET:1
QUEUE /NOTIFY/HEADER:NO-
/LIST:ALL/LOWERCASE/OUTPUT:ERROR/PRESERVE
DIRECT /NOTEMP
INITIA /SETTTY/TERMINAL:TYPE:VT100
B-5
C-1
APPENDIX C
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
The six basic COMPILE-class commands are:
COMPILE
LOAD
EXECUTE
DEBUG
MAKE
TECO
Each COMPILE-class command is described in detail in Chapter 2.
These commands cause the monitor to run the COMPIL program, which
deciphers the command and constructs new command strings for the
system program (such as, TECO, PIP, FORTRAN). Each time you type the
MAKE or TECO commands, the command with its arguments is written as a
temporary file in memory or on the disk. Therefore, the system can
recall the last file specification you typed. This is an exception to
the requirement that the file name must always be specified. For
example if you type:
.MAKE PROGX.MAC<RET>
You can then later type the following:
.TECO<RET>
instead of the command line:
.TECO PROGX.MAC<RET>
assuming that you have not issued a TECO command changing the file
name in the interim.
C-1
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
The system also writes the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands,
with their arguments, in two places:
1. In memory in temporary files written on device TMP:. These
are deleted when you log out or when the system crashes.
2. On the disk in a temporary file.
When you use a file specification as the argument to one of these
commands, you can use another of these commands with no argument. The
stored arguments will be used.
C.1 INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION)
Most programs receive input in the form of commands from the terminal.
However, it is possible to write a program that accepts commands from
a file. That file is known as an indirect command file.
For example, when you must type many program names and switches, you
can put them into a file that eliminates the need for you to retype
the names and switches for each compilation. You can use the @ file
construction, which you can type with any COMPILE-class command.
You can specify an @ file at any point in a command line after the
first word in the command. In this construction, when you specify a
file, you do so by typing its file name, followed by an optional file
name extension and project-programmer number. If you omit the
extension, the program searches for a command file with a .CMD file
name extension. If that file is not found, the program then searches
for a command file with a null extension. Then, when the program
finds the specified file, it places the information stored in the file
in the command string, replacing @file name. If the file is not
found, the program prints an error message.
Example
If you have a file called FLIST.CMD that contains the following
command string:
FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED
You could replace this command line:
.COMPILE FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED,FILEZ
with the following command line:
.COMPILE FILEA,@FLIST,FILEZ
You can have command files that contain the @ file construction to a
C-2
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
depth of 15 levels. If this process of indirection results in files
pointing in a loop, the maximum depth is exceeded, and the program
prints an error message:
?NESTING TOO DEEP
The following rules apply in handling format characters in a command
file.
1. Spaces are used to delimit words, but are otherwise ignored.
Similarly, TABs, vertical TABs, and form feed characters are
treated as spaces.
2. To allow long command strings, command terminators (such as
RETURN, ESCAPE) are ignored if the first nonblank character
after a sequence of command terminators is a comma.
Otherwise, the command terminators are treated as commas by
the COMPILE-class commands.
3. Blank lines are completely ignored.
4. Comments can be included in command files by preceding the
comment with a semicolon; text from the semicolon to the end
of the line is ignored.
5. If command files are sequenced, the sequence numbers are
ignored.
C.2 THE + CONSTRUCTION
The + construction specifies that the files to the right of the plus
sign are combined with the first file you specified. Therefore, all
files you specify become one file in the compilation and not separate
files.
This construction is useful when the first file is a subroutine of the
other files you specified.
When you use the + construction, the compiler produces a single
relocatable binary file from a collection of input source files. To
construct a single program from several input files, you can name one
input file FIRST.MAC, another MIDDLE.MAC, and a third LAST.MAC. You
can then specify the following command line:
.COMPILE FIRST+MIDDLE+LAST
After this, the compiler produces one binary file named LAST from the
three source files, FIRST, MIDDLE, and LAST. This construction allows
you to use one input file as part of several different compilations.
C-3
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
For example, you could later use the FIRST.MAC file with SECOND.MAC
and THIRD.MAC to obtain a different binary file. The + construction
permits you to maintain material in a single file that is common to
more than one compilation.
The compiler gives the name of the last input file in the string to
any output file (for example, .REL, .CRF, .LST). Therefore, in the
previous examples, the output files would be called LAST and THIRD,
respectively. Note that you can include device names, extensions, and
project-programmer numbers in any + construction. Therefore, the
following is a valid command string:
.COMPILE FIRST.MAC[27,4072]+SECOND.MAC+THIRD.MAC[35,234]
C.3 THE = CONSTRUCTION
Usually, the compiler makes the name of the relocatable binary file
the same as that of the source file, with the extension specifying the
difference. You can override this action by using the = construction.
The = construction allows you to specify the names of the output
files. For example, if you need a binary file called BINARY.REL from
a source program called SOURCE.MAC, you can type the following command
line:
.COMPILE BINARY=SOURCE
You can also use this construction to specify an output name for a
file produced by using the + construction. To give the name WHOLE.REL
to the binary file the compiler assembles with PART1.MAC and
PART2.MAC, you can type the following command line:
.COMPILE WHOLE=PART1 + PART2
To change the file name of the output file is the most common use of
the = construction. However, you can also use it to change any other
default condition. The default condition for compiler output is
DSK:SOURCE.REL[dir]. If you would like output on DTA3 with the file
name FILEX instead of the defaults, you could type the following
command line:
.EXECUTE DTA3:FILEX=FILE1.F4
C.4 THE < > CONSTRUCTION
The < > (angle bracket) construction can be used in COMPILE, LOAD,
EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands only. You use it to cause programs listed
within the angle brackets to be assembled with the same parameter
file. If you also use the + construction, it must appear before the
C-4
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
< > construction. To assemble LPTSER.MAC, PTPSER.MAC, and PTRSER.MAC
with the PAR.MAC parameter file, you could type the following command
line:
.COMPILE PAR+LPTSER,PAR+PTPSER,PAR+PTRSER
However, using the < > construction you could type the following line:
.COMPILE PAR+<LPTSER,PTPSER,PTRSER>
The following command string construction is invalid:
.COMPILE <LPTSER,PTRSER,PTPSER>+PAR
C.5 DEFAULT COMPILER
When you name a file with a standard file extension (.MAC, .CBL, .FOR,
.ALG), the compiler implied by the extension will be used to compile
the program. Standard file extensions are listed in Appendix D. You
cannot override the compiler that is implied by the file extension.
The COBOL compiler will compile a file called DATPRO.CBL. Files
without a recognizable compiler extension are compiled by the default
compiler, normally FORTRAN.
If you have a file with a non-standard file extension, you can control
the setting of the default compiler (FORTRAN) by including switches in
the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command string. The descriptions
of the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands in Chapter 2 include
the switches you can use to change the default compiler.
In the following examples, the installation has chosen FORTRAN as the
default compiler. If you issue the following command:
.COMPILE NOEXT
the file named NOEXT will be compiled by FORTRAN. The following
command:
.COMPILE FILEZ.MIN
causes the file named FILEZ.MIN to be compiled by FORTRAN because MIN
is not a recognizable compiler extension. The following command:
.COMPILE APART,DATA/COBOL,TEST
causes the files APART and TEST to be compiled by FORTRAN and the file
DATA to be compiled by COBOL.
C-5
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
NOTE
By setting the appropriate assembly switches you can
indicate SNOBOL, BLISS, or MACY11 as the compiler.
However, these switches and compilers are not
supported.
The switches that change the default compiler can be temporary or
permanent. (See Section 1.8.4.)
C.6 COMPILER SWITCHES
It is occasionally necessary for you to pass switches to the assembler
or compiler in a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command. For each
translation (assembly or compilation), the COMPIL program sends a
command string to the translator, containing three parts:
1. Binary output file specification.
2. Listing file specification.
3. Source file specification.
To include switches with these files, you must do the following:
o Group the switches according to each related source file, if
you use the + construction.
o Group the switches according to the three types of files for
each source file. The order of the groups of switches is
a. Binary
b. Listing
c. Source
o Separate the groups of switches by commas for each source
file.
o Enclose all switches for each source file within one set of
parentheses.
o Place each parenthetical string immediately after the source
file to which it refers.
The COMPIL program interprets the groups of switches according to
these rules:
C-6
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
o The switches immediately before a closing right parenthesis
are source (SSSS).
o The switches before the first comma are binary (BBBB,,).
o The switches before the second comma are listing (,LLLL,).
o The order of the switches is BBBB, LLLL, SSSS.
o The individual switches are separated by spaces.
o The switches contain no more than 150 characters in all.
o The switches contain only the following non-alphanumeric
characters within the parentheses: colon (:), hyphen (-),
slash (/), comma (,), and parentheses.
Examples
(SSSS) Source switch
(BBBB,,) Binary switch
(BBBB,LLLL,SSSS) Binary, list, and source switches
(,,SSSS) Source switch(es)
(,LLLL,) Listing switch(es)
(BBBB,,SSSS) Binary and source switches
(BBBB,LLLL,) Binary and list switches
(,LLLL,SSSS) List and source switches
The processor switches are listed in Table C-1, with their meanings
and the types of files to which they apply.
Table C-1: Processor Switches
______________________________________________________________________
Processor Binary Listing Source Meaning
______________________________________________________________________
ALGOL D Set dynamic storage region
for your own array (known as
the heap).
E The source file has line
numbers in columns 73 to 80.
L List the source program.
N Suppress output of error
messages on the terminal.
C-7
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
Q Delimit the words in quotes.
S Suppress the listing of the
source program.
COBOL A A A Allow the listing of code
generated.
C Produce a cross-referenced
listing of all user-defined
items in the source program.
E E E Check the program for errors,
but do not generate code.
I Suppress generation of the
starting address of a main
program.
J Force a starting address to
be generated for a
subprogram.
L Use the preceding file
descriptor as a library file
whenever the COPY verb is
encountered.
M M M Print a map showing the
parameters of the
user-defined items.
N Suppress output of source
errors on the terminal.
P Do not generate trace calls
and symbols.
R Produce a two-segment object
program. The high segment
contains the resident
sections of the Procedure
division; the low segment
contains everything else.
When the object program is
loaded, LIBOL is added to the
high segment.
S S S The source file has sequence
numbers in columns 1 through
6 and comments starting at
column 73.
C-8
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
W W W Rewind the magnetic tape.
Z Z Z Zero the DECtape directory.
FORTRAN-10 C Generate a file that is to be
input to the CREF program.
E Include the octal-formatted
version of the object file in
the listing.
I Translate the letter D in
column 1 as a space, and
treat the line as a normal
FORTRAN statement.
M Add the mnemonic translation
of the object code to the
listing file.
NOE NOE Suppress output of error
messages on the terminal.
NOW NOW Suppress output of warning
messages on the terminal.
O Perform optimization of
global symbols when producing
processor code.
S Perform compilation, checking
for syntax errors only.
MACRO A A A Advance the magnetic tape
reel by one file.
B B B Backspace the magnetic tape
reel by one file.
C Produce a listing file in a
format acceptable as input to
CREF.
E List the macro expansions.
F Byte sizes match the format
of the instruction.
G Byte sizes are two 18-bit
fields.
L Reinstate listing (used after
C-9
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
list suppression by S
switch).
M Suppress ASCII test in macro
and repeat the expansion
(SALL).
N Suppress output of error
messages on the terminal.
O O O Allow literals to occupy only
one file.
P Increase the size of the
pushdown list.
Q Q Q Suppress questionable (Q)
error indications on the
listing.
S Suppress the listing.
T T T Skip to the logical end of
the magnetic tape.
X Suppress all macro
expansions.
Z Z Zero the DECtape directory.
______________________________________________________________________
The following are examples of the use of switches:
Examples
.DEBUG TEST(,N,) Suppress error message during
assembly.
.COMPILE OUTPUT=MTA0:(M,W)/L Rewind the magtape (W),
compile the first file, and
include the MACRO coding in
the output listing file (M).
Output files are given the
names OUTPUT.REL and
OUTPUT.LST.
.COMPILE/MACRO A=MTA0:(,Q,W)/L Rewind the magtape (W),
compile the first file, and
suppress Q (questionable)
error indications in the
listing. When a binary switch
C-10
COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS
is not present, the delimiting
comma must appear.
.COMPILE/MACRO A=MTA0:(,Q,)/L Compile the file at the
current position of the tape
and suppress Q error
indications on the listing.
When the source and binary
switches are not present, the
delimiting commas must appear.
.COMPILE FOO (NOWARN DEBUG) Compile the file named FOO
using the F10 source switches
NOWARN and DEBUG.
C.7 LINK SWITCHES
One linking loader is available to you on TOPS-10: the LINK program.
(See the TOPS-10 LINK Reference Manual for complete information.) In
complex loading procedures, it might be necessary to pass switches to
LINK to direct its operation. The percent (%) character accomplishes
this passing of switches.
The LINK switch specification, preceded and followed by a delimiter,
follows the % character. The delimiter can be any character; however,
you must be careful that the character you use does not have a
specific meaning to COMPIL. The @ character indicates an indirect
command file, and the semicolon (;) causes the remainder of the line
to be treated as a comment and, therefore, is ignored. The
recommended delimiter is a single or double quotation mark. The
beginning and ending delimiter must be the same character.
A LINK specification consists of the switch name and, optionally, a
keyword and a value. See TOPS-10 LINK Reference Manual for switch
formats.
C-11
D-1
APPENDIX D
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
D.1 FILE NAME EXTENSIONS
Table D-1 lists the file name extensions that have specific meanings
to TOPS-10.
Table D-1: File Name Extensions
______________________________________________________________________
File Name
Extension Type of File Meaning
______________________________________________________________________
ABS Object Absolute (nonrelocatable) program.
AID Source Source file in AID language.
ALG Source Source file in ALGOL language.
ALP ASCII Printer forms alignment.
ATO ASCII OPSER automatic command file.
AWT Binary Data for automatic wire tester.
B10 Source Source file in BLISS-10.
B11 Source Source file in BLISS-11.
B16 ASCII Source file in BLISS-16.
B32 ASCII Source file in BLISS-32.
B36 ASCII Source file in BLISS-36.
BAC Object Reserved for output from the BASIC
compiler.
BAK Source Backup file from TECO or SOS.
BAS Source Source file in BASIC language.
BCM ASCII Listing file created by FILCOM
(binary compare).
BCP Source Source file in BCPL language.
BIN Binary Binary file.
BLB ASCII Blurb file.
BLI Source Source file in BLISS language.
BUG Object Saved to show a program error.
BWR ASCII Beware file listing warnings about a
D-1
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
file or program.
D-2
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
CAL Object CAL data and program files.
CBL Source Source file in COBOL language.
CCL ASCII Alternate convention for command
file (@ command file construction
for programs other than COMPIL).
CCO ASCII Listing of modifications to
nonresident software.
CDP ASCII, Binary Spooled output for card punch.
CFC ASCII Compressed file compare. Group of
.SCM files combined with PIP.
CKP Binary Checkpoint core image file created
by COBOL operating system.
CHN Object CHAIN file.
CMD ASCII Command file for indirect commands
(@ construction for COMPIL).
CMP ASCII Complaint file by GRIPE.
COR ASCII Correction file for SOUP.
CRF ASCII CREF (cross-reference) input file.
CTL ASCII Batch control file.
DAE Binary Default output for DAEMON-taken core
dumps.
DAT ASCII, Binary Data (FORTRAN) file.
DBS Binary Data Base Management System data
file.
DDT ASCII Input file to FILDDT.
DCT ASCII Dictionary of words.
DIR ASCII Directory from FILE command or
DIRECT program.
DMP ASCII COBOL compiler dump file.
DOC ASCII Listing of modifications to the most
recent version of the software.
DRW Binary Drawing for VB10C drawing system.
DSE ASCII Directory sorted by extension.
DSF ASCII Directory sorted by file name.
ERR ASCII Error message file.
EXE Object Executable program.
F4 Source Source file in Fortran-40 (FORTRAN)
language.
FAI Source Source file in FAIL language.
FFS ASCII Fast FORTRAN stream.
FLO ASCII English language flowchart.
FOR Source Source file in FORTRAN-10 language.
FRM ASCII Blank form for handwritten records.
FTP Source FORTRAN test programs.
FUD ASCII FUDGE2 listing output.
GND ASCII List of ground pins for automatic
wirewrap.
HGH Object Nonsharable high segment of a
two-segment program (created by SAVE
command).
HLP ASCII Help files containing switch
explanations, etc.
D-3
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
IDA ASCII, Binary COBOL ISAM data file.
IDX ASCII, SIXBIT Index file of a COBOL ISAM file.
INI ASCII, Binary Initialization file.
LAP ASCII Output from the LISP compiler.
LIB ASCII COBOL source library.
LOG ASCII MPB or LINK-10 log file.
LOW Object Low segment of a two-segment program
(created by SAVE command).
LPT ASCII Spooled output for line printer.
LSD ASCII Default output for DUMP program.
LSQ ASCII Queue listing created by QUEUE
program.
LST ASCII Listing data created by assemblers
and compilers.
MAC Source Source file in MACRO language.
MAN ASCII Manual (documentation) file.
MAP ASCII Loader or LINK-10 map file.
MEM ASCII Memorandum file typically output
from RUNOFF.
MIC ASCII MIC command file.
MID Source Source file in MIDAS (MIT Assembler)
language.
MIM Binary Snapshot of MIMIC simulator.
MSB Object Music compiler binary output.
MUS Source Music compiler input.
NEW All New version of a program or file.
OBJ Object PDP-11 relocatable binary file.
OLD Source, Object Backup source program.
OPR ASCII Installation and assembly
instructions.
OVR Object COBOL overlay file.
P11 Source Source program in MACY11 language.
PAK ASCII Files compressed by PACK.TEC to save
disk space.
PAL Source Source file in PAL10 (PDP-8
assembler).
PAS Source Source file in Pascal language.
PL1 Source Source file in PL1 language.
PLM ASCII Program Logic Manual.
PLO Binary Compressed plot output.
PLT ASCII Spooled output for plotter.
PPL Source Source file in PPL language.
PTP ASCII, Binary Spooled output for paper-tape punch.
Qxx ASCII Edit backup file, like .BAK (all
xx).
QUD ASCII, Binary Queued data file.
QUE Binary Queue request file.
QUF Binary Master queue and request file.
REL Object Relocatable binary file.
RIM Object RIM loader file.
D-4
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
RMT Object Read-in mode (RIM) format file
(PIP).
RNB ASCII RUNOFF input for producting a .BLB
file.
RNC ASCII RUNOFF input for producing a .CCO
file.
RND ASCII RUNOFF input for producing a .DOC
file.
RNE ASCII RUNOFF input for error message text.
RNH ASCII RUNOFF input for producing a .HLP
file.
RNL ASCII RUNOFF input for program logic
manual.
RNM ASCII RUNOFF input for producing a .MAN
file.
RNO ASCII Programming specifications in RUNOFF
input to produce .MEM file.
RNP ASCII RUNOFF input for producing a .OPR
file.
RNS ASCII RUNOFF input for text file of
standards.
RSP ASCII Script response time log file.
RSX All Files for RSX-11D.
RTB Object Read-in mode (RIM10B) format file
(PIP).
SAI Source Source file in SAIL language.
SCD ASCII Differences in directory.
SCM ASCII Listing file created by FILCOM
(source compare).
SCP ASCII SCRIPT control file.
SEQ ASCII, SIXBIT Sequential COBOL data file, input to
ISAM program.
SFD Binary Subfile directory (reserved usage).
SIM Source Source file in SIMULA language.
SMP Source Source file in SIMPLE language.
SNO Source Source file in SNOBOL language.
SNP ASCII Snapshot of disk by DSKLST.
SOS ASCII SOS command file.
SPC ASCII Corrected file for SPELL program.
SPD ASCII Dictionary for SPELL program.
SPM ASCII File of misspelled words for SPELL
program.
SPU ASCII File of upper case words for SPELL
program.
SPX ASCII File of exception (error) lines for
SPELL program.
SRC ASCII Source files.
STD ASCII Standards.
SVE Object .SAVed file from a single user
monitor.
SYM Binary LINK-10 symbol file.
SYS Binary Special system files.
D-5
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
TEC ASCII TECO macro.
TEM ASCII, Binary Temporary files.
TMP ASCII, Binary Temporary files.
TPB ASCII Typeset input for producing a .BLB
file.
TPC ASCII Typeset input for producing a .CCO
file.
TPD ASCII Typeset input for producing a .DOC
file.
TPE ASCII Typeset input for producing error
message text.
TPH ASCII Typeset input for producing a .HLP
file.
TPL ASCII Typeset input for producing a logic
manual.
TPM ASCII Typeset for producing a .MAN file.
TPO ASCII Typeset input for producing a
programming specification.
TPP ASCII Typeset input for producing an .OPR
file.
TST All Test data.
TXT ASCII Text file.
UFD Binary User file directory (reserved
usage).
UPD ASCII Updates flagged in margin (FILCOM).
VMX Object Expanded save file starting at a
location greater than zero and used
as a special support program for
virtual memory.
WCH ASCII SCRIPT monitor (WATCH) file.
WRL ASCII Wirelist.
XOR Binary Module data for XOR tester.
XPN Object Expanded save file (FILEX and
LINK-10).
Zxx ASCII Edit original file (all xx).
______________________________________________________________________
D-6
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
D.2 RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS
Table D-2 is a list of the project-programmer numbers that are
allocated for specific functions in TOPS-10.
Table D-2: Project-Programmer Numbers
______________________________________________________________________
Number Use of Number
______________________________________________________________________
1,1 Master File Directory (MFD).
1,2 Operator functions.
1,3 Old or superseded versions of system programs (device
OLD:).
1,4 System library (device SYS:).
1,5 New or experimental versions of system programs
(device NEW:).
1,6 User maintained library (device PUB:).
1,7 System Accounting PPN.
2,* Recommended for operator's use.
2,5 Storage for help text files (*.HLP) (device HLP:).
3,3 System and Multiprogram Batch (MPB) queues.
4,* Test and performance analysis systems.
4,4 FAILSAFE testing.
4,5 FAILSAFE testing.
5,* Libraries.
5,1 BASIC source library (device BAS:).
5,2 COBOL source library for COPY verb (device COB:).
5,3 PDP-11 source library (device MXI:).
5,4 ALGOL source library (device ALG:).
5,5 BLISS source library (device BLI:).
5,6 FORTRAN source library (device FOR:).
5,7 MACRO source library (device MAC:).
5,10 Text editor library (device TED:).
5,11 Rel file library (device REL:).
5,12 RUNOFF library (device RNO:).
5,13 SNOBOL library (device SNO:).
5,14 Doc file library (device DOC:).
5,15 FAIL library (device FAI:).
5,16 MUSIC library (device MUS:).
5,17 MACRO universal files (device UNV:).
5,20 NELIAC (device NEL:).
5,21 DUMP (device DMP:).
5,22 POP2 (device POP:).
5,23 Test library (device TST:).
5,24 DBS library (device DBS:).
5,25 MIC library (device MIC:).
5,27 CTL library (device CTL:).
5,30 Games library (device GAM:).
D-7
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
5,32 DAS60 software (device D60:).
5,33 Users Test Package (device UTP:).
5,36 LNO1 font library (device FNT:).
6,* Field service and hardware diagnostics.
7,7 Software acceptance.
10,1 Special system programming storage region containing
copies of SYS:CRASH.EXE (device XPN:).
10,6 Software distribution.
10,7 Software distribution (device DEC:).
______________________________________________________________________
D-8
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
D.3 ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES
Table D-3 lists ersatz device names that are predefined in TOPS-10.
To avoid confusion, it is recommended that these names not be used for
private file structures.
Table D-3: Ersatz Device Names
______________________________________________________________________
Name Use UFD Search List
______________________________________________________________________
ACT: Accounting library [1,7] System
ALG: ALGOL library [5,4] System
ALL: User's All currently
mounted structures
APL: APL library [5,3] System
BAS: BASIC library [5,1] System
BLI: BLISS library [5,5] System
COB: COBOL library [5,2] System
CTL: CTL library [5,27] System
D60: DAS60 software [5,32] System
DBS: DBS library [5,24] System
DMP: DUMP library [5,21] System
DEC: DEC-supplied [10,7] System
software
DOC: DOC file library [5,14] System
DSK: User's Job
FAI: FAIL library [5,15] System
FFA: Operator's area [1,2] System
FOR: FORTRAN library [5,6] System
FNT: Fonts for LNO1 [5,36] System
GAM: Games library [5,30] System
HLP: HELP library [2,5] System
LIB: User defined library Set by each user System
MAC: MACRO library [5,7] System
MIC: MIC library [5,25] System
MFD: UFD library [1,1] System
MUS: Music library [5,16] System
MXI: PDP-11 library [5,3] System
NEL: NELIAC library [5,20] System
NEW: New system library [1,5] System
OLD: Old system library [1,3] System
POP: POP2 library [5,22] System
PUB: User maintained [1,6] System
library
REL: REL file library [5,11] System
RNO: RUNOFF library [5,12] System
SNO: SNOBOL library [5,13] System
D-9
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
SSL: System Search List [*,*] System
STD: Standard Software [1,4] System
SYS: System library [1,4] System
TED: Text editor library [5,10] System
TST: Test library [5,23] System
UMD: Field Service library [6,6] System
UNV: MACRO universal [5,17] System
library
UTP: User's Test Package [5,33] System
XPN: Crash file library [10,1] System
______________________________________________________________________
D-10
APPENDIX E
CARD CODES
Table E-1: ASCII Card Codes
______________________________________________________________________
ASCII Octal Card ASCII Octal Card
Character Code Punches Character Code Punches
______________________________________________________________________
NULL 00 12-0-9-8-1 @ 100 8-4
CTRL/A 01 12-9-1 A 101 12-1
CTRL/B 02 12-9-2 B 102 12-2
CTRL/C 03 12-9-3 C 103 12-3
CTRL/D 04 9-7 D 104 12-4
CTRL/E 05 0-9-8-5 E 105 12-5
CTRL/F 06 0-9-8-6 F 106 12-6
CTRL/G 07 0-9-8-7 G 107 12-7
CTRL/H 10 11-9-6 H 110 12-8
TAB 11 12-9-5 I 111 12-9
LF 12 0-9-5 J 112 11-1
VT 13 12-9-8-3 K 113 11-2
FF 14 12-9-8-4 L 114 11-3
CR 15 12-9-8-5 M 115 11-4
CTRL/N 16 12-9-8-6 N 116 11-5
CTRL/O 17 12-9-8-7 O 117 11-6
CTRL/P 20 12-11-9-8-1 P 120 11-7
CTRL/Q 21 11-9-1 Q 121 11-8
CTRL/R 22 11-9-2 R 122 11-9
CTRL/S 23 11-9-3 S 123 0-2
CTRL/T 24 9-8-4 T 124 0-3
CTRL/U 25 9-8-5 U 125 0-4
______________________________________________________________________
NOTE
The ASCII character ESCAPE (octal 33) is also CTRL-[
on a terminal.
E-1
CARD CODES
Table E-1: ASCII Card Codes (Cont.)
______________________________________________________________________
ASCII Octal Card ASCII Octal Card
Character Code Punches Character Code Punches
______________________________________________________________________
CTRL/V 26 9-2 V 126 0-5
CTRL/W 27 0-9-6 W 127 0-6
CTRL/X 30 11-9-8 X 130 0-7
CTRL/Y 31 11-9-8-1 Y 131 0-8
CTRL/Z 32 9-8-7 Z 132 0-9
ESCAPE 33 0-9-7 [ 133 12-8-2
CTRL-_ 34 11-9-8-4 _ 134 0-8-2
CTRL-] 35 11-9-8-5 ] 135 11-8-2
CTRL-_ 36 11-9-8-6 _ 136 11-8-7
CTRL/ 37 11-9-8-7 __ 137 0-8-5
SPACE 40 , 140 8-1
! 41 12-8-7 a 141 12-0-1
' 42 8-7 b 142 12-0-2
_ 43 8-3 c 143 12-0-3
$ 44 11-8-3 d 144 12-0-4
% 45 0-8-4 e 145 12-0-5
_ 46 12 f 146 12-0-6
' 47 8-5 g 147 12-0-7
( 50 12-8-5 h 150 12-0-8
) 51 11-8-5 i 151 12-0-9
_ 52 11-8-4 j 152 12-11-1
+ 53 12-8-6 k 153 12-11-2
, 54 0-8-3 l 154 12-11-3
- 55 11 m 155 12-11-4
_. 56 12-8-3 n 156 12-11-5
/ 57 0-1 o 157 12-11-6
0 60 0 p 160 12-11-7
1 61 1 q 161 12-11-8
2 62 2 r 162 12-11-9
3 63 3 s 163 11-0-2
4 64 4 t 164 11-0-3
5 65 5 u 165 11-0-4
6 66 6 v 166 11-0-5
7 67 7 w 167 11-0-6
8 70 8 x 170 11-0-7
9 71 9 y 171 11-0-8
: 72 8-2 z 172 11-0-9
; 73 1-8-6 { 173 12-0
< 74 12-8-4 | 174 12-11
= 75 8-6 } 175 11-0
> 76 0-8-6 ~ 176 11-0-1
? 77 0-8-7 DEL 177 12-9-7
______________________________________________________________________
E-2
CARD CODES
NOTE
The ASCII characters } and ~ (octal 175 and 176) are
treated by the monitor as ALTmode which is often
considered to be the same as ESCAPE.
E-3
CARD CODES
Table E-2: DEC-026 Card Codes
______________________________________________________________________
Octal Card Octal Card
Character Code Punches Character Code Punches
______________________________________________________________________
SPACE 40 100 8-4
! 41 12-8-7 A 101 12-1
' 42 0-8-5 B 102 12-2
# 43 0-8-6 C 103 12-3
$ 44 11-8-3 D 104 12-4
% 45 0-8-7 E 105 12-5
& 46 11-8-7 F 106 12-6
' 47 8-6 G 107 12-7
( 50 0-8-4 H 110 12-8
) 51 12-8-4 I 111 12-9
* 52 11-8-4 J 112 11-1
+ 53 12 K 113 11-2
, 54 0-8-3 L 114 11-3
- 55 11 M 115 11-4
. 56 12-8-3 N 116 11-5
/ 57 0-1 O 117 11-6
0 60 0 P 120 11-7
1 61 1 Q 121 11-8
2 62 2 R 122 11-9
3 63 3 S 123 0-2
4 64 4 T 124 0-3
5 65 5 U 125 0-4
6 66 6 V 126 0-5
7 67 7 W 127 0-6
8 70 8 X 130 0-7
9 71 9 Y 131 0-8
: 72 11-8-2/11-0 Z 132 0-9
; 73 0-8-2 [ 133 11-8-5
< 74 12-8-6 \ 134 8-7
= 75 8-3 ] 135 12-8-5
> 76 11-8-6 ^ 136 8-5
? 77 12-8-2/12-0 _ 137 8-2
______________________________________________________________________
NOTE
Octal codes and 140-177 are the same as in ASCII.
E-4
APPENDIX F
TEMPORARY FILES
The temporary files in Table F-1 are used by various programs in the
DECsystem-10 computing system. These files are in the following form:
nnnxxx.TMP
where nnn is the user's job number in decimal with leading zeroes to
make three digits and xxx specifies the use of the file.
Table F-1: Temporary Files
______________________________________________________________________
Name Meaning
______________________________________________________________________
nnnALG.TMP Read by ALGOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled. It may also contain the
command NAME! that causes ALGOL to transfer
control to the named program.
nnnAS1.TMP Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
nnnAS2.TMP input to the COBOL assembler.
nnnAS3.TMP
nnnBL1.TMP Read by BLISS and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
nnnCOB.TMP Read by COBOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled. It may also contain the
command NAME! which causes COBOL to transfer
control to the named program.
nnnCPY.TMP Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
copies of source files with library routines
inserted.
F-1
TEMPORARY FILES
nnnCRE.TMP Read by CREF and contains commands for each file
that has produced a CREF listing on the disk.
COMPIL also reads this file each time a new CREF
listing is generated to prevent multiple
requests for the same file and to prevent
discarding other requests that may not yet have
been listed.
nnnDAE.TMP Written by DAEMON to be read by DUMP.
nnnDMP.TMP Read by DUMP as an input command file.
nnnEDS.TMP Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the
most recent EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE command.
nnnEDT.TMP Written by COMPIL and read by TECO. It contains
a command for each EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE
command. For the MAKE or CREATE commands, it
contains the command
S file.ext [p,p] <ESC>
For TECO or EDIT commands, it contains the
command
S file.ext [p,p]
nnnERA.TMP Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and is the
error file.
nnnFA1.TMP Read by FAIL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
nnnFOR.TMP Read by FORTRAN and contains one line for each
program to be compiled. It may also contain the
command NAME! which causes FORTRAN to transfer
control to the named program.
nnnGEN.TMP Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
the output of syntax processing.
nnnKJO.TMP Read by KJOB as an input command file.
nnnLGO.TMP Read by LOGOUT as an input command file.
nnnLHC.TMP Created and read by LINK-10 and contains the
overflow of the user's high segment. The file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
nnnLIT.TMP Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
copy of the literal pool.
F-2
TEMPORARY FILES
nnnLLC.TMP Created and read by LINK-10 and contains the
overflow of the user's low segment. This file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
nnnLLS.TMP Created and read by LINK-10 and contains the
overflow of the user's symbol file. This file
is used to produce core images or saved files.
nnnLNK.TMP Read by LINK-10 and contains commands necessary
for loading.
nnnMAC.TMP Read by MACRO and contains one line for each
program to be assembled. It may also contain
the command NAME! which causes MACRO to
transfer control to the named program.
nnnP11.TMP Read by MACY11 (the PDP-11 assembler for the
PDP-10) and contains one line for each program
to be assembled.
nnnPLS.TMP Read by PLEASE as an input command file.
nnnPIP.TMP Read by PIP and contains commands to implement
the COMPIL-class commands that run PIP.
nnnQUE.TMP Read by QUEUE as an input command file.
nnnRNO.TMP Read by RUNOFF and contains commands for each
file which has produced a RUNOFF listing on the
disk.
nnnS01.TMP Written, read and deleted by COBOL and contains
the intermediate sort results of the data.
nnnSVC.TMP Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the
most recent COMPIL, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command.
nnnSNO.TMP Read by SNOBOL and contains one line for each
program to be compiled.
nnnTEC.TMP Created by TECO and contains output file until
the rename process.
nnnXFO.TMP Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on
the output side.
nnnXFR.TMP Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on
the input side.
______________________________________________________________________
F-3
G-1
APPENDIX G
SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES
ASCII ASCII ASCII
SIXBIT Character 7-Bit SIXBIT Character 7-Bit Character 7-Bit
00 Space 040 | 40 100 | ` 140
01 ! 041 | 41 A 101 | a 141
02 " 042 | 42 B 102 | b 142
03 # 043 | 43 C 103 | c 143
04 $ 044 | 44 D 104 | d 144
05 % 045 | 45 E 105 | e 145
06 & 046 | 46 F 106 | f 146
07 ' 047 | 47 G 107 | g 147
10 ( 050 | 50 H 110 | h 150
11 ) 051 | 51 I 111 | i 151
12 * 052 | 52 J 112 | j 152
13 + 053 | 53 K 113 | k 153
14 , 054 | 54 L 114 | l 154
15 - 055 | 55 M 115 | m 155
16 . 056 | 56 N 116 | n 156
17 / 057 | 57 O 117 | o 157
20 0 060 | 60 P 120 | p 160
21 1 061 | 61 Q 121 | q 161
22 2 062 | 62 R 122 | r 162
23 3 063 | 63 S 123 | s 163
24 4 064 | 64 T 124 | t 164
25 5 065 | 65 U 125 | u 165
26 6 066 | 66 V 126 | v 166
27 7 067 | 67 W 127 | w 167
30 8 070 | 70 X 130 | x 170
31 9 071 | 71 Y 131 | y 171
32 : 072 | 72 Z 132 | z 172
G-1
SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES
33 ; 073 | 73 [ 133 | { 173
34 < 074 | 74 \ 134 | | 174
35 = 075 | 75 ] 135 | } 175
36 > 076 | 76 ^ 136 | ~ 176
37 ? 077 | 77 _ 137 | Delete 177
G-2
G-3
INDEX
-A- CCONTINUE command, 2-26
Changing
Access dates, 2-95 accounts, 2-304
ACCESS.USER file, 1-31 buffer number, 2-317
Accessing nodes, 2-172, 2-329
DECtapes, 2-128 processors, 2-312
devices, 2-200 protection codes, 2-251
files, 1-28, 1-31 Checksum, 2-96
the system, 2-174 Clearing directories, 2-411
ACCOUNT command, 2-5 CLOSE command, 2-30
Allocating Closing files, 2-134
devices, 2-6 Combining
resources, 2-6 files, 2-45
Alternate contexts, 1-5 Command
ANF-10, 2-211, 2-213 functions, A-1
nodes, 2-329 language interpreter, 1-3
switch, 2-210 user-defined, 2-86
Arguments Command line
command, 1-12 continuing, 1-12
date-time, 1-13 editing, 1-6
ASCII card codes, E-1 ending, 1-12
ASCII code, G-1 Commands
ASSIGN command, 1-22, 2-14 arguments, 1-12
Assigning COMPILE-class, C-1
core memory, 2-47 ending, 1-12
devices, 2-14 options, 1-16
logical names, 2-14, 2-200 privileged, 2-332
Attaching jobs, 2-16, 2-286 switches, 1-16
Authorizing users, 1-1 syntax, 1-11
Available devices, 2-292 terminating, 1-4
user-definable, 1-37
-B- Comments, 1-17
COMPILE command, 2-32
Backing up files, 2-94 COMPILE-class commands, C-1
BACKSPACE command, 2-22 Compiling programs, 2-32
Batch, 1-3 Configuring the system, 2-217
controller, 2-367 CONTINUE program, 2-43
requests, 2-367 Continuing
BATCON, 2-367 jobs, 2-156
Binary files, 2-32, 2-136 programs, 2-26, 2-43
Break points, 2-307 terminal output, 1-9
Buffers, 2-317 Control
characters, 1-6
-C- files, 2-367
sequences, 1-38
Calling files, 1-18 Copying files, 2-45
Canceling terminal output, 1-9 Core
Cancelling queue requests, 2-23 argument, 2-47
Index-1
Core (Cont.) DELETE
assigning, 2-47 command, 2-89
examining, 2-119 key, 1-6
image files, 2-297 Deleting
CORE command, 2-47 characters, 1-6
Correcting typing errors, 1-6 files, 2-89, 2-411
CPU time limits, 2-340 lines, 1-7
Creating words, 1-7
core image files, 2-297 DEPOSIT command, 2-91
queue entries, 2-239, 2-256, Depositing
2-367, 2-387 bits, 2-91
queue requests, 2-49, 2-225 data, 2-91
CREF command, 2-60 information, 2-91
Cross-referenced listings, 2-60, Detaching
2-78, 2-122, 2-167 jobs, 2-16, 2-93, 2-286
CSTART command, 2-63 terminals, 2-93
CTRL/C, 1-6, 2-140 Device
CTRL/O, 1-9 errors, 2-156
CTRL/Q, 1-9 ersatz names, 1-25
CTRL/R, 1-8 generic names, 1-21
CTRL/S, 1-9 logical names, 1-22
CTRL/T, 1-10, 2-403 physical names, 1-22
CTRL/U, 1-7 user-defined names, 1-22
CTRL/W, 1-7 Devices
Current virtual page limit, 2-352 accessing, 2-200
allocating, 2-6
-D- assigning, 2-14
deassigning, 2-75, 2-134
D command, 2-91 disk, 1-22
Date-time arguments, 1-13 dismounting, 2-108
DAYTIME command, 2-66 locating, 2-409
DDT command, 2-67 output, 1-20, 2-256
Deallocating resources, 2-71 peripheral, 1-20
Deassigning devices, 2-75, 2-134 reassigning, 2-284
Debugging relinquishing, 2-71
COBOL programs, 2-77 restricted, 2-14
programs, 2-67, 2-77, 2-307 spooling, 2-182, 2-337
DEC-026 card codes, E-4 Directories
DECLARE command, 2-86 clearing, 2-411
DECnet, 2-213 default, 1-35
nodes, 2-330 expunging, 2-411
switch, 2-210 master-file, 1-26
DECtape specifying, 1-32
accessing, 2-128 sub-file, 1-26, 1-35
delimiters, 2-161 user-file, 1-26, 1-35
files, 1-18 Directory
identifiers, 2-161 areas, 1-1
labelling, 2-161 paths, 1-35
Default DIRECTORY command, 2-94
directories, 1-35 Disabling privileges, 2-106
for system, 1-31 Disk
Deferring spooled requests, 2-321 devices, 1-22
Index-2
Disk (Cont.) Files, 1-18
I/O, 2-326 accessing, 1-28, 1-31, 2-251
overflow, 2-325 backup, 2-94
priority setting, 2-326 binary, 2-136
quota, 2-325 combining, 2-45
usage statistics, 2-114 copying, 2-45
Disk usage statistics, 2-181 DECtape, 1-18
Dismounting devices, 2-108 deleting, 2-89, 2-411
Displaying editing, 2-384
files, 2-400 find, 2-98
queues, 2-362 library, 2-136
resources, 2-358 listing, 2-163, 2-239
DSK command, 2-114 option, B-1
DSK:, 1-34 organizing, 1-35
printing, 2-163, 2-239
-E- protecting, 1-28, 2-237, 2-251,
2-318
E command, 2-119 .REL, 2-136
Editing renaming, 2-290
command lines, 1-6 specifying, 1-18, 1-31, 1-33
files, 2-384 structure, 1-22
Enabling temporary, F-1
DDT breakpoint facility, 2-314 transferring, 2-45
privileges, 2-116 Filler characters, 2-346
End-of-file marks, 2-118 FINISH command, 2-134
Ending Font control, 1-40
commands, 1-12 FUDGE command, 2-136
jobs, 2-157
Entering user level, 2-44, 2-141 -G-
EOF command, 2-118
Errors Generic device names, 1-21
device, 2-156 GET command, 2-138
reporting, 2-336 Global
Ersatz devices, 1-25, D-9 switches, 1-16
ESCape sequences, 1-38
EXAMINE command, 2-119 -H-
Examining
core, 2-119 Halting programs, 2-140
memory, 2-119 HELP command, 2-142
Executing programs, 2-121 High-priority run queue, 2-332
Expunging directories, 2-411 Holding
terminal output, 1-9
-F- Host nodes, 2-217
FENCE, 1-34 -I-
File
extensions, 1-26 Information
names, 1-26 depositing, 2-91
standard extensions, D-1 job, 1-10, 2-221, 2-354, 2-403
structure, 1-34 network, 2-217
FILE command, 2-128 obtaining, 2-142
File Daemon, 1-31 system, 2-380
Index-3
INITIA command, 2-147 Loading programs, 2-138, 2-165
Initiating jobs, 2-174 Local switches, 1-16
Input queues, 2-256 LOCATE command, 2-172
Interactive mode, 1-3 Locating devices, 2-409
Interpreters, 1-3 Log files, 2-367
Interrupting programs, 1-6, 2-140 Logging
in, 2-174
-J- out, 2-157
Logical
JCONTINUE command, 2-156 device names, 1-22
Job names, 2-200
data area, 2-288
information, 2-221, 2-354,
2-403 -M-
number, 2-221
search list, 1-34 Master-file directories (MFD),
statistics, 2-354 1-26
status, 1-10 MCR, 2-217
Jobs Memory
attaching, 2-16, 2-286 examining, 2-119
continuing, 2-156 pages, 2-181, 2-183, 2-352
detaching, 2-16, 2-286 Messages, 2-222, 2-301
ending, 2-157 MIC commands, 2-197
initiating, 2-174 Monitor, 1-1
killing, 2-157 Monitor level, 1-4, 1-6
reattaching, 2-286 Mounting devices, 2-200
starting, 2-174 Moving tapes, 2-22, 2-364
temporary, 2-16, 2-286
-K- -N-
Killing Names
jobs, 2-157 device, 1-20
KJOB command, 2-157 directory, 1-26
file, 1-26
-L- Network
information, 2-209, 2-217
Labelling Node-id argument, 2-217
DECtape, 2-161 Nodes
tapes, 2-8, 2-203 changing, 2-172, 2-329
Library
files, 2-136
system, D-9 -O-
Line printer output, 2-163, 2-239
Line-editing, 1-6 Operator coverage, 2-299
Lines OPR:, 2-301
continuing, 1-12 Optimizing FORTRAN programs, 2-81
deleting, 1-7 Option files, B-1
reprinting, 1-8 Output
Listing devices, 1-20, 2-256
files, 2-163 queues, 2-256
LN01 laser printer, 1-38 terminal, 2-400
Index-4
-P- -Q-
Queue
cancelling requests, 2-23
Page limit creating entries, 2-239, 2-256,
physical, 2-181 2-367, 2-387
Pages creating requests, 2-49, 2-225
memory, 2-181, 2-183, 2-334, deleting requests, 2-23
2-352 input, 2-256
physical limit, 2-334 requests, 2-321
Paging guidelines, 2-334 submitting requests, 2-367
Paper tape punch queue, 2-387 terminating requests, 2-23
Passwords, 1-3 QUEUE command, 2-256
Paths Quotas on disk, 2-325
directory, 1-35
specifying, 2-175 -R-
Peripheral devices, 1-20
Permanent switches, 1-16 R command, 2-282
Physical Reassigning devices, 2-284
device names, 1-22 Reattaching jobs, 2-286
page limit, 2-334 Recalling file names, C-1
Physical page limit, 2-181 REENTER command, 2-288
PJOB command, 2-221 Reinitializing programs, 2-288
PLEASE command, 2-222 .REL files, 2-136
Plotter output, 2-225 Relinquishing devices, 2-71
PPNs, 1-3 Renaming files, 2-290
PRESERVE command, 2-237 Reprinting lines, 1-8
Printing files, 2-163, 2-239 Request-type argument, 2-23
Privileged commands, 2-312, 2-326, Reserved PPNs, 1-3, D-7
2-332 RESOURCES command, 2-292
Processor Restarting programs, 2-288
changing, 2-312 Restricted devices, 1-23, 2-14
Program level, 1-4 Rewinding tape, 2-293
Programs RUBOUT key, 1-6
compiling, 2-32 RUN command, 2-294
continuing, 2-26 Run time, 2-340, 2-385
debugging, 2-67, 2-77 Running
executing, 2-121 programs, 1-4, 2-121, 2-294
halting, 2-140 system programs, 2-282
interrupting, 1-6
loading, 2-138, 2-165 -S-
reinitializing, 2-288
restarting, 2-288 SAVE command, 2-297
running, 1-4, 2-121, 2-294 Schedule bits, 2-299
starting, 2-26, 2-63, 2-294, Search list
2-365 specifying, 2-182
stopping, 2-140 Sending messages, 2-222, 2-301
Project-programmer numbers, 1-1 SESSION command, 2-304
Prompts, 1-4 SET BLOCKSIZE command, 2-306
Protection codes, 1-28, 2-251 SET BREAK command, 2-307
PUNCH command, 2-253 SET CDR command, 2-311
Punching cards, 2-49 SET CPU command, 2-312
Index-5
SET DDT BREAKPOINT command, 2-314 Starting (Cont.)
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command, 2-316 jobs, 2-174
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command, programs, 2-26, 2-63, 2-294,
2-317 2-365
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command, Statistics on jobs, 2-354
2-318 Stopping
SET DEFER command, 2-321 execution, 2-140
SET DENSITY command, 2-324 terminal output, 1-9
SET DSKFUL command, 2-325 Sub-file directories (SFD), 1-26,
SET DSKPRI command, 2-326 1-35
SET FORMAT command, 2-328 SUBMIT command, 2-367
SET HOST command, 2-329 Suppressing terminal output, 1-9
SET HOST command restriction, Switch format, 1-16
2-330 SWITCH.INI files, B-1
SET HPQ command, 2-332 SYSTAT command, 2-380
SET PHYSICAL command, 2-334 System
SET RETRY command, 2-336 configuration, 2-217
SET SPOOL command, 2-337 defaults, 1-31
SET TERMINAL command, 2-339 information, 2-380
SET TIME command, 2-340 libraries, 1-25, D-9
SET TTY command, 2-342 programs, 2-282
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command, 2-352 schedule, 2-299
SET WATCH command, 2-354 standard names, D-1
Setting status, 2-380
break points, 2-307 storage, 1-18
card reader, 2-311
disk buffer size, 2-316 -T-
disk priority, 2-326
tape blocksize, 2-306 Tape
tape density, 2-324 drive controller, 2-336
tape mode, 2-328 error reporting, 2-336
terminal characteristics, 2-342 setting blocksize, 2-306
SHOW ALLOCATION command, 2-358 setting density, 2-324
SHOW QUEUES command, 2-362 Tapes
SIXBIT code, 1-33, G-1 labelling, 2-8, 2-203
SKIP command, 2-364 moving, 2-22
Spacing tapes, 2-22 spacing, 2-22
Specifying unloading, 2-402
directories, 1-32 TECO command, 2-384
files, 1-18, 1-31, 1-33 Temporary
paths, 2-175 files, F-1
search lists, 2-182 jobs, 2-16, 2-286
Spooling devices, 2-182 switches, 1-16
SSAVE command, 2-297 Terminal
Standard attributes, 2-147
compilers, 2-32 characteristics, 2-147
file extensions, D-1 number, 2-221
system names, D-1 output, 1-9
START command, 2-365 setting characteristics, 2-342
Starting types, 2-342
batch jobs, 2-367 Terminating
execution, 2-294, 2-365 commands, 1-4
Index-6
Terminating (Cont.) User level, 1-4, 2-141
I/O, 2-30, 2-134 User-defined
queue requests, 2-23 commands, 1-37, 2-86
TIME command, 2-385 device names, 1-22
Topology User-file directories (UFD), 1-26,
ANF-10 network, 2-214 1-35
DECnet-10 network, 2-214 USESTAT command, 2-403
TOPS-10, 1-1
TPUNCH command, 2-387 -V-
Transferring files, 2-45
TRANSLATE command, 2-399 VERSION command, 2-405
TYPE command, 2-400 Virtual page limit, 2-183
Type-ahead, 1-11
-W-
-U-
WHERE command, 2-409
UFD, 1-35 Wildcards, 1-31
Unloading tapes, 2-402
Usage statistics -Z-
disk, 2-181
Usage statistics on disk, 2-114 ZERO command, 2-411
Index-7